HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrion Construction Corporation; 2005-03-15; PWS05-08ENG Part 2 of 21.02 Reference Specifications and Standards
Without limiting the general aspects of other requirements of these specifications, all
surface preparation, coating and painting of surfaces shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE), the Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC), the American Concrete Institute, the Forest
Products Research Society, and the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
In the event of a conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and these
specifications, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be
brought to the attention of the Owner for clarification and direction prior to ordering or
providing any materials or labor.
1.03 Painting Subcontractor
Where protective coatings are to be performed by a subcontractor, said subcontractor
must possess a valid state license as required for performance of the painting and
coating work called for in this specification and shall have a minimum of five years
practical experience and successful history in the application of specified products to
surfaces and facilities of water and wastewater treatment facilities. Upon request, he
shall substantiate this requirement by furnishing a list of references.
1.04 Shop Drawing Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
For each coating system to be used, the Contractor shall submit for Owner's review and
approval the following data:
1. Paint manufacturer's data sheet for each product used, including statements on
the suitability of the material for the intended use.
2. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation
and application.
Samples of colors and finishes available for each product. Where custom mixed
colors are specified (e.g. to match colors of existing coated surfaces), the
submitted color samples shall be made using color formulations prepared to
match the color samples furnished or specified by the Owner. The color formula
shall be provided with each color sample.
Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings (where applicable).
3.
4.
5. Material safety data sheet for each product used.
6. Submit written certification that all paintkoatings conform to applicable local Air .
Quality Management District rules and regulations for products and applications.
-.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-2
1.05 Quality Assurance
A. Surface Preparation
Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with "Pictorial Surface
Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces", SSPC-Vis 1 ASTM
Designation D220; "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on
Painted Steel Surfaces", SSPC-Vis 2 ASTM Designation D610; Visual Standard
for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive", NACE Standard
TM-01-70; and as described below. Anchor profile for prepared surfaces shall
be measured by use of a non-destructive instrument such as a Keane-Tator
Surface Profile Comparator.
To facilitate inspection, the Contractor shall on the first day of sandblasting
operations, sandblast metal panels to the standard specified. Plates shall be
1/8" (3.75 mm) plate stock and shall measure a minimum of 8-1/2" x 11" (216
mm x 280 mm). After mutually agreeing a specific panel meets the requirement
of the specification, it shall be initialed by the Contractor and Inspector and
securely sealed in clear plastic with desiccant to prevent rusting. Panels shall be
prepared for each type sandblasting specified and shall be utilized by the
Inspector throughout the duration of sandblasting operations.
B. Coatinq and Paintinq Application
No coating or paint shall be applied: when the surrounding air temperature or
the temperature of the surface to be coated or painted is below 40°F (4.4"C); to
wet or damp surfaces or in rain, snow, fog, or mist; when the temperature is less
than 5°F (2.8"C) above the dew point; when it is expected the air temperature
will drop below 40°F (4.4"C) or less than 5°F (2.8"C) above the dew point within
8 hours after application of coating or paint. Dewpoint shall be measured by use
of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with US.
Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables.
If above conditions are prevalent, coating or painting shall be delayed or
postponed until conditions are favorable. The day's coating or painting shall be
completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by
atmospheric conditions.
C. Inspection
Concrete, non-ferrous metal, plastic and wood surfaces shall be visually
inspected to insure proper and complete coverage has been attained. A
destructive testing instrument, such as a Tooke Gage, shall be used if deemed
necessary. Thickness of coatings and paint on ferrous metal surfaces shall be
checked with a non-destructive, magnetic type dry film thickness gauge. Coating
integrity of Systems A and C surfaces shall be tested with an approved
inspection device. Holiday detectors shall not exceed the voltage recommended
by the manufacturer of the coating system. For film thicknesses between 10 and
20 mils (0.25 mm and 0.50 mm) a non-sudsing type wetting agent such as
Kodak Photo-Flo, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-3
sponge. All pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the -
manufacturer's printed recommendations and retested. No pinholes or other
irregularities will be permitted in the final coating.
In cases of dispute concerning film thickness or "holidays", the Owner's
calibrated instruments and measurements shall predominate. Wide film
thickness discrepancies shall be measured and verified with a micrometer or
other approved measuring instrument.
Contractor shall give the Owner a minimum of 3 working days advance notice of
the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work, and a
minimum of 7 working days advance notice of the start of any shop surface
preparation work or coating application work.
D. InsDection Devices
The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating and painting,
inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and
measurement of dry-film thickness of coating and paint. The Contractor shall
also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards
certified thickness calibration plates to test the accuracy of dry-film thickness
gauge and certified instrumentation to test the accuracy of holiday detectors.
Dry-film thickness gauges shall be made available for the Owner's use at all
times until final acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall be
operated by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner. Acceptable devices
for ferrous metal surfaces include, but are not limited to K-D "Bird-Dog" holiday
detector for coatings to 20 mils (0.50 mm) dry film thickness, Tinker-Rasor
Models AP and AP-W holiday detectors for coatings in excess of 20 mils (0.50
mm) dry-film thickness, and "Owner" units for dry-film thickness gauging. Non-
ferrous metal surfaces shall be checked with an instrument such as an
Elcometer "Eddy Current" Tester. Inspection devices shall be operated in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
E. Warrantv InsDection
Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month of the
Contract warranty period. The Contractor and a representative of the coating
material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. All defective work shall be
repaired in accordance with this specification and to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
1.06 Safety and Health Requirements
A. General
Surface preparation and application of coatings shall be performed by the
Contractor in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local occupational
safety, health, and air pollution control regulations. The Contractor shall obtain
and comply with all safety precautions recommended by the paint manufacturer
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-4
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
in printed instructions or special bulletins. The Contractor shall provide and
require use of personnel protective lifesaving equipment for persons working in
or about the project site.
Head and Face Protection and Respiratotv Devices
Equipment shall include protective helmets which shall be worn by all persons
while in the vicinity of the work. In addition, workers engaged in or near the work
during sandblasting shall wear eye and face protection devices and air-purifying,
half-mask or mouthpiece respirator with appropriate filter.
Ventilation
Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all equipment shall be
explosion-proof. Ventilation shall reduce the concentration of air contaminant to
the degree a hazard does not exist.
Sound Levels
Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds the maximum allowable
sound levels, the Contractor shall provide and require the use of approved ear
protective devices.
Illumination
Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress, including
explosion-proof lights and electrical equipment. Whenever required by the
Owner, the Contractor shall provide additional lighting and necessary supports to
illuminate all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination for inspection
purposes shall be determined by the Owner.
Temporaw Ladders and Scaffoldinq
All temporary ladders and scaffolding shall conform to applicable safety
requirements. They shall be erected where requested by the Owner to facilitate
inspection and be moved by the Contractor to locations requested by the Owner.
1.07 Extra Stock
Upon completion of all coating and painting work, Contractor shall deliver to the Owner
a minimum of two 1 gallon cans of each type and color of finish paint and coating used
on the project and two 1 gallon cans of each primer. Each container shall be unopened
and properly labeled for identification and have a manufacture date within two months of
the date of delivery to the Owner.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 General
A. Products specified are those which have been evaluated for the specific service
and are listed to establish a standard of quality. Requests for product
substitution are subject to the requirements of section "Contractor Submittals
Technical Specifications".
B. All materials shall be brought to job site in original sealed containers. Contractor
shall provide coating material name, formula or specification number, batch
number, color and date of manufacture to the Owner. Coating materials shall
not be used until the Owner has inspected contents and checked information on
containers or label. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the
manufacturer shall be rejected.
C. All coatings and paints shall be stored in enclosed structures to protect them
from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable coatings or paints must be
stored to conform with city, county, state, and federal safety codes for flammable
coating or paint materials. Water based coatings or paints shall be protected
from freezing.
D. Contractor shall use products of same manufacturer for all coating systems
unless approved in writing by the Owner.
E. It is the intent of this specification that all coatings used meet local, state, and
federal air pollution control regulations. These regulations change frequently. If
a listed coating does not meet local, state, and federal air pollution control
regulations at the time the work is actually performed, the Contractor shall
provide the manufacturer's compliant, recommended substitute coating at no
additional cost to the Owner.
2.02 Service Condition A
Ferrous metals subject to corrosive moisture or atmosphere and condensation such as
outside of tanks, out-of-doors piping, valves, and equipment, bridges over process units,
etc. shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be field sandblasted in conformance with Steel Structures
Painting Council Specifications SSPC-SP1 0 and National Association of
Corrosion Engineers Surface Finish NACE No. 2 (Near-White Blast Cleaning) to
achieve a 1.5-2.5 mil (40-60 micron) blast profile.
B. ADplication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum and maximum required times between coats shall be per the
manufacturer's product data sheet. Written requests for shop surface
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-6
C.
preparation and application of the prime coat shall be reviewed and approved by
Owner on a case-by-case basis. If approved by Owner, shop applied prime coat
surface shall be field scarified by brush-blasting prior to application of
intermediate coat.
Coatina Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, the prime coat shall have a minimum dry film
thickness (MDFT) of 4.0 mils. The intermediate coat shall have a MDFT of 4.0
mils and the finish coat shall have a MDFT of 2.0 mils. The total dry film
thickness of the complete system shall be 10.0 mils, minimum.
Carboline System Primer - Carboline 893
Intermediate - Carboline 890
Finish - Carbothane D134HS
Ameron System Primer - Amercoat 385
Intermediate - Amercoat 385
Finish - Amercoat 450 HS
Tnemec System Primer - Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Intermediate - Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Finish - Series 1074 Endurashield I1
2.03 Service Condition B -
Ferrous metals not subject to corrosive moisture or atmosphere and condensation;
normal indoor or outdoor exposure such as metal doors, other architectural items;
piping, valves, and pumps indoors, etc. shall receive the following surface preparation
and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be field sandblasted in conformance with SSPC-SP6 and NACE No. 3 (Commercial Blast Cleaning).
B. Application
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum and maximum times required between coats shall be per the
manufacturer's product data sheet. Written requests for shop surface
preparation and application of the prime coat shall be reviewed and approved by
Owner on a case-by-case basis. If approved by Owner, shop applied prime coat
surface shall be scarified by brush-blasting prior to application of finish coat.
I
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-7
C. Coatina Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, the prime coat shall have a MDFT of 4.0 mils. The
finish coat (one or more) shall have a MDFT of 3.0 mils. The total dry film
thickness of the complete system shall be 7.0 mils, minimum.
Carboline System Primer - Carboline 893
Finish - Carbothane D134 HS
Ameron System Primer - Amercoat 385
Finish - Amercoat 450 HS
Tnemec System Primer - Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Finish - Series 1074 Endurashield II
2.04 Service Condition C
Ferrous metals submerged or intermittently submerged in sewage or similar corrosive
liquid, shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface PreDaration
All surfaces shall be field sandblasted in conformance with SSPC-SP10 and
NACE No. 2 (Near-White Blast Cleaning) to achieve a 2-4 mil (50-100 micron) blast profile. -
B. Armiication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
if recoating is required to correct pinholes, holidays or insufficient coating
thickness; surfaces shall be scarified by brush-blasting prior to recoat.
C. Coatina Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, one coat shall be applied at a MDFT of 16.0 mils.
Carboline System Bitumastic 300M (coal tar epoxy)
Ameron System Amercoat 78HB (coal tar epoxy)
Tnemec System Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar (coal tar
epoxy)
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-8
2.05 Service Condition D -
Buried metal surfaces shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be cleaned in conformance with SSPC-SP3 (Power Tool
Cleaning) or SSPC-SP6 and NACE No. 3 (Commercial Blast Cleaning).
B. Application
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum time required between coats and prior to backfilling shall be per
the manufacturer's product data sheet.
C. Coatina Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, two or more coats shall be applied to a minimum
total dry film thickness of 30 mils.
Carboline System Bitumastic No. 50 (coal tar)
_-
Ameron System Base Coat - Amerlastic 281 (I 5 mils MDFT)
Top Coat - Amerlastic 282 (1 5 mils MDFT)
Series 46-465HB Tnemecol (coal tar) Tnemec System
2.06 Service Condition E
Ferrous metals subject to high temperature exposure (resistant to 1 OOOOF, continuous)
shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface PreDaration
All surfaces shall be field sandblasted in conformance with SSPC-SPI 0 and
NACE No. 2 (Near-White Blast Cleaning) to achieve a 1.0 mil (25 micron) blast
profile.
B. Acmlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The maximum dry film thickness of this system shall not exceed the limits
established by the manufacturer.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-9
C. Coating Svstem -
Except as otherwise noted, two coats shall be applied at 1.0 mil per coat to a
total 2.0 mil dry film thickness for the system.
Carboline System Primer - Carboline 4631
Finish - Carboline 4631
Ameron System Primer - Amercoat 892HS
Finish - Amercoat 892HS
Tnemec System Primer - Series 39 Silicone Aluminum
Finish - Series 39 Silicone Aluminum
2.07 Service Condition F
Non-ferrous or galvanized ferrous metals, specifically identified in the Contract
Documents as requiring coating, shall receive the following surface preparation and
coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be cleaned in conformance with Steel Structures Painting
Council Specifications SSPC-SP1 (solvent cleaning). -
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coating Svstem-
Except as otherwise noted, one pre-treatment coat shall be applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mils and shall be self priming on non-ferrous
metals and galvanized surfaces. The primer and finish coats shall be the system
recommended for the specific Service Condition.
Carboline System Pre-Treatment Coat - Carbozinc 11
Ameron System Pre-Treatment Coat - Galvaprep (Parker
Amchem)
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 0
2.08 Service Condition G
I
Metals finished with asphalt, coal tar, or other bleeding type finish, specifically identified
in the Contract Documents as not requiring removal prior to field coating, shall receive
the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be cleaned in conformance with Steel Structures Painting
Council Specification SSPC-SP1 (Solvent Cleaning).
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coatinq Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, one barrier coat shall be applied to a MDFT of 3.0
mils. Finish coats shall be the system recommended for the specific Service
Condition.
Carboline System Barrier Coat - Carboline 893
Ameron System Barrier Coat - Amerlock 400
Tnemec System Barrier Coat - Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2.09 Service Condition H - Not Used
2.10 Service Condition I
Concrete subject to continuous or intermittent submergence in sewage, scum, sludge or
other corrosive liquid where specified shall receive the following surface preparation and
coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved
methods, removing all traces of previous materials. Remove all loose concrete
by chipping, etc. to leave only sound firmly bonded concrete. All cracks and
voids shall be filled with the specified epoxy filler and surfacer. Final surface
shall be smooth and free of voids, cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease, laitance or
other contaminants.
B. Application
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum and maximum required times between coats shall be per the
manufacturer's product data sheet. If recoating is required to correct pinholes or
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 1
- insufficient system coating thickness, surfaces shall be brush-blasted prior to
recoat.
C. Coatina Svstem
The prime coat shall be applied at a coverage rate not to exceed 200 S.F. per
gallon. Finish coats shall be two or more coats to a total dry film thickness of
16.0 mils (minimum) for the system.
Carboline System Filler - Carboline 195 Surfacer
Primer - Bitumastic 300M Thinned 30% with
2000 Thinner
Finish - Bitumastic 300M (undiluted)
Ameron System
Tnemec System
Filler - NU-KLAD 114A
Primer - Amercoat 385
Finish - Amercoat 351
Filler - Series 63-1500 Epoxy Filler and
Surfacer
Primer - Series 46H-413HB Tneme-Tar
Thinned 30% with Tnemec #2 Thinner
Finish - Series 46H-413HB (undiluted)
2.1 1 Service Condition J
Concrete surfaces subject to corrosive spillage and mechanical wear shall receive the
following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved
methods, removing all traces of previous materials. Remove all loose concrete
by chipping, etc. to leave only sound firmly bonded concrete. All cracks and
voids shall be filled with the specified filler and surfacer. Final surface shall be
smooth and free of voids, cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease, laitance or other contaminants.
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum and maximum required times between coats shall be per the
manufacturer's product data sheet. If recoating is required to correct pinholes of
insufficient system coating thickness, surfaces shall be brush-blasted prior to recoat.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 2
C. Coatina Svstem
Total dry film thickness of the complete system shall be 24.0 mils, minimum.
_-
Ameron System Filler - NU-KLAD 114A
Primer - Amercoat 385 (6 mils MDFT)
Finish - Amercoat 351 (9 mils MDFT, each
coat)
Tnemec System Filler - Series 120-5003 Vinester F&S
Primer - Series 120-5002 Beige Vinester (12
mils MDFT)
Finish - Series 120-5001 Grey Vinester (12
mils MDFT)
2.12 Service Condition K
Interior and exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view, not subject to immersion and
not subject to pedestrian traffic, and concrete block and masonry without integral color
or architectural treatment, shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved
methods, removing all traces of previous materials. Remove all loose concrete,
mortar splatter and protrusions by chipping, etc. to leave only sound firmly
bonded concrete, concrete block, or masonry. All cracks and voids shall be filled
with an approved concrete and masonry patching compound. Final surface shall
be smooth and free of voids, cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease, laitance or other
contaminants.
B. ADDlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
A minimum of 12 hours is required before additional coats may be applied to the
prime coat and two hours for the finish coats.
C. Coatina System
Prime coat shall be applied at a rate of 75-100 square feet per gallon. A
minimum of two finish coats shall be applied at a coverage rate not to exceed
150 square feet per gallon per coat.
Carboline System Primer - Sanitile 100
Finish - Sanitile 155
Ameron System Primer - Amerlastic 172
Finish - Amerlastic 290 LT (Smooth) or
Amerlastic 290 TC (Textured)
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 3
Tnemec System Primer - Series 130 Envirofill
Finish - Series 180 (Smooth) or 181 (Textured)
2.13 Service Condition L
Concrete floors subject to corrosive moisture and pedestrian traffic where specified shall
receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface PreDaration
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved
methods; removing all traces of previous materials. Remove all loose concrete
by chipping, etc. to leave only sound firmly bonded concrete. Cracks and voids
shall be repaired or filled with the specified filler and surfacer. Final surfaces
shall be smooth and free of voids, cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease laitance or
other contaminants.
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
Where a non-skid finish is specified broadcast #50 dry washed silica sand onto
primer coat while still wet and follow with finish coat after required drying time.
C. Coatincl Svstem
Prime coat shall be thinned 15-20% with manufacturer recommended thinner
and applied at a coverage rate not to exceed 250 square feet per gallon. Finish
coat shall be applied at a coverage rate not to exceed 200 square feet per
gallon. Total dry film thickness of the complete system shall be a minimum of 10
mils.
Carboline System Filler - Carboline 195 Surfacer
Primer - Carboline 890
Finish - Carboline 890
Ameron System Filler - NU-KLAD 114A
Primer - Amerlock 400
Finish - Amerlock 400
Tnemec System Filler - Series 63-1500 Filler and Surfacer
Primer - Series 104 H.S. Epoxy
Finish - Series 104 H.S. Epoxy
2.14 Service Condition M
Concrete and concrete block masonry furnished with an approved architectural finish
(e.g. integral color or architectural treatment) shall receive the following surface preparation and clear water repellent sealing system:
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 4
-.
A. Surface PreDaration
All surfaces shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust, grease, and other foreign matter
before sealing.
8. Application
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coating Svstem
Apply one coat at a coverage rate not to exceed 100 square feet per gallon.
Rainguard System Super
Monopole System Monochem Aquaseal
2.1 5 Service Condition N
Interior and exterior architectural woodwork shall receive the following surface
preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
Sand new and bare wood to remove any surface contamination and surface
cells. For previously coated surfaces sand loose paint to a tight, adherent
surface. Cracks, nail holes, and other defects shall be filled with putty or plastic
wood after priming. All knots shall be sealed with an approved knot sealer. Prior
to coating, all surfaces shall have a moisture content below level recommended
by coating manufacturer and be thoroughly cleaned and free of all foreign
matter.
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coatina Svstem
Prime coat shall be applied at a coverage rate not to exceed 280 square feet per
gallon. The finish coat shall be applied at a coverage rate not to exceed 280
square feet per gallon.
Carboline System Primer - Carbocrylic 120 (satin)
Finish - Carbocrylic 3359 (semi-gloss)
Ameron System Primer - Amercoat 220 (satin or gloss)
Finish - Amercoat 220 (satin or gloss)
Tnemec System Primer - Series 6 (flat) or 7 (semi-gloss)
Finish - Series 6 (flat) or 7 (semi-gloss)
,-
November 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 5
2.16 Service Condition 0
Exposed plastic and fiberglass surfaces, specifically identified in the Contract
Documents as requiring coating, shall receive the following surface preparation and
coating (coating to be used for this category shall be certified by the plastic and
fiberglass manufacturer to be completely acceptable and non-injurious to the material):
A. Surface Preparation
Surface preparation shall consist of hand sanding to remove gloss. All
remaining dust shall be removed with vacuum brushing or tack rag. Sanded
surfaces shall not be washed with either solvent or water.
B. Amlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Coati& Svstem
Except as otherwise noted, two coats shall be applied at 4.0 mils per coat to a
total 8.0 mil MDFT for the system.
Carboline System Carbothane D134 HS
Ameron System Amercoat 450 HS
Tnemec System Series 1074 Endurashield II
2.17 Service Condition P
Manufactured items furnished with shop-applied coat of primer requiring field touch-up
or with a shop applied primer which is not compatible with the required coating system
shall receive the following surface preparation and coating system:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be cleaned in conformance with Steel Structures Painting
Council Specification SSPC-SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning), including hand sanding
and feathering of damaged areas. If determined by the Owner that damage is
too extensive for touch-up, item shall be recleaned and coated or painted as
directed by Owner.
B. Coatina Svstem
Prime and finish coats shall be the system recommended for the specific Service
Condition. Prime coat shall be compatible with the required system. If not (as
determined by the Owner) the prime coat shall either be removed by
sandblasting or coated with a suitable primer which is compatible with the shop
primer utilized and the coating system required. Costs incurred for repair or
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 6
replacement of shop-applied primers shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
2.18 Service Condition Q
Manufactured items furnished with shop-applied primer and finish coats requiring field
touch-up shall receive the following surface preparation and coating system:
A. Surface PreDaration
All surfaces shall be cleaned in conformance with Steel Structures Painting
Council Specification SSPC-SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning), including hand sanding
and feathering of damaged areas. If determined by the Owner that damage is
too extensive for touch-up, item shall be recleaned and coated or painted as
directed by Owner.
B. Coating Svstem
Prime and finish coats shall be the system recommended for the specific Service
Condition. Costs incurred for repair or replacement of shop-applied coatings or
finishes shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.19 Service Condition R
Ferrous metal tanks, vessels, or equipment containing raw water or potable water shall
receive the following surface preparation and coating: -
A. Surface Preparation
All interior surfaces, including miscellaneous accessories and components,
submerged or unsubmerged, shall be field sandblasted in conformance with
SSPC-SP10 and NACE No. 2 (Near-White Blast Cleaning) to achieve a 2-4 mil
(50-1 00 micron) blast profile.
All exterior surfaces, including miscellaneous accessories and components, shall
be field sandblasted in conformance with SSPC-SP6 and NACE No. 3
(Commercial Blast Cleaning).
B. Armlication
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
The minimum and maximum required times between coats shall be per the
manufacturer's product data sheet. Written requests for shop surface
preparation and application of the prime coat shall be reviewed and approved by
Engineer on a case-by-case basis. If approved by Engineer, shop applied prime
coat surface shall be field scarified by brush-blasting prior to application of finish
coat.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 7
C. Coatina System
Interior Surfaces:
Interior coating system shall be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation to
be in accordance with ANSVNSF Standard 61 for potable water contact.
Except as otherwise noted, the prime coat shall have a MDFT of 6.0 mils. The finish coat shall have a MDFT of 6.0 mils. The total dry film thickness of the
complete system shall be 12.0 mils, minimum.
Carboline System
Tnemec System
Primer - Super Hi-Gard 891
Finish - Super Hi-Gard 891
Primer - Series 139 Pota-Pox II
Finish - Series 139 Pota-Pox II
Exterior Surfaces:
Except as otherwise noted, the prime coat shall have a MDFT of 6.0 mils. The
finish coat (one or more) shall have a MDFT of 3.0 mils. The total dry film
thickness of the complete system shall be 9.0 mils, minimum.
Carboline System Primer - Super Hi-Gard 891
Finish - Carbothane D134 HS
Tnemec System Primer - Series 139 Pota-Pox II
Finish - Series 1074 Endurashietd II
2.20 Service Condition S
Concrete subject to continuous or intermittent submergence in sewage, scum, or sludge
shall receive the following surface preparation and coating:
A. Surface Preparation
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting, removing all traces of
previous materials. Remove all loose concrete by chipping, etc. to leave only
sound firmly bonded concrete. All cracks and voids shall be filled with a non-sag
epoxy resin adhesive. Surfaces to be coated shall be roughened by blast
cleaning or equivalent mechanical means to achieve the coating manufacturer's
minimum designated degree of roughness. Final surface shall be rough and free
of voids, cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease, laitance or other contaminants.
B. Application
Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations. The minimum and maximum coating thickness per lift shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Coating manufacturer
shall provide the services of a technical field representative to review and
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 8
2.21
approve the surface preparation and to assist the coating applicator during the
initial phase of coating.
C. Coatinu Svstem
The finished coating thickness shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch.
Lafarge Calcium Aluminates System PrimedFinish - Sewpercoat
Sika System Primer - Armatec 1 10
Finish - Sikadur 45 Epocem
Miscellaneous Coatings
A. Aluminum Metal Isolation
All aluminum bearing on, or embedded in, concrete shall be coated with a wash
primer (0.5 mils) followed by one coat (8 mils) of heavy bodied bituminous paint,
Kop-Coat Bitumastic Super Service Black or Tnemec 46-465.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
A. All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable
standards of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, the Steel
Structures Painting Council, the American Concrete Institute, the Forest
Products Research Society, and the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Material
applied prior to approval of surface preparation by the Owner shall be removed
and reapplied to the satisfaction of the Owner at the expense of the Contractor.
B. All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the required
work in a manner comparable with the best standards of practice. Continuity of
personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall be
coordinated with the Owner.
C. Unless otherwise specified, dust, dirt, oil, grease or any foreign matter that will
affect the adhesion or durability of the finish must be removed by washing with
clean rags dipped in an approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean
rags.
D. Coating and painting systems include surface preparations, prime coatings and
finish coatings. Surface preparation for a specific Service Condition shall be as
specified for that coating or painting system. Unless otherwise specified, prime
coatings shall be field applied. Where prime coatings are shop applied, they
shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched up in the field as specified. If shop
coatings are deficient or damaged too extensively for adequate repair, they shall
be removed and coated and painted as directed by the Owner. Contractor shall
instruct suppliers to provide prime coats compatible with the finish coats
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-1 9
- specified. Any off site work which does not conform to this specification is
subject to rejection by the Owner.
E. The Contractor's coating and painting equipment shall be designed for
application of materials specified and shall be maintained in first class working
condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and
oils from the air. Contractor's equipment shall be subject to approval by the
Owner.
3.02 Surface Preparation, Ferrous Metal
A. General
The latest revision of the following surface preparation specifications of the Steel
Structures Painting Council and the National Association of Corrosion Engineers
shall form a part of this specification:
1. Solvent Cleanina fSSPC-SPl). Removal of oil, grease, soil and other
contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam
cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or
cleaning action.
2. Hand Tool Cleanina (SSPC-SP2). Removal of loose rust,,loose mill scale
and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand
chipping, scraping, sanding and wire brushing.
3. Power Tool Cleaning CSSPC-SP3). Removal of loose rust, loose mill
scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power
wire brushing, power impact tools or power sanders.
4. White Metal Blast Cleanina (SSPC-SP5). Blast cleaning to a gray-white
uniform metallic color until each element of surface area is free of all
visible residues.
5. Commercial Blast Cleaninq (SSPC-SP6 and NACE NO. 3). Blast
cleaning until at least two-thirds of each element of surface area is free of
all visible residues.
6. Brush-off Blast Cleaning (SSPGSP7 and NACE No. 4). Blast cleaning
to remove loose rust, loose mill scale and other detrimental foreign
matter to degree specified.
7. Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10 and NACE No. 2). Blast
cleaning to nearly white metal cleanliness, until at least 95% of each
element of surface area is free of all visible residues.
B. Slag and weld metal accumulation and spatters not removed by the fabricator,
erector, or installer shall be removed by chipping and grinding. All rough welds
shall be ground smooth and sharp edges shall be ground to approximately 1/8"
radius.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-20
c C. Field blast cleaning for all surfaces shall be dry sandblasting unless otherwise
directed.
D. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable local, state, and federal, air
pollution control regulations for blast cleaning.
All oil, grease, welding fluxes and other surface contaminants shall be removed
by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 prior to blast cleaning.
Maximum particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be that which will
produce a surface profile in accordance with these specifications and the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the specified coating system to be
applied.
E.
F.
G. Sand used in blast cleaning operations shall be washed, graded and free of
contaminants that would interfere with adhesion of coating or paint and shall not
be reused.
H. Shop applied temporary coatings or shop applied coatings of unknown
composition shall be completely removed before the specified coatings are
applied.
I. During blast cleaning operations, caution shall be exercised to insure that
existing coatings or paint are not exposed to abrasion from blast-cleaning.
J. The Contractor shall keep the area of his work in a clean condition and shall not
permit blasting materials to accumulate as to constitute a nuisance or hazard to
the prosecution of the work or the operation of the existing facilities.
K. Surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust and residual particles of the cleaning
operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming or another approved method prior
to application of specified coatings or paint. No coatings or paint shall be applied
over damp or moist surfaces.
L. All welds shall be neutralized with a suitable chemical compatible with the
specified coating materials.
3.03 Surface Preparation, Galvanized Ferrous Metal
Prior to application of specified pretreatment coating, galvanized ferrous metal shall be
alkaline cleaned per SSPC-SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants
detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system to be used.
3.04 Surface Preparation, Ferrous Metal with Existing Coatings
A. All grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants shall be removed by
solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. The generic type
of the existing coatings shall be determined by laboratory testing.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-21
B. The Contractor shall provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating -_
system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is
not specified in the schedule, deteriorated coatings shall be removed by abrasive
blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Areas of tightly
adhering coatings shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning, with
the remaining thickness of existing coating not to exceed 3 mils.
C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings the Contractor
shall apply intermediate coatings per the paint manufacturer's recommendation
for the specified coating system or shall completely remove the existing coating
prior to abrasive blast cleaning. A small trial application shall be conducted for
compatibility prior to painting large areas.
D. Coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed prior to
application of new coatings.
3.05 Surface Preparation, Concrete and Masonry
A. Surface preparation shall not begin until at least 30 days after the concrete or
masonry has been placed.
9. All oil, grease, and form release and curing compounds shall be removed by
detergent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 before abrasive blast cleaning.
Concrete and masonry surfaces and deteriorated concrete surfaces to be coated
shall be abrasive blast cleaned to remove existing coatings, laitance,
deteriorated concrete, and to roughen the surface. The abrasive used should be
dry and clean with the maximum particle size that will pass through a 16 mesh
screen. Cracks and voids shall be repaired or filled with the specified filler and
surfacer. Final surface shall be sound, firmly bonded, smooth and free of voids,
cavities, dirt, dust, oils, grease, laitance, or other contaminants.
C.
D. Residual abrasive, dust and loose particles shall be removed from the surface by
vacuuming or blowing off with dry high pressure air.
E. Unless required for proper adhesion, surfaces shall be dry prior to coating. The
presence of moisture shall be determined with an approved moisture detection device. ~
3.06 Surface Preparation, Wood and Composition Materials
All surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with mineral spirits,
scrapers, sandpaper, or wire 'brushes. Finished surfaces exposed to view shall, if
necessary, be made smooth by planing or sandpapering. Small, dry, seasoned knots
shall be surface scraped, sandpapered, and thoroughly cleaned, and shall be given a
thin coat of WP-578 Western Pine Association knot sealer before application of the
priming coat. Large, open unseasoned knots, and all beads or streaks of pitch shall be
scraped off, or if the pitch i$ still soft, it shall be removed with mineral spirits or
turpentine and the resinous area shall be thinly coated with knot sealer. After priming,
all holes and imperfections shall be filled with putty or plastic wood (colored to match the
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-22
finish coat), allowed to dry, and sandpapered smooth.
cleaned of all loose or flaking paint and sandpapered to a tight, adherent surface.
Existing surfaces shall be
3.07 Coating and Painting Application, General
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Coating and painting application shall conform to the requirements of the Steel
Structures Painting Council Paint Application Specifications SSPC-PA1 , latest
revision, for "Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting", and recommended
practices of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, the American
Concrete institute, the Forest Products Research Society and the Manufacturer
of the coating and paint materials.
Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation and
cleaning and within an eight hour working day. Any cleaned areas not receiving
first coat within an eight hour period shall be recleaned prior to application of first
coat. Cleaned surfaces and all coats of the specified system shall be inspected
prior to application of each succeeding coat. Contractor shall schedule such
inspection with Owner in advance.
Prior to assembly, all surfaces made inaccessible after assembly, shall be
prepared as specified herein and shall receive the coating or painting system
specified.
Thinning shall be permitted only as recommended by the Manufacturer and
approved by the Owner.
Coating materials shall be protected from exposure to cold weather, and shall be
thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application.
Each application of coating or paint shall be applied evenly, free of brush marks,
sags, runs, and variations in color, texture and finish, with no evidence of poor
workmanship. Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping on glass or hardware.
Coatings and paints shall be sharply cut to lines. Finished surfaces shall be free
from defects or blemishes.
Protective coverings or drop cloths shall be used to protect floors, fixtures and
equipment. The working parts of all mechanical and electrical equipment shall
be protected from damage during surface preparation and coating operations.
Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating or other
materials. Care shall be exercised to prevent coatings or paints from being
spattered onto surfaces which are not to be coated or painted. Spray painting
shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The Contractor shall be
fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent
facilities or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating
operations.
When two or more coats of coating or paint are specified, each coat shall be of a
slightly different shade to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat.
.-
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-23
I. Specified film thicknesses per coat for the Service Conditions are minimum
required. Contractor shall apply additional coats as necessary to achieve the
specified thickness.
J. All material shall be applied as specified.
K. All welds and irregular surfaces shall receive a brush coat of the specified
product prior to application of the first complete coat.
Cleaning and coating shall be coordinated so that dust and other contaminants
from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces.
L.
M. Drying time between coats and surface curing shall be as recommended by the
coating manufacturer depending upon field conditions of temperature and
humidity. Times shall be submitted with the shop drawings based on 70°F and
relative humidity of 50%.
N. In the case of enclosed areas, the forced air ventilation system shall operate
continuously to provide air circulation and exhausting of solvent vapors.
3.08 Shop Coating
A. All items of equipment, or parts of equipment which are not submerged in
service, shall be shop primed and then finish coated in the field, after installation,
with the specified or approved color. The methods, materials, application
equipment and all other details of shop painting shall comply with these
specifications. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of
time, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then touch-up painted
after installation.
B. All items of equipment, or parts and-surfaces of equipment which are submerged
or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of
pumps and valves, shall have all surface preparation and coating work
performed in the field.
C. For certain pieces of equipment it may be undesirable or impractical to apply
finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets,
equipment such as electrical control panels, switchgear or main control boards,
submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items
where it is not possible to obtain the specified quality in the field. Such
equipment shall be shop primed and finish coated and touched up in the field
with the identical material after installation. The Contractor shall require the
manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop
drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications.
Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's material data sheets shall be
submitted with equipment shop drawings.
D. For certain small pieces of equipment the manufacturer may have a standard
coating system which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such
cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-24
.-
drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor
equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering
pumps.
E. Shop painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling. Primed
surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 6 months before
topcoated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer.
Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with these
specifications and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
F.
G. The Contractor shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are
compatible and meet the requirements of these specifications.
3.09 Protective Coating and Painting Schedule
The protective coating and painting schedule provided herein or on the drawings shall
indicate the coating system to be used. The schedule shall not be construed as a
complete list of all surfaces to be coated but rather as a guide as to the application of
the various coating systems. All surfaces shall be coated and painted except those
specifically excluded herein or on the drawings.
3.10 Color Scheme
All colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint and protective coating material shall
be as selected by the Owner, except as noted below under "Pipe Color Coating". The
Contractor shall submit a current chart of the manufacturer's available colors to the
Owner at least forty-five days prior to the start of coating and painting operations.
3.11 Pipe Color Coding and Labelling
All exposed piping shall be color coded and labeled to conform to all OSHA
requirements and "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI AI 3.1).
"State (1 0) Standards" color scheme shall be used to further identify specific commodity.
As a guideline the following color coding schedule is provided. Color codes shall be
confirmed with Owner prior to commencing work.
A. Color Code Schedule
Item Color Code
Aeration Air Safety Green
Aftercooler Return Safety Red
Aftercooler Supply Safety Red
Air Scour Safety Green
Alum Safety Yellow/Red Bands
AWT Bypass Safety Red
Belt Press Return Water Gray
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-25
(continued)
Item Color Code
Caustic Soda
Chemical Drain
Chlorine Gas
Chlorine Liquid
Chlorine Solution
Chlorine Vacuum
Cold Sludge
Digested Sludge
Digested Sludge Exchange
Drain
Engine Cooling Water
Engine Exhaust
Filter Backwash
Filter Backwash Return
Filter Effluent
Filter Influent
Fire Water
Flotation Thickener Overflow
Flotation Thickener Return
Foul Air
Froth Spray
Fuel Oil
Fuel Oil Return
Fuel Oil Supply
Gravity Thickener Overflow
Ground Water Drainage
Grit
Grit Chamber Influent
Grit Washer Overflow
Heat Recovery Return
Heat Recovery Supply
Heated Sludge
Holding Tank Overflow
High Pressure Digester Gas
High Temperature Wash Water
Hydrogen Peroxide
Industrial Water
Influent Force Main
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Brown
Brown
Brown
Gray
Safety Red
Safety Red
Safety Red
Safety Red
Safety Red
Safety Red
Safety Red
Brown
Gray
White
Safety Red
Black
Black
Black
Brown
Gray
Brown
Brown
Gray
Safety Blue/Orange Bands
Safety Blue/Orange Bands
BrownNellow Bands
Brown
Light Yellow
Safety Blue/Orange Bands
Safety Orange
Safety Red
Brown
November 2003 Coating and Painting
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 09900-26
(continued) - Color Code Item
Jacket Water Return
Jacket Water Supply
Liquid Propane Gas
Low Pressure Digester Gas
Lube Oil Return
Lube Oil Supply
Lub,e Oil Waste
Methanol
Natural Gas
Plant Air
Plant Effluent
Polymer
Potable Water
Primary Influent
Primary Skimmings
Primary Sludge
Pumped Drainage Water
Raw Influent
Recycled Water
Return Activated Sludge
Return Water
Sample
Sanitary Drain
Seal Water
Secondary Effluent
Secondary Skimmings
Secondary Sludge
Skimmings
Sludge Heater Bypass
Sludge Return
Sludge Transfer
Spray Wash
Storm Drain
Sulfer Dioxide Gas
Sulfer Dioxide Liquid
Sulfer Dioxide Solution
Sulfer Dioxide Vacuum
Tank Drain
Tertiary Effluent
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Safety Red
Safety Red
Light Yellow
Light Yellow
Black
Black
Black
Safety Yellow/Red Bands
Light Yellow
Safety Greeflellow Band
Safety Red
Safety Yellow/Blue Bands
Safety Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Gray
Brown
Safety Purple
Brown
Safety Red
Safety Red
Gray
Safety Red
Safety Red
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Safety Red
Gray
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Safety Orange
Brown
Safety Red
Coating and Painting
09900-27
(continued)
Item Color Code
Thickener Dilution Water
Vent
Ventilation Air
Wash Water
Waste Activated Sludge
Waste Sludge
B. Label Codinq
Thickened Digested Sludge Brown
Thickened Sludge Brown
Thickened Waste Activated Sludge Brown
Safety Red
White
White
Safety Red
Brown
Brown
Pipe labels (or markers) shall be pres,Jre-sensitive, self-Ahesive, vinyl film pipe
markers as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation, or equal.
Background colors, letter colors, letter heights and spacing shall conform with
ANSI A1 3.1. Pipe 'designation labels and direction-of-flow arrows shall be placed
at 10 foot intervals (maximum) and at every change in direction. Pipe
designation wordings shall be selected by the Owner and may not correspond to
standard wordings available from the manufacturer.
3.12 Cleanup
Upon completion of the work, all staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed
from the site or destroyed in a manner approved the Owner. Coating or paint spots and
oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the job site cleaned. All
damage to surfaces resulting from the work of these specifications shall be cleaned,
repaired or refinished to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Coating and Painting
09900-28
SECTION 09902
PETROLATUM WAX TAPE COATING
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install petrolatum wax tape
coating on pipe, pipe flanges, fittings or other buried pipeline appurtenances, complete,
as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMllTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Submit manufacturer's technical product data, details, installation instructions and ,
general product recommendations.
General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
All submittals shall be in accordance with the
1.3 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of
other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the Contract Documents.
- PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
2.3
Wrap all exposed surfaces of buried ferrous pipe, flanges, couplings and other pipeline
appurtenances (including bolts, nuts, etc.) with petrolatum wax tape, unless another
corrosion protection system (other than a factory-installed paint coating) is otherwise
specified or indicated by the Contract Drawings. Exposed piping shall be wrapped only
where specifically called out on the Drawings. Ductile iron pipe encased with
polyethylene sheathing shall not be wrapped with this product.
PRIMER
Exposed surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, and
corrosion inhibitor having a paste-like consistency. The material shall have the following
properties:
Pour Point 400-100" F
Flash Point 350" F minimum
Approximate Coverage
Color Brown
1 gal/l 00 square feet
The primer shall be Trenton Wax-Tape Primer or equivalent.
..--
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating
09902-1
2.3 WAXTAPE
Two types of petrolatum wax tape shall be available from the manufacturer: one type for
buried installations and another type for above-ground installations.
2.3.1 BURIED INSTALLATIONS
The covering material shall be a plastic-fiber felt tape, saturated with a blend of
petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is easily formable over irregular
surfaces. The tape shall have the following properties:
Color: Brown
Thickness 70-90 mils
Dielectric Strength 170 volts/mil
Tape Width 6 inches
Saturant Pour Point 1 15" - 125°F
Wax tape shall be Wax-Tape #1 as manufactured by The Trenton Corporation (Ann
Arbor, Michigan), or approved equal.
2.4 OUTER COVERING
The primed and wax-tape wrapped surface shall be wrapped with a plastic tape covering
consisting of three (3) layers of 50 gauge, clear, polyvinylidene chloride, high cling
membranes wound together as a single sheet. The material shall have the following
properties:
Width
Thickness
Dielectric Strength
Water Absorption
Color
6 inches
1.5 mils
2000 voltdmil
Negligible
Clear
The outer covering shall be Trenton Poly-Ply or approved equal.
2.5 OTHER PETROLATUM WAX TAPE SYSTEM'COMPONENTS
Any components not listed above, but required for a complete petrolatum wax tape
coating system as recommended for this application by the manufacturer shall be
provided at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The petrolatum wax tape system shall be installed in conformance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
January 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating
09902-2
SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND BRACKETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
-
1.03
SUMMARY
A. Provide fire extinguishers and brackets where shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Provisions, Supplemental Provisions, Special Construction
Provisions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
B. Product data: Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical
data for all equipment, material, and components, including, but not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements;
Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space required for these
items, and their interface with the work of other trades.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved
by the Owner's Designated representative, will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BRACKET AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER
A. At each fire extinguisher location, provide a 4A:60B:C type ABC Dry Chemical Fire
extinguisher with appropriate hanging bracket. Fire extinguishers shall be as
manufactured by Amerex, Ansul, or equal.
B. Service, charge, and tag each fire extinguisher not more than five calendar days
prior to the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work as that Date is established
by the Owner.
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Fire Extinguishers and Brackets
10520-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 IN STALL AT1 0 N
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the
approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as
approved by the Owner, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life
under hard use.
C. Locate additional bracket-mounted extinguishers where directed by the Owner and
the Fire Department official.
END OF SECTION
November 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Fire Extinguishers and Brackets
10520-2
SECTION 11 005
GENERAL MECHANICAL AND EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. These General Mechanical and Equipment Specifications, which apply to all
systems and equipment unless specified otherwise in the equipment Technical
Specifications or on the Drawings, are hereby made a part of each and all of the
separate Sections of this Specification. Contractor shall direct the attention of all
subcontractors and suppliers of mechanical and related appurtenances to the
provisions of the Contract Documents and this Section.
B. The Contractor shall provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and all
labor necessary for the furnishing, construction, installation, testing, and
operation of all equipment and appurtenant work, complete and operable, all in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.02 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. Shop Drawinas. The Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawings for
all equipment specified in the various sections of the Specifications and the
Construction Drawings, together with all piping, valves, and controls for review by
the Owner.
B. Lateral Desicin Data. Submit with the shop drawings, details of constructions,
and method of attachment for all manufactured products showing compliance
with Paragraph 3.04, "Lateral Design and Restraint". Where specified in the
Special Requirements or Special Construction Provisions for certain equipment,
calculations and details signed by a Professional Engineer who has
demonstrated proficiency in Structural Engineering or Civil Engineering and is
registered in the State of California shall be submitted. The calculations shall be
performed specifically for this project, during the time frame of the project and be
dated by the Engineer performing them.
C. - Tools. The Contractor shall supply one complete set of special wrenches or
other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of
the equipment. All tools shall be of best quality hardened steel forgings with
bright, finished heads and with work faces dressed to fit nuts. The set of tools
shall be neatly mounted in a labeled tool box of suitable design provided with a
hinged cover.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Prepare and submit manuals
covering all mechanical equipment and machinery and its electrical components
in accordance with Special Construction Provisions.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-1
E. Manufacturer's Certified Reports. Each equipment manufacturer, or his
authorized representative, shall submit a written report stating that equipment is
ready for start-up and interim operation, and a subsequent written report
certifying that the equipment has been properly installed, lubricated, aligned,
started-up, tested, adjusted, and operated over the equipment range (full to
minimum load, speed, range); the equipment is free from any undue stress
imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts, and is ready for operation by the
Owner; equipment is safe to operate and that the equipment is fully covered
under the terms of the guarantee. Note that interim operation of equipment may
be necessary to provide required treatment or suitable plant operation.
F. Contractor's Certification Reports. Contractor shall submit a written
certification along with the manufacturer's certification for start-up and interim
operation that he has examined subject equipment and confirms that it is ready
for start-up and interim operation and is safe to operate.
Contractor shall submit written certification for relocated, modified, temporarily
installed Owner's equipment or Contractor furnished equipment that has been
installed for interim operation by the Owner stating that said equipment has been
started-up, is ready for operation and is safe to operate.
G. Lifting Recommendations. Each manufacturer shall provide details for proper
lifting of equipment and materials during unloading, handling, and installation.
Means of lifting equipment shall not impose any undue stress to the equipment.
Contractor shall strictly adhere to said manufacturers recommendations.
H. Storaqe Requirements. Each manufacturer shall provide details and
storage of equipment and materials for protection under the specific conditions
of the project site, such as rain, snow, freezing, windy, wind blown sand, high
temperatures, direct sunlight, etc.
1.03 Quality
A. Factorv Inspection. The Owner or its representative may inspect fabricated
equipment at the factory without cost to Contractor. The Contractor shall notify
the Owner in sufficient time so that factory inspection can be arranged. Factory
inspection will be made after manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks,
adjustments, tests and operations. Approval of equipment at the factory only
allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the site, and does not
constitute final acceptance by the Owner.
B. Standard of Quality. Items of equipment are specified by performance and by
name of a manufacturer for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and
acceptable experience. Where "or equal" or "approved equal" is specified
Substitute equipment will be acceptable if it can be demonstrated to the Owner
that the substitute is in strict accordance with the Specifications and equal in
quality to those models specifically named. Substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with Contractor Submittals Technical Specifications. Manufacturers
specified have been determined by the Owner to meet or exceed the minimum
September 2003 Mechanical and Equipment
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 1005-2
acceptable standard for the designated equipment; however, manufacturer's
standard model may require optional equipment, upgrade or modification to meet
the intent and requirements of the specifications. All mechanical equipment
furnished under this Specification shall be new and of current design.
C. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless specifically named in the detailed
Specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and
size specified which has demonstrated successful operation and is in regular
use.
D. Field Inspection, Start-up. and Adiustment. The Contractor shall demonstrate
that all equipment meets the specified performance requirements. Contractor
shall provide the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service
representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment who shall
visit the site of Work to perform the following tasks:
1. Assist the Contractor in the installation of the equipment.
2. To inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment
installation.
3. To start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency,
and capacity and to assure that equipment is ready and safe to operate.
To perform necessary field adjustment during the test period until the
equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the Owner.
4.
5. To instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the equipment. Instruction shall include step-by-step trouble shooting
procedures with all necessary test equipment.
E. Costs. The costs of all inspection, start-up, testing, adjustment, and instruction
work performed by said factory-trained representatives shall be borne by the
Contractor. When available, the Owner's operating personnel will provide
assistance in the field testing.
1.04 Equipment
A. General. All equipment furnished shall be complete, ready for installation
and operation. All bolts, nuts, washers, mounting plates, bed plates, bases,
anchor bolts and other miscellaneous items necessary to form a complete,
installed, operational system shall be furnished whether specifically specified or
not.
B. Conditions of Service.All equipment shall be capable of operating over the full
range specified under the project site environmental conditions including altitude,
temperature, relative humidity, freezing, or windy condition as shown on the
Drawings or specified in the Special Requirements.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-3
C. Adaptation of Eauipment. No responsibility for alteration of a planned -
structure to accommodate substitute equipment will be assumed by the Owner.
Equipment which requires alteration of the structures will be considered only if
the Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating all
necessary alterations. All revisions to structures, mechanical, electrical, or other
work made necessary by such substitution shall be approved by the Owner and
the cost of said revisions, including cost of redesign, shall be made at the
Contractor's expense.
D. Motors. Ratings specified and/or shown for the proposed equipment are in
accordance with the best information available to the Owner. In the event any
equipment item proposed by the Contractor should require motors with larger
horsepower rating than indicated on Electrical Drawings, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide the proper control equipment, required
modifications to motor control centers, starting equipment, feeder and branch
circuits, and accessories as required to make the installation comply with the
electrical code and to prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the
Owner.
E.
I).
Match Eauipment and Driver.Equipment shall be matched such that the motor
rating meets or exceeds the driven equipment requirements (over its full
operating range) and the motor controller, switchgear, variable speed drive, etc.
meets or exceeds the motor requirements. Where the motor controller or
variable speed drive will induce additional heat or otherwise cause derating of
the motor, the motor shall be oversized accordingly.
F. Existina Eauipment. Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing
enclosure or adjacent to existing equipment, the Contractor shall field check the
dimensions of existing equipment, location of conduits, etc., and shall familiarize
himself with all existing conditions and difficulties to be encountered in
performing such work.
1.05 Guarantee and Warranties
The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment in accordance with the conditions of the
Contract Documents and as specified En the Contract Appendix or Special Provisions. In
addition to the general guarantee requirements, equipment guarantee shall cover faulty
or inadequate design; improper assembly or erection; defective workmanship or
materials; and leakage, breakage, or other failure. For equipment bearing a
manufacturer's warranty in excess of one (1) year, furnish a copy of the warranty to
Owner with Owner named as beneficiary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 General Requirements
A. Materials and Workmanship. All equipment furnished shall be new and
guaranteed free from defects in materials, design, and workmanship. It shall be
the manufacturer's responsibility to ascertain the conditions and service under
which the equipment will operate and to warrant that operation under those
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-4
conditions shall be successful. All parts of the equipment shall be amply
proportioned for all stresses that may occur during fabrication, erection, and
intermittent or continuous operation.
6. Standards. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in
accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practice. Individual
parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts,
furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units
shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time
prior to delivery, except as required by tests. Materials shall be suitable for
service conditions. Iron castings shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free
from blowholes, flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel
used in items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American
Institute of Steel Construction. All structural members shall be considered as
subject to shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which
will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall
have a minimum nominal thickness of 1/4-inch. Provide equipment and
materials suitable for the service conditions and meeting standard specifications
such as ANSI, ASME, AWWA, ASTM, NEMA, UBC and UL. The location of the
fabricator and his shop schedule shall be furnished to the Owner prior to the
beginning of fabrication so that the Owner can schedule shop inspection.
C. Structural Steel Fabrications. Conform to "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the AlSC unless otherwise indicated
or specified. Design all fabrications for dynamic and vibratory loadings. Use
structural steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36, A440, A500, A501, A570,
A618, or equal, as applicable. Galvanize specified items in accordance with
ASTM A123, A153, or A386 as applicable; use galvanized bolts and fasteners
with galvanized assemblies.
D. Weldinq.
the following:
Unless otherwise specified or shown, all welding shall conform to
1. All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method
as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as
supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Except as
modified herein, welding process qualification and operator qualification
shall comply with the applicable requirements of the "Code for Arc and
Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the AWS.
2. Latest revision of ANSVAWWA D100 and AWWA C206.
3. Each weld shall be uniform in width and size throughout its entire length.
Each layer shall be smooth, free from slag, cracks, pinholes, and
undercut and shall be completely fused to adjacent weld beads and base
metal. Cover pass shall be completely free of coarse ripples, irregular
surfaces, non-uniform bead pattern, high crown, deep ridges or valleys
between beads, and shall blend smoothly and gradually into surface of
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-5
base metal. Butt welds shall be slightly convex, of uniform height, and
shall have full penetration. Fillet welds shall be of size indicated, with full
throat, and with each leg of equal length. Repair, chipping, or grinding of
welds shall not gouge, groove, or reduce base metal thickness.
4. All composite fabricated steel assemblies which are to be erected or
installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable
structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous
seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture.
5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately
clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control
of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS
code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs
left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to
produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and
dimensions. All sharp corners of material to be painted or coated shall be
ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat.
E. Protective Coatinos. All equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance
with Basic Coating and Painting Specifications for Water and Wastewater
Facilities.
Protection of Equipment. All equipment including valves shall be boxed,
crated, or otherwise protected from damage and moisture during shipment,
handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to
corrosive fumes and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors,
drives, or electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve
bearings shall be stored in weather tight storage facilities prior to installation.
For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers should be avoided, to
prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings.
F.
G. Electrical Equiument. Maintain electrical equipment, controls, and keep
insulation dry at all times. Keep heaters in equipment connected and operating
until equipment is placed in operation.
2.02 Lubrication
A. Lubrication Svstems. Lubrication of equipment shall ensure constant presence
of lubricant on all wearing surfaces. Lubricant fill and drain openings shall be
readily accessible. Easy means for checking the lubricant level shall be
provided. Prior to testing and/or operation, the equipment shall receive the
prescribed amount and type of lubricant as required by the equipment
manufacturer. Equipment lubrication systems shall be systems that require
attention no more often than weekly during continuous operation, shall not
require attention during start-up or shut down, and shall not waste lubricants.
B. Lubrication. Contractor shall have all moving parts of the furnished equipment
lubricated prior to shipment to insure protection against corrosion during
shipment, storage, and installation. Lubricants furnished by Contractor shall
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
11 005-6
conform to the manufacturer's printed recommendations. Safeguard@) shall be
provided where necessary to prevent operation of the equipment without proper
lubrication.
Contractor shall provide Alemite lubrication fittings at all locations on the
equipment which require grease lubrication. All lubrication fittings shall be
readily accessible. The grease passages and ports shall be designed so that
grease is forced into the normally loaded sides of the bearings.
Contractor shall lubricate all equipment prior to start-up.
Contractor shall furnish grease lubricants for testing and initial lubrication, and
for protection of wearing surfaces of equipment he furnishes during shipment
and storage. Where lubricants can come in contact with potable water, the
lubricant shall not have any toxic or deleterious effect on potable water and shall
be of material approved by the FDA in accordance with Federal Regulation No.
121.253, Category AA.
Contractor shall furnish one Year's supply of lubrication oils, grease, and other
necessary lubricants including applicators and grease guns required for
lubrication. All lubricants shall be as specified by the equipment manufacturer.
Contractor shall limit the various types of materials by consolidating, with the
equipment manufacturer's approval, the required lubricants into the least number
of different lubricants. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to match, where
possible, lubricants normally used by Owner.
2.03 Equipment Supports
A. Eauipment Bases and BedDlates. Mount equipment assemblies on a single
heavy cast iron or welded steel bedplate unless otherwise shown or specified.
Provide bases and bedplates with machined support pads, tapered dowels for
alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting,
a and openings for electrical conduits. Continuously weld seams and contact
edges between steel plates and shapes, and grind welds smooth. Do not
support machinery or piping on bedplates other than that which is factory
installed. Provide jacking screws in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in
leveling prior to grouting. All mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets,
motor control centers, etc. shall be mounted on raised concrete bases, unless
otherwise shown or specified. Provide plates of minimum thickness of 1/4-inch.
Pump bedplates shall include a drip lip and associated piping and appurtenances
for directing gland leakage to a single disposal point.
Anchors and Sleeves. Each equipment manufacturer shall be responsible to
design and specify the required anchor equipment including bolts, nuts, washers,
and sleeves for securing equipment bases and bedplates to concrete bases.
Loads shall be those induced by the equipment and lateral loads as specified
herein. Design calculations are specifically required for certain equipment by the
Special Requirements or Special Construction Provisions. Where specified or
where specialty anchoring equipment is necessary for the equipment being
furnished the anchoring equipment shall be furnished by the manufacturer.
B.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-7
Sleeves shall be at least 1-1/2 times anchor bolt diameter. Anchor bolts shall be
as specified on Drawings or, if not specified, shall be Type 316 stainless steel
and of adequate length to allow for 1-1/2 inch of grout under baseplates and
adequate anchorage into structural concrete unless otherwise shown or
specified.
2.04 Couplings
A. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment
to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to
cushion shock loads.
B. The Contractor shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the
size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application.
C. Taperlock bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal on
shafts of various diameters.
D. Where universal type couplings are shown they shall be of the needle bearing
type construction, equipped with commercial type grease fittings.
2.05 Shafting
A. General. All shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be
sized to transmit the maximum power output of the driver. Keyways shall be
accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to
accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the
shaft. All shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and
polished, straight, and true.
B. . Materials. Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and
torque transmitted. Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture,
and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as shown or
specified unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly.
2.06 Bearings
A. General. Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction
Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA). Bearings shall be as
specified by the specific equipment specification and as generally specified
herein.
Bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating,
housing strength, and other important factors shall be considered in bearing
selection.
All re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting
in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing
chamber. All lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-8
.- manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best
performance.
Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting
arrangement shall be as specified or shown, or as recommended in the
published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to
facilitate installation, inspection and disassembly.
Sleeve-type bearings shall have a Babbit or bronze liner.
B. Bearing Life. Except where otherwise specified or shown, all bearings shall
have an L-10 minimum rated life expectancy corresponding to the type of
service, as follows:
TvDe of Service Design Life hears) L-10 Desian Life (hours)
(whichever comes first)
1. 16-hour shift or less 10 40,000
2. Continuous 10 60,000
2.07 Gears and Gear Drives
A. Unless otherwise specified, gears shall be machine cut, of the helical or spiral-
bevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA Standards,
with a minimum service factor of 1.7, a minimum L-10 bearing life of 60,000
hours and a minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Worm gears shall not be used,
unless specifically approved by the Owner.
B. All gear speed reducers or increasers shall be of the enclosed type, oil- or
grease-lubricated and fully sealed, self-cooling, with a breather to allow air to
escape but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy duty
steel construction with lifting lugs and an inspection cover for each gear train.
An oil level sight glass and an oil flow indicator shall be provided, arranged for
easy reading.
Where the Contractor elects to furnish equipment requiring external cooling by
water or radiator he shall be responsible to furnish and install the cooling
facilities necessary for proper operation.
C. Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped fully
assembled for field installation.
D. Material selections shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided
the above AGMA values are met. Input and output shafts shall be adequately
designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be computer-
matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shaft shall have 2 positive
seals to prevent oil leakage.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-9
2.08
2.09
2.1 0
E. Oil level and drain location relative to the mounting arrangement shall be easily -
accessible. Oil coolers or heat exchangers with all required appurtenances shall
be furnished when necessary.
F. Where gear drive input or output shafts have to connect to couplings or
sprockets supplied by others, the Contractor shall have the gear drive
manufacturer supply matching key taped to the shaft for shipment.
Safety Guards
All equipment furnished by Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of
the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety of the State of California. Copies of
the Safety Orders as available at the Printing Division, Documents Section, State of
California, Sacramento, California, 9581 4.
Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts, other moving or
rotating parts and hot surfaces (exhaust pipes) on all sides with safety guards. Safety
guards shall be free of all sharp edges and corners. Use corrosion-resistant materials
at least equivalent to hot-dip galvanized steel. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16
USS gage, or heavier, galvanized or aluminum-clad steel or 1 /2-inch mesh galvanized
expanded metal. Design guards for easy installation and removal. Provide necessary
supports, accessories, and fasteners, of hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel.
Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water.
Manufacturer's Nameplates
Manufacturer shall provide Type 316 stainless steel nameplates of ample size with
embossed or preprinted lettering, fastened to the equipment in a prominent place with
316 S.S. pins. On nameplates, display manufacturer, serial number, date of
manufacture, model number and essential operating characteristics. Inscribe data
plates with specific or directed information.
Equipment Identification Nameplates
In addition to manufacturer's nameplates specified in equipment Technical
Specifications and herein, Contractor shall provide project specific equipment
identification nameplates. Equipment mounted out-of-doors shall be furnished with
nameplates constructed of Type 31 6 stainless steel with 3/8" high embossed lettering
and shall be fastened to the equipment in a prominent place with 316 stainless steel
pins.
Equipment mounted indoors shall be furnished with nameplates constructed of
laminated engraving plastic. Nameplates shall be fastened to the equipment in a
prominent place with 316 stainless steel pins. Colors, lettering, styles, and sizes shall
be as selected by Owner.
Nameplates shall display the project specific identification of each equipment item.
Proposed nameplate wording shall be submitted to Owner for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-1 0
- 3.01 Coordination
Contractor shall coordinate the installation of equipment and assure compliance with
Drawings. Said Drawings show in a diagrammatic form the arrangements desired for
the principle apparatus, piping, and similar appurtenances, and shall be followed as
closely as possible. Contractor shall take all measurements for his Work at the
installation sites, verify all subcontractor and equipment drawings and be responsible for
the proper installation. Specific equipment furnished may require certain modifications
for installation. Contractor shall have all pertinent equipment shop drawings submitted
and accepted by Owner prior to performing work impacted by said equipment.
Contractor shall coordinate, monitor, schedule the fabrication, and verify compliance
with Contract Documents of equipment assembled of several components under the unit
responsibility of one manufacturer or equipment supplier. Contractor shall submit the
following information to the Owner in writing on a monthly basis:
A. Shipment dates of the various components to the unit responsibility
manufacturers.
B. Scheduled dates of factory tests by unit responsibility manufacturers.
C.
D.
Schedule shipment dates to site of unit responsibility items.
Scheduled arrival date, installation date and start-up date.
3.02 Installation
A. Insuection. Contractor shall inspect each item of equipment for damage,
defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing and inspect
previously installed related Work to verify that it is ready for installation of
equipment. Contractor shall inspect the completed installation.
B. Preuaration. Prior to installing equipment, Contractor shall ensure that
installation areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are
completed. Contractor shall maintain the areas in a broom-clean condition
during installation operations. Equipment shall be cleaned, conditioned, and
serviced in accordance with Instruction Manuals and the Contract Documents
before installing.
C. Certification. Upon completion of equipment installation certifications from the
manufacturer and the Contractor in accordance with Part 1.02 shall be
submitted.
D. Eauiument Installation. Contractor shall employ skilled craftsmen
experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified and use
specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial
indicators, gages, and micrometers, as applicable.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-1 1
3.03
E. Anchor Bolts. Equipment shall be attached to concrete base using cast in place
anchor bolts. Contractor shall set anchor bolts correctly before structural
concrete is placed. Use of templates or setting drawings is required. An
acceptable anchorage system is a cast in place sleeve anchor which allows
adjustment as manufactured by DECO Manufacturing Co. or equal. Deferred
bolting devices shall not be permitted, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
F. Base and BedDlate Grouting. Prior to placing grout, initial fitting and alignment of
connected piping shall be completed. Once equipment is leveled and aligned to
the manufacturer's tolerances, base or bedplates can be grouted by filling the
entire space between the base or bedplate and concrete foundation. Exposed
grout, shall be troweled to a smooth dense finish, edges beveled to 45 degrees
and damp cured with burlap for three days. When grout is fully hardened,
Contractor shall remove jacking screws and tighten nuts on anchor bolts.
Equipment alignment and level shall be checked for conformance with
manufacturer's tolerances and corrective work performed as necessary.
Equipment Shop and Field Performance Testing
A. General. Equipment shall be shop tested and field tested as specified in the
specific Technical Specifications.
B. Field Testinq. Unless otherwise specified field testing of equipment shall be
performed to demonstrate compliance with Contract Documents. Equipment
operation, over the entire specified range, shall be free of vibration, noise, or
cavitation. Contractor shall furnish test instruments required to confirm
performance. Testing shall include the following:
1. Vibration shall be checked and recorded over the operating range and
shall be equal to or less than the amplitude limits recommended by the
manufacturer or as otherwise specified. As a minimum, pumping units
shall meet or exceed the vibration requirements of the Hydraulic Institute
Standards.
2. Equipment performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent
readings showing motor voltage and amperage, and equipment output.
Readings shall be documented for at least three operating conditions.
Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current
balance.
3. In the event any equipment fails to meet the performance requirements, it
shall be modified and retested.
3.04 Lateral Design and Restraint
All manufactured equipment supplied under this Contract shall be designed, constructed
and attached to resist stresses produced by seismic forces and wind forces as specified.
Equipment that does not vibrate during normal operation shall be rigidly attached.
Equipment that vibrates during normal operation shall be attached by means of isolators
with mechanical stops that limit movement in all directions unless it can be
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-1 2
-- demonstrated by calculations that such stops are not required. Equipment or portions of
equipment that move during normal operation shall be restrained with mechanical
devices that prevent displacement unless it can be demonstrated by calculations that
such restraints are not required.
A. Calculations shall be submitted where required by the Special Requirements or
Special Construction Provisions.
B. Minimum Lateral Forces. The minimum lateral seismic and wind forces shall
be those prescribed for Essential Facilities by the Uniform Building Code and
applicable supplements as published by the International Conference of Building
Officials, 5360 South Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601. Higher lateral
forces shall be utilized where specified.
C. Contractor shall make submittals of shop drawings, details and data requested
herein in accordance with Contractor Submittals Technical Specifications.
END OF SECTION
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Mechanical and Equipment
1 1005-1 3
SECTION 11 31 0
CLOSE COUPLED VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING UNIT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Specific Project Description
Contractor shall furnish and install Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Units as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Pumping units shall be suitable for installation in suction cans and shall include pump, motor, column, shafting and discharge head. Motor
shall be suitable for variable frequency drive operation. Pumping units shall be suitable to
operate in variable speed mode using variable frequency drives and to pump filtered
recycled water.
1.02 Specific Project Pumping Unit Requirements
A. General
.-
All vertical turbine pumps shall be furnished with fabricated steel discharge heads as
shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be provided with single mechanical seals,
John Crane Type 21, or equal. Pump manufacturer shall supply a complete seal
water system as part of the discharge head including all necessary piping and drain
line to the pump can. Pump impellers shall be enclosed design.
Pumping unit data per 1.03 need not be submitted with bid, but shall be submitted as
Contractor's Submittals. Factory performance test as specified shall be performed.
B. Recvcled Water Pumpina Units
Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) vertical turbine pumping units as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
Recycled Water Pumping Unit Requirements:
1. Pumping units shall provide the following performance at a speed of 1,770
RPM:
Total Dynamic
Flow (gpm) Head (feet)
600 246k IO'
1080* 182'*
1250 140k 5'
*(design condition shall have a minimum efficiency of 78% and maximum
NPSHR of 16').
2. Pumping units will operate from 50% to 100% speed.
3. Pumping units shall be suitable for variable speed operation using variable
frequency driver (VFD).
-
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11310-1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
-
Motors shall be vertical hollow shaft, premium efficiency, 1800 RPM
(maximum), 75 horsepower (maximum), 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz. Motors
shall be inverter duty rated suitable for VFD operation. No point on the pump
performance curve at maximum speed shall exceed motor horsepower.
Each pump shall be provided with a fabricated steel discharge head with 8"
ANSI 300 Ib. flanged discharge connection and ANSI 150 Ib flanged base.
Discharge head shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi and a
test pressure of 300 psi.
Discharge head base flange shall be provided with one welded 1/2" threaded
half coupling (3000 Ib) for suction can air release.
Pump suction can shall be welded steel with a cement mortar lining. Suction
can shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi and a test pressure
of 225 psi.
Column pipe shall be 8" diameter standard weight welded steel pipe.
A stainless steel basket strainer shall be provided for each pumping unit.
Basket strainer shall be attached to pump with stainless steel fasteners.
Pumps shall be as manufactured by Peabody Floway, Fairbanks Morse,
Goulds, or equal.
Preliminary pump selections are as follows:
Peabody Floway 12DKM (4-stage),
Fairbanks Morse 12H7000 (4-stage)
Goulds 12RJMC (4-stage)
C. Potable Water Pumtincr Units
Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) vertical turbine pumping units as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
Potable Water Pumping Unit Requirements:
1. Pumping units shall provide the following performance at a speed of 1,770
RPM:
Total Dynamic
Flow (gpm) Head (feet)
900
1250*
1600
305k 5'
250'*
180'~ 10'
*(design condition shall have a minimum efficiency of 77% and maximum
NPSHR of 15'). . -
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bresl Contract 38891. 11310-2
.. -
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
9.
10.
Pumping units will operate at 100% speed.
Motors shall be vertical hollow shaft, premium efficiency, 1800 RPM
(maximum), 125 horsepower (maximum), 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz. No
point on the pump petformance curve at maximum speed shall exceed motor
horsepower.
Each pump shall be provided with a fabricated steel discharge head with 8"
ANSI 300 Ib. flanged discharge connection and ANSI 150 Ib flanged base.
Discharge head shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi and a
test pressure of 300 psi.
Discharge head base flange shall be provided with one welded 1/2" threaded
half coupling (3000 Ib) for suction can air release.
Pump suction can shall be welded steel with a cement mortar lining. Suction
can shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi and a test pressure
of 225 psi.
Column pipe shall be 8" diameter standard weight welded steel pipe.
A stainless steel basket strainer shall be provided for each pumping unit.
Basket strainer shall be attached to pump with stainless steel fasteners.
Pumps shall be as manufactured by Peabody Floway, Faitbanks Morse,
Goulds, or equal.
Preliminary pump selections ire as follows:
Peabody Floway 12JKH (Cstage),
Fairbanks Morse 12H7000 @-stage)
Goulds t2CHC (4-stage)
1.03 Pumping Unit Data to be Submitted by Bidder
Unless specified otherwise in section 1.02 herein bidder shall submit (with his bid) a certified
pumping unit component drawing for each different pumping unit to be furnished and it shall
show dimensions of pumping unit and its components including bowl assembly, column
assembly, tube and shaft assembly, discharge head assembly, motor, and related
appurtenances.
Bidders shall submit (with his bid) a certified pump performance curve together with design
calculations for each different pump to be furnished. Each curve shall show head versus
capacity, pump bowl efficiency versus capacity, brake horsepower versus capacity, overall
(wire to water) efficiency versus capacity, all for full operating range specified.
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11310-3
Each certified pump curve shall be continuous from zero capacity to maximum pumping unit
capacity on the abscissa. It shall be furnished full size on 8-1/2" (ordinate) x 1 1 I' (abscissa)
paper. Bidder shall indicate certified values on each curve for the following characteristics at
all specified design points since consideration will be given thereto in selecting units to be
furnished.
A.
B.
Discharge capacity in gallon per minute.
Total discharge head in feet (bowl head).
C. Pump bowl efficiency.
D. Brake horsepower (including losses in pump, shaft, column, and head).
E.
F.
G.
Wire to water efficiency (including losses in motor, pump, shaft, column, and head).
Down thrust and momentary up thrust.
Net positive suction head (close coupled booster application only).
I
I
Bidder shall submit (with his bid) a guaranteed motor performance curve together with other
performance data for each different motor to be furnished. Each curve shall denote
horsepower, service factor, efficiency, locked rotor current, and temperature rise and each
curve shall show efficiency, power fadtor, speed, kilowatt input, current, and line voltage
under operating range between full load and half load. -
1.04 Contractor Submittals
Complete submittals (shop drawings) showing performances, fabrication, assembly, and
installation, together with detailed specifications and data covering performance and
materials of construction, power drive dssembly, parts, devices, wiring diagrams, and other
accessories forming a part of the pumping units shall be submitted in accordance with the
General Provisions, Section 2-5.3. Submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: I
A. Submit the following minimum information for each pumping unit specified herein for
the Owner's review and approval:
1.
2.
Items as specified in Section 1.03
Type and model number with reference to pumping units suitability for
service for pumps specific intended use.
3.
4.
Assembly drawing, nomenclature and material list.
Type, manufacturer, model numbers, location and spacing of bearings.
I
5.
6. Maximum rotative speed.
Impeller diameter, eye area, sphere size, and identification number.
I -
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Contract 38891 1 131 0-4
7. Complete performance curves indicating total dynamic head, flow rate, brake
horsepower, shutoff head, net positive suction head required, RPM, and
efficiency.
The manufacturer shall indicate by arrows to points on the H/Q curves the
limits recommended for stable operation, between which pumps are to be
operated to prevent surging, cavitation, and vibration. The stable operating
range shall be as large as possible and shall be based on actual hydraulic
and mechanical characteristics of the units.
Complete performance curves for loo%, 90%, 80%, 75%, 50%, and 33%
speed showing limits of recommended operation.
Provide certified performance curves prior to shipment.
8. Suitability for suction can pressure ranges specified.
9. Motor data, including the manufacturer, size, type designation, minimum
guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 314 load, and 1/2 load,
locked motor current in amps, full load current in amps, the motor speed in
rpm, mounting details, and other data as required in the Contract
Documents.
10. Written certification of motor inverter duty rating for pumping units specified
for operation with variable frequency drives.
11. Outline dimensions and weights of pumping unit components and as
assembled.
12. Materials of pump construction including bowls, bowl lining, shafts bearings,
impellers and castings. Written certification of pumping units capability to
withstand specified pressures.
13.
14. Installation instructions.
Protective coating of pumping unit.
15. Operation and maintenance manuals.
16. Suction can fabrication drawings.
1.05 Quality
A. All pumping equipment furnished under this Section shatl be of a design and
manufacture that has been used in similar applications. Manufacturer shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that pumps of similar construction are in
service and functioning properly. Manufacturers as specified herein manufacture
pumping units with acceptable quality or experience. Manufacturers must, however,
meet the performance requirements stated herein for the actual pumps specified.
Listing of said manufacturers does not imply that said performance requirements can
be mef for each pumping unit specified. Contractor shall be responsible to verifythat
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11310-5
manufacturers supplying equipment meet the size and capacity requirement
specified herein.
B. Pump manufacturer shall verify applicability of pumping equipment with respect to NPSHA, suction piping, can and discharge geometry to assure prevention of
cavitation, vibration, surging, overheating, corrosion, and vortexing.
C. Pumping unit Supplier shall be an authorized distributor approved by Owner. Said
distributor shall have adequate service facilities within a 60 mile radius of Owner's
office and shall have a service organization, machine shop facilities, and parts
inventory such that servicing or replacement of pumping units can be provided with
minimum delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. General
Booster vertical turbine pumps shall be close coupled open line shaft (water lubricated) type
with an aboveground flanged discharge and either enclosed or semi-open impellers.
All parts of the pump exposed to water shall be of stainless steel, brass, heavy cast iron, or equivalent corrosion resistant material.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all applicable provisions of AWWA E 101 (Part A), latest,
are hereby made a part of these Specifications.
Pumps shall be manufactured by Floway, Goulds, Fairbanks Morse, lngersoll Dresser, or
equal.
2.02. Pump and Components
A. PumD Bowls
Bowls shall be of close-grained, gray cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or better,
precision cast, free from blow holes, sand pockets, and other detrimental defects.
Water passageways in said bowls shall be smooth so as to allow freedom from
cavitation and permit maximum efficiency. Each bowl shall have end and/or side
seal to prevent slippage of water between bowl and impeller.
Bowls shall be lined with vitreous porcelain enamel, or equal, to produce long
effective life (said lining shall not be applied for the purpose of short time gain in
efficiency). Lining identical to that furnished hereunder shall have been used in the
field under similar conditions with satisfactory results for at least a five-year period.
Bowls shall be of such size to fit the suction can with proper clearance (velocity of
water between bowls and can of five (5) feet per second maximum at specified capacity). Bowls shall be capable of withstanding 1 -1/2 times the pump shutoff head
pressure (zero discharge) or twice the rated capacity pressure, whichever is greater.
Bowl material shall have a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 psi.
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
' Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11310-6
6.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Pump Impellers
Impellers shall be of the enclosed or semi-open type, constructed of SAE 40 bronze.
They shall be balanced hydraulically and dynamically to prevent vibration and shall
be smoothly finished on all surfaces for minimum friction. Impellers shall be
accurately fitted and securely locked to the pump shaft. Vertical adjustment of
impellers shall be possible by adjusting top shaft nut.
Pump Shaft
Pump shaft shall be constructed of AISI-410 or 416 stainless steel and shall be
accurately machined to provide smooth operation. It shall easily withstand torsional
loads and other stresses encountered within the pump. Pump shaft shall have
adequate bearing support at every bowl section and at top and bottom case section,
and shall be equipped with a suitable steel coupling for connection to the line shaft.
Pump Bearinas
Pump Bearings shall be sleeve type constructed or SAE 40,64,67, or 660 bronze,
or approved equal. Bearing area, bearing cooling, and bearing lubrication shall be
ample for long, trouble-free operating life.
Discharqe Case
Discharge case shall securely fasten the pump bowl assembly to the column piping.
It shall be heavily reinforced with streamlined fluid passages and it shall contain
sleeve bearings for the pump shaft.
Suction Case
Suction case shall securely fasten the suction bell to the bowl assembly. It shall be
heavily reinforced with streamlined fluid passages and it shall contain a sleeve
bearing for the pump shaft which is effectively plugged at the bottom to form a
grease container. A sand collar shall prevent sand from entering the suction case
bearing.
Suction Bell
Unless specified otherwise, a suction bell of the same material and diameter as the
bowl assembly shall be provided. The suction bell inlet shall be set two (2) suction
bell diameters, 18' minimum, from bottom of suction can.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Contract 38891 1 131 0-7
H. Column PiDinq
Column piping shall be threaded pipe conforming to the following diameters and
weights per foot unless specified otherwise.
Nominal Size Outside Diameter Weight Per Foot
/Inches) (Inches) (Pounds)
6 6.625 18.97
8 8.625 24.70
10 10.750 34.24
12 12.750 43.77
14 14.000 54.57
16 16.000 62.58
Column pipe sections shall be connected with threaded steel sleeve type couplings.
Ends of each pipe section shall be faced normal to section axis and machined with
threads to permit ends to butt to ensure proper alignment when assembled. Coating
of the column piping, either interior or exterior, is not required.
1. Line Shaft
Line shaft shall be comprised of AIS1 (2-1045 material, or approved equal. Line shaft
shall be 18" minimum length.
2.03. Discharge Head
Discharge head shall be constructed of fabricated steel as shown on the Drawings as
specified in Section 1.02 herein and shall be capable of withstanding all loads imposed
during normal operation. Discharge head shall be furnished with a shaft stuffing box, as
approved by Owner, unless specified Otherwise.
Where pumping unit is installed in a suction can, the discharge head shall be equipped with
flanged base matching the can and suitable for suction can pressure specified. Unless
specified otherwise, flange base shall be 150 Ib ANSI 81 6.5 or AWWA C207, Class E.
Discharge head shall be suitably enclosed to prevent the entrance of dust and foreign
material. Drain plugs shall be provided at the bottom.
Discharge head shall have a standard flanged outlet of the size specified except where
otherwise permitted. If the discharge flange is not the size specified, an adapter consisting
of a smooth eccentric increaser (with bottoms level) or reducer (with tops level) shall be provided. Said adapter shall be flanged to mate the discharge head at one end and as
specified at the other.
Unless specified otherwise, discharge head base flange shall be bored for two (2) 1/2"
diameter Class 3000 forged steel couplings. Steel couplings shall be welded to the base
flange and provided with threaded plugs.
Discharge head assembly shall be capable of withstanding 1-1/2 times the pump shutoff
head pressure (zero discharge) or twice the rated capacity pressure, whichever is greater.
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11310-8
Motor base, column flange face, and discharge flange face shall be accurately machined,
faced, and drilled to NEMA and ASA standards. Upon assembly, motor and discharge head
shall form an integral unit.
2.04 Nameplate
Nameplate, easy to read and corrosion resistant, shall be provided with each pump and said
nameplate shall contain complete pump information including manufacturer, serial number,
model number, capacity in gallons per minute, total dynamic head in feet, and pump speed,
all at specified design point. Said nameplate shall be mounted on pump head.
2.05 Suction Cans
A. General
Booster pump suction cans used in conjunction with close coupled line shaft vertical
turbine pumping units shall have diameter, length, lining, coating, wall thickness,
orientation of suction inlet, drilling of top flange, and dimensions all as specified
herein and as shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise specified, suction cans
shall be provided with all booster pumping units.
B. Suction Can Reauirements
1) Can shall be sized so that velocity of water passing bowl@) within can shall
be 3 feet per second maximum at specified capacity.
2) Can shall be of sufficient length to provide for column piping of 18" minimum
length and 18" minimum clearance between bottom of pump bowl assembly
(suction bell or strainer, whichever is specified) and bottom of can.
3)
4)
5)
Can inlet shall be 36" minimum and 60" maximum from bottom of can.
Cans shall be manufactured or 1/4' minimum steel plate. Cans shall be
provided with suitable baffles, if necessary, to prevent excessive turbulence.
Can shall be cement mortar lined, 3/8" thick for can diameters 18" and less
and 1/2" thick for can diameters over 18".
6) Can shall be cement mortar coated, 5/8" thick for can diameters 1 8" and less
and 3/4" thick for can diameters over 18".
7) Can shall be provided with top flange matching the discharge head and shall
be suitable for suction pressure specified.
8) Bottom of can shall be provided with an AWWA C207 Class E blind flange
fullywelded (inside and outside) to pump can to provided specified pressure
rating.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Contract 38891 11310-9
2.06 Vertical Hollow Shaft Electric Motor
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
General
Vertical hollow shaft electric motors shall be Design B, high thrust, squirrel cage,
induction type having NEMA weather protected Type I enclosures unless specified
otherwise. Motors shall be built to form an integral part of pump head assembly and
shall be suitable electrically and mechanically to efficiently and effectively drive
pumps specified. Motors shall operate in accordance with these Specifications.
Motors shall be manufactured by General Electric Corporation, U.S. Electrical Motors
Division Emerson Electric Co., or Westinghouse Electric Corporation, or approved
equal. Unless specified otherwise all materials, workmanship, and tests shall
conform with the applicable specifications of the National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), and
American Standards Association (ASA), and the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers
Association (AFBMA).
Power
Unless specified otherwise, motors shall be nameplate rated, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 460
volts.
SDeed
Unless specified otherwise, motors shall be 4 pole and shall have no load speed of
1800 rpm.
I
Startina Characteristics
Motors rated 200 hp and smaller shall be full voltage line start and motors rated 250
hp and larger shall be part winding increment start, unless specified otherwise.
Eff iciencv
All motors shall be rated premium efficiency, unless specified otherwise. Rated
efficiencies shall be based on NEMA Standard MG1-12.536. Guaranteed
efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with IEEE #12, Test Method Band E,
latest revision.
Service Factor
Rated service factor shall be 1 .15 or greater.
Insulation System
All motors shall be provided with Class "F" or better insulation systems except that
motor lead insulation may be Class "B" or better. Impregnating materials shall be
rated Class "F" (155 degrees C) minimum. Completed windings, when tested in
accordance with IEEE #57, latest revision, shall show a thermal rating of not less
than 150 degrees C for 30,000 hour's life.
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 1 31 0-1 0
.-
Windings shall be held firmly in stator slots to prevent coil shift. Sharp edges and
burrs shall be removed from stator slots prior to winding or inserting coils. Slot liners
and coil end phase insulation, in addition to the coating, shall be provided. Stator
windings shall be of high conductivity copper magnet wire.
Completed stator windings shall be provided with a properly cured, uniform
impregnation for mechanical rigidity, moisture resistance, and protection against
winding failures from accumulation of foreign conductive matter. The completed
insulation system shall be capable of withstanding phase-to-ground rms voltage of
600 volts continuous and 2,300 volts instantaneous (surge or transient).
H. TemDerature Rise
Rated temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient temperature measured by
resistance at service factor load of 1.1 5 shall not exceed 90 degrees C.
I. Inrush Current
Motors rated between 10 hp and 50 hp shall be rated NEMA locked rotor Code H or
better and motors rated 50 hp and larger shall be rated NEMA locked rotor Code G
or better except where NEMA locked rotor Code H is specifically permitted.
J. Load Conditions
Actual motor loads shall not exceed the nameplate rating (horsepower) unless
specified otherwise.
K. Motor Balance
Motors shall be dynamically balanced to a maximum of .001" peak to peak
amplitude, especially at upper bearing housing.
L. Bearinas
Motors shall be equipped with anti-friction type thrust and guide bearings. Angular
contact ball thrust bearings shall be used in preference to spherical roller thrust
bearings wherever possible. Angular contact ball thrust bearing shall be self cooled
wherever possible. Water cooled angular contact ball thrust bearings shall be used
only when approved by Owner. Spherical roller thrust bearings shall be water
cooled.
Bearings shall be of sufficient capacity to carry all static and dynamic up and down
thrust loads, both momentary and continuous, imposed by the pump. Bearings shall
provide minimum 5 year B10 life (40,000 hours) based on continuous design thrust
load or minimum 1 year B10 life (8770 hours) based on maximum pump shut-off
thrust load, whichever is greater. Bearings shall also provide for minimum
momentary upthrust equal to 30% of rated downthrust.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Contract 38891 11310-11
M. Bushinas
Motors shall be equipped with lower end head shaft steady bushings unless
specified otherwise.
N. Lubrication Svstem
Motor thrust bearings shall be oil lubricated; however, motor guide bearings may be
grease lubricated. Oil lubrication systems shall provide optimum lubrication of
bearings. Said systems shall have sufficient oil storage and oil cooling capacity to
limit oil bath temperature rise to 45 degrees C above 40 degrees C ambient
temperature unless temperature rise of 50 degrees C is specifically permitted. Oil
lubricated motors shall have visual level indicators and accessible fill and drain
plugs. Indicators and plugs shall be located 180 degrees from pump discharge
unless specified otherwise. Grease lubrication systems shall be regreasable and
shall provide for automatic flushing or purging of grease cavity during regreasing.
0. Thermal Protection
Motors shall be equipped with 120 volt thermal sensors, one for each phase, affixed
to or embedded in motor windings, set to open control circuit at 135 degrees C. All thermal sensor leads shall terminate in motor terminal box. Control modules and
reset switches shall be furnished with the thermal sensors. The thermal sensors
shall be Texas Instruments 4BA or 7BA, or approved equal. The control modules
shall be Texas Instruments 50AA, or approved equal.
P. Suace Heaters
Motors shall be equipped with 120 volt single phase belt type space heaters capable
of raising motor temperature 10 degrees C above ambient temperature to prevent
condensation. All space heater leads shall terminate in motor terminal box.
Q. Non-Reverse Protection
Motors shall be equipped with non-reverse mechanisms which shall limit maximum
reversal to within 10 degrees of rotation.
R. Terminal Box
Motors shall be equipped with extra large heavy duty split type conduit boxes.
Unless specified otherwise, motor terminal boxes shall be located 90 degrees from
pump discharge.
S. Screens
Motors shall be equipped with suitable corrosion resistant safety and rodent screens.
Said screens shall not interfere with motor cooling or motor heat dissipation.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Contract 38891 11310-12
T. Nameplates
Nameplates, easy to read and corrosion resistant, shall be provided with each motor
and said nameplates shall include the following information:
a. Motor Data Nameplate - Manufacturer, serial number, model number, rated
horsepower, service factor, frequency, phase, load voltage, full load current,
full load speed, design designation, locked rotor-code, insulation class,
temperature rise, ambient temperature, thermal sensor setting, NEMA
nominal efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor,
and inverter duty rating (where applicable).
b. Connection Data Nameplate - Motor start, motor run characteristics, and
motor connection diagram.
C. Bearina Data Nameplate - Manufacturers, bearing types (thrust and guide),
bearing numbers, thrust capacity, oil type, minimum operating oil viscosity,
maximum operating oil bath temperature, required cooling water flow, and
maximum cooling water pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01. Pumping Unit Factory Performance Test
Each completed pumping unit (pump bowl assembly and vertical hollow shaft motor to be
furnished) shall be given a certified factory performance test by pump manufacturer prior to
shipment from factory. Test procedures and apparatus shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the Hydraulic Institute Standards, except as modified herein. Pumping unit
shall be tested at all design points for verification of certified performance curve furnished by
manufacturer and approved by Owner. Manufacturer shall guarantee pumping unit
performance at specified operating conditions, including flow, total dynamic head, and
efficiency. The certified test logs and performance curves shall be signed by an officer of
the manufacturer.
Tests shall be performed using suitable equipment for measuring bowl capacity, bowl head,
power (input, brake, and water), and speed, all as approved by Owner. Equipment shall
include a power meter for measuring input power (wire), a dynamometer for determination of
pump brake horsepower, and a water meter for measuring output power (water). Contractor
shall submit three copies of each certified factory performance test for acceptance by
Owner. Owner reserves the right to have a representative present during any tests and to
witness same. Owner shall be notified at least two (2) weeks in advance of factory
performance testing.
3.02. Pumping Unit Installation
Contractor shall bear full responsibilitv for the satisfactory installation and initial operation of
all pumping units furnished under these Specifications and shall provide sufficient personal
supervision over all installation and start-up procedures accordingly, unless otherwise
specified. Contractor shall also provide all test equipment necessary to determine initial
operating performance.
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 11 310-1 3
During installation, Contractor shall disinfect all portions of the pump bowl assembly and
column piping with a chlorine solution and method acceptable to Owner.
3.03. Pumping Unit Field Performance Test (Acceptance Test)
After equipment has been completely installed, field tests will be performed which shall be
witnessed by Contractor. Each pumping unit furnished hereunder shall be operated for a
period of two weeks during which time acceptance tests may be conducted. Head capacity,
overall efficiency, and input and output horsepower shall be determined for at least three
different operating conditions in the operating range of the pumping unit, including the
specified design point, for comparison with the certified pump curves and the factory
performance test results, both as approved by Owner.
Pumping units (pump and motor) shall perform in the field substantially in accordance with
the certified pump curves and the factory performance test results as adjusted for field
conditions. If, in the opinion of Owner, the equipment furnished does not perform in
accordance with these Specifications, Contractor shall promptly make all necessary repairs
or corrections so that the equipment fully complies with these Specifications. Contractor
shall remove, restore, and replace the equipment if required. Factory and field performance
tests shall be rerun if necessary. Pump manufacturer's field service engineer shall assist
Owner in the proper conduct of the above field acceptance tests.
3.04. Pumping Unit Vibration
Completed pumping unit (pump and motor) shall receive a final field trim balance, as may be
required, and vibration of unit shall not exceed 0.0025', peak to peak amplitude when
operating. Contractor shall field measure vibration with a suitable calibrated instrument and
all measurements shall be witnessed by Owner. Vibration shall be measured at motor thrust
bearing housing and at any other locations on pumping unit as directed by Owner.
-
September 2004 Close Coupled Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 1 31 0-1 4
SECTION 131 10
CATHODIC PROTECTION BY SACRIFICIAL ANODES
PART 1- GENERAL
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of the latest edition of the SSPWC.
1.1 SCOPE
Furnish all labor, materials, tools and incidentals to install the sacrificial anode cathodic protection
system. Cathodic protection installation, inspection, and testing are required for a complete and
workable system.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CONTRACTOR. The qualified construction firm selected by the Owner to have
prime responsibility for the completion of work.
8. OWNER. The Owner, as referred to in these specifications, is the City of Carlsbad.
C. ENGINEER. The Engineer is the Owner's representative who is assigned to be the
direct contact between the Owner and the Contractor.
D. CORROSION ENGINEER. Retained by the Contractor, who is trained and
experienced in cathodic protection installations and design and who is either a
Registered Corrosion Engineer or a NACE Certified Cathodic Protection Specialist.
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C94-86 Ready-Mixed Concrete D-2220
D-1248
83
B8 Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors
Polyvinyl chloride Insulation for Wire and Cable
Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials
Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
B. Federal Specifications (FS)
Military Specification (Mil. Spec):
MIL-C-18480B Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent, Coal Tar Base
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
83-80 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
486-76 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
D. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):
RPO169-96 Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on
Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems -
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-1
E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):
RP0286 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines
1.4 SUBMllTALS
The following information shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER in accordance with
Section 1300 of these specifications.
A. Catalog Cuts:
1. High potential magnesium anodes
2. At-grade concrete test box with cast iron lid
3. Shunts
4. Wire and cable
5. Exothermic weld kits
6. Weld caps
7. Weld coating
8. Plastic warning tape
9. Insulating flange kits
10. Wax tape coating system
B. As-Built Drawinas.
The CONTRACTOR shall maintain As-Built drawings showing exact locations of
anodes, test stations, insulators, and wire trenching runs. Location changes from the
design shall be clearly marked in red on a blue line copy of the design drawings. The
As-Built drawings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the end of the project. The
project is not considered complete until As-Built drawings are submitted.
C. Test Results.
1. Insulator tests
2. Continuity tests
3. Anode testing and cathodic protection performance
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
Materials and equipment shall be new and the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged
in the manufacturing of such products. All materials and equipment shall bear evidence of safe
operation approval from a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2.2 HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODES
A. CaDacitv. High potential magnesium anodes shall have a theoretical energy content of
1000 ampere-hours per pound and have a minimum useful output of 500
ampere-hours per pound.
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-2
B. Chemical Composition (High Potential Magnesium).
Aluminum
Manganese
Zinc
Copper
Nickel
Iron
Silicon
Other Magnesium
0.01 percent (rnax)
0.5 to 1.3 percent
0.002 percent (rnax)
0.02 percent (ma)
0.001 percent (max)
0.03 percent (max)
0.002 percent (max)
0.05 percent each (max)
balance
C. Open Circuit Potential. The open circuit potential of all anodes, buried in the soil, shall
be between 1.55 and 1.75 volts dc versus a copper-copper sulfate reference
electrode.
lnaot Size And Weiaht. Anodes shall be 48-pound pre-packaged, high potential
ingots with a trapezoidal cross section. Ingot length shall be 32 inches long. The
total packaged weight shall be 105 Ibs.
D.
E. Anode Construction. Anodes shall be cast magnesium with a galvanized steel core
rod recessed on one end to provide access to the rod for connection of the lead wire.
Silver braze the lead wire to the rod and make the connection mechanically secure.
Insulate the connection to a 600-volt rating by filling the recess with epoxy and
covering any exposed bare steel core or wire with heat shrinkable tubing. The
insulating tubing shall extend over the lead wire insulation by not less than 1 /2 inch.
F. Anode Pre-Packaaed Backfill Material. The anodes shall be completely encased
and centered within a permeable cloth bag in a special low resistivity backfill mix with
the following composition:
Gypsum 75%
Powdered bentonite 20%
Anhydrous sodium sulfate 5%
G. Backfill grains shall b& such that 1 00 percent is capable of passing through a screen
of 100 mesh. Backfill shall be firmly packed around the anode such that the ingot is
approximately in the center of the backfill. The resistivity of the backfill shall be no
greater than 50 ohm-cm when tested wet in a soil box. Total prepackaged weight
shall be approximately 105 pounds.
2.3 AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS
A. Test Box. At-grade test boxes shall be round, pre-cast concrete with a cast iron lid.
The dimensions shall be 14-1/4 inches O.D. by 9 inches I.D. by 12 inches high,
similar to Christy G5 Utility Box with a cast iron supporting ring and lid. The lid shall
be cast with the legend "CMWD Test Station".
B. Identification Tam. All test leads shall be identified with an Avery label (model
5361 ), self-adhesive covered with polyolefin clear heat shrink tubing (3mfp301). The
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 13110-3
label shall include: name of facility - size - pipe material; type of insulation; station
number.
C. Concrete Pad. Test boxes mounted in unpaved areas shall be mounted in a
reinforced 24-inch square by 4-inch thick concrete pad constructed of ASTM C94
ready-mix concrete. Rebar shall be No. 4 steel.
2.4 WIRE AND CABLE
All wires shall be stranded copper with HMWPE or THWN insulation suitable for direct burial in
corrosive soil and water, conforming to UL 83 and ASTM standards 83 or 88. HMWPE insulation
shall conform to ASTM D1248 type 1 , class c, grade 5. THWN insulation shall conform to ASTM D-
2220.
A. Test Leads. No. 8 AWG HMWPE.
B.
C. Mechanical Joint Bond Wire. No. 2 AWG HMWPE.
D.
E.
Anode Lead Wire. Anode lead wires shall be No. 12 AWG THWN.
All wire and copper connectors shall conform to UL 486-76.
Wire Splicinq. NO wire splicing is permitted.
2.5 EXOTHERMIC WELD KIT
Wire-to-metal connections shall be made by the exothermic 'cadweld" welding process. Weld alloy
shall be for steel pipe. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to determine the manufacturer's
recommended weld charge size for metallic surfaces.
A. Weld Caps. Royston Roybond Primer 747 and Royston Handy Cap 2 or equal.
B. Weld Coatinq. Cold-applied fast-drying mastic consisting of bituminous resin and
solvents per Mil. Spec. Mil-C-18480B such as Koppers bitumastic 50 or 505,
Tnernec 40-h-413, tape-coat TC mastic or 3M Scotch Clad 244. The minimum
coating thickness shall be 25 mils (0.025 inch).
2.6 INSULATING FLANGE KITS
A. Gaskets: ANSI B-16.21, Type E, NEMA G10 glass with a rectangular O-ring seal for
operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. Gaskets shall be suitable for the
temperature and pressure rating of the piping system in which they are installed.
B. lnsulatinq Sleeves: 1/32-inch thick tube, full length, G10 glass material per NEMA LI-1
for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. For installation at threaded valve
flanges, half-length sleeves shall be used.
C. Insulating Washers: 1/8-inch thick, full length, G10 glass per NEMA LI-1 for operation
between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. -
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-4
D. Steel Washers: I/Sinch cadmium plated steel placed between the nut and insulating
washer.
E. Coatinq: All buried insulating flanges shall be wax taped coated per AWWA C217. See
section for "External Coating for Buried Surfaces" below.
2.7 EXTERNAL COATING FOR BURIED SURFACES
A. All buried insulating flange kits, AND buried pipe sections and fitting surfaces that
are not epoxy or polyurethane coated shall be wrapped with a three-layer petrolatum
wax tape coating system per AWWA C217.
B. Primer: All surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer,
inert fillers, and corrosion inhibitors having a paste-like consistency.
C. Wax Taoe: Covering material shall be a synthetic felt tape, saturated with a blend of
petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is formable over irregular
surfaces.
D. Plastic Outer Wrap: The primed and wax taped surface shall be covered with a
plastic outer wrap consisting of three layers of 50-guage (1 O-mil) polyvinylidene
chloride or PVC, high cling membrane wound together.
2.8 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE
I
A. Plastic warning tape for all cable trenches shall be a minimum of 4 mils thick and 6
inches wide, inert plastic film designed for prolonged use underground, and printed
with "Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Below".
PART 3 - CATHODIC PROTECTION INSTALLATION
3.1 , GENERAL
A. Standard. Cathodic protection installation shall conform to NACE RPOI 69-96
"Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or
Submerged Metallic Piping Systems.
B. CONTRACTOR Qualifications. All work shall be performed by qualified, experienced
personnel working under continuous, competent supervision. Qualified
CONTRACTORS must demonstrate at least five years of experience with cathodic
protection installations.
C. Test Results. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a CORROSION ENGINEER'S report
including all test data, conclusions, repairs, and cathodic protection system
performance.
D. Notification For Testinq. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least
five days in advance of the anodes and test station installations. The ENGINEER or
the OWNER'S representative shall, at their discretion, witness the installation of
anodes and cathodic protection facilities. Testing shall be as described in this
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-5
specification section.
3.2 MAGNESIUM ANODES
3.3
A. Inspection. All lead wires shall be inspected to ensure that the lead wire is securely
connected to the anode core and that no damage has occurred to the lead wire.
Lead wire failures shall require replacement of the complete anode and lead wire.
B. Pre-Packaaed Anode Inspection. Each anode shall be inspected to ensure that the
backfill material completely surrounds the anode and that the cloth bag containing
the anode and backfill material is intact. If the prepackaged anodes are supplied in a
waterproof container or covering, that container or covering shall be removed before
installation. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least five (5) days in
advance of installing the anodes.
C. Location. Anodes are to be installed in augured holes as shown in the drawings.
Anode positions can be adjusted slightly to avoid interference with existing
structures. Alternate anode positions must be approved by the ENGINEER.
D. Handlinq. Care shall be taken to ensure that the anode is never lifted, supported,
transported, or handled by the lead wire. All anodes shall be lowered into the hole
using a sling or a rope.
E. Anode Hole Size and Depth. Anodes shall be placed vertically at the bottom of a 12 feet deep augured hole, 12 inches in diameter (minimum).
F. Stsakinq Requirements, Pre-Packaued Anodes. Once the prepackaged anodes are
in the hole, 15 gallons of water shall be poured into the hole so that the anodes are
completely covered with water. Allow the anodes to soak for a minimum of 30
minutes before any soil backfill is added.
G. Soil Backfill. After the pre-packaged anodes are soaked, the hole is backfilled with
stone-free, native soil. No voids shall exist around the anode bags and the anode
lead wire shall not be damaged. The backfill shall be tamped and compacted in 18-
inch lifts taking care not to damage the anode lead wire.
AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS
A. Location. At-grade corrosion monitoring test boxes shall be located at the edge and
directly behind the curb. All test box locations shall be approved by the ENGINEER.
B. Test Box Bottom. Test boxes shall be set in native soil.
C. Test Lead Attachment. Test leads shall be attached to the pipe using the exothermic
weld process. An 18-inch length of slack wire shall be coiled at each weld at the
pipe and inside each test box.
D. Concrete Pad. A 24-inch square by 4-inch thick reinforced concrete pad is required
around each at-grade test station. Test boxes and concrete pad shall be flush with
the top of the curb.
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-6
3.4 WIRE AND CABLE -
A. Test Lead Trench. Horizontal test or anode lead runs shall be placed in a 36-inch
trench.
B. Wire Handlinq. Wire leads shall not be stretched or kinked. Care shall be taken
when installing wire and backfilling. If wire insulation is damaged during installation,
it shall be rejected and replaced completely at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. All
rejected wire shall be removed from the job site at the close of each workday.
C. Plastic Warninu Taoe. Plastic warning tape shall be installed in all wire trenches and
12 inches below finished grade.
D. Splicinq. Wire splices are not permitted.
3.5 WIRE-TO-PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. All connections of copper wires to the pipe shall be made by the exothermic weld
method.
B. Weld Charae Size. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to ensure that the
manufacturer's recommended weld charge size is used.
C. Preparation Of Wire. Do not deform cable. Remove only enough insulation from the
cable to allow for the exothermic weld. II
D. PreDaration Of Metal. Remove all coating, dirt, grime and grease from the metal
structure by wire brushing. Clean the structure to a bright, shiny surface free of all
serious pits and flaws by using a file. The surface area of the structure must be
absolutely dry.
E. Wire Position. The wire is to be held at a 30-degree angle to the surface when
welding. Only one wire shall be attached with each weld.
F. Testinq of All Comoleted Welds. After the weld has cooled, the weld shall be tested
by striking the weld with a 2-lb hammer while pulling firmly on the wire. All unsound
welds shall be cleaned, re-welded, and re-tested. All weld slag shall be removed.
Coatinu Of Welds. The area to be coated shall be clean and completely dry. Apply
a primer specifically intended for use with an elastomeric weld cap. Apply the weld
cap and a bituminous mastic coating material to all exposed areas around the cap in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The coating shall overlap
the structure coating by a minimum of 3 inches.
G.
H. Mortar ReDair. Coating voids shall be filled with cement grout.
3.6 BONDWIRES
A. Mechanical Joint Bond Wires. Two (2) No. 2 HMWPE bond wires are required
across each non-insulating, in-line valve; a third No. 6 HMWPE bond wire is required
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-7
-__- -
from the valve to one outside flange as shown in the drawings. The bond wires shall
be attached using the exothermic weld process. Bond wires shall have some slack
wire at each weld to allow for creep when backfilling.
3.7 INSULATING FLANGE KITS
A. General: Insulating flange kits shall be pre-assembled and installed as
recommended by the manufacturer, and per NACE RPO 286. Moisture, soil, and
other foreign matter must be fully removed and prevented from contacting any
portion of mating surfaces. If foreign matter contacts any portion of these surfaces,
then the entire flange shall be disassembled, cleaned, and dried before reassembly.
B. Installation: Align and install insulating joints according to the manufacturer's
recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials. The manufacturer's bolt
tightening sequence and torque specifications shall be followed.
C. Paint Piuments: No electrically conductive pigments or paints shall be used either
internally or externally on the bolts, washers, or flanges.
D. InsDection: All buried insulating flanges shall be inspected, tested, and approved by
the ENGINEER as described in Part 4 of this specification and prior to the
application of wax tape coating.
3.8 EXTERNAL COATING
A. All buried insulating flanges shall be covered with a 3-layer wax tape coating system
per AWWA C217. Additionally, all in-line valves, flanges, couplings, and adapters
that are not coated with a bonded dielectric coating shall be wax tape coated per
AWWA C217.
B. Primer: Surfaces must be cleaned of all dirt, grime, and dust by using a wire brush
and clean cloth. The surface shall be dry. Apply the primer by hand or brush. A thin
coating of primer shall be applied to all surfaces and worked into all crevices. The
primer shall be applied generously around bolts, nuts, and threads, and shall fully
cover all exposed areas. The primer should overlap the pipe coating by a minimum
of 3-inches.
C. Petrolatum Saturated Tape: The wax tape can be applied immediately after the
primer. Short lengths of tape shall be cut and carefully molded around each
individual bolt, nut, and stud end. For long bolts (such as in couplings), short lengths
of tape shall be cut and circumferentially wrapped around each individual bolt. After
the bolts are covered, the tape shall be circumferentially wrapped around the flange
with sufficient tension to provide continuous adhesion without stretching the tape.
The tape shall be formed, by hand, into all voids and spaces. There shall be no
voids or gaps under the tape. The tape shall be applied with a l-inch minimum
overlap.
D. Outer Coverinq: A plastic outer cover shall be applied over the petrolatum-saturated
tape. The plastic shall be a minimum of 50-guage (1 O-mils) and shall have two layers
applied.
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-8
PART 4 - TESTING AND INSPECTION
.-
The CONTRACTOR’S CORROSION ENGINEER shall submit his proposed test procedures to the
ENGINEER at least five (5) days in advance of the time that the cathodic protection system testing is
scheduled. The ENGINEER shall witness all testing at his discretion. All test data shall be
submitted to the ENGINEER within seven (7) days of the completion of the testing. All testing shall
be done under the supervision of a qualified CORROSION ENGINEER who is retained by the
CONTRACTOR. All deficiencies found to be due to faulty materials or workmanship shall be
repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR and at his expense. The City of Carlsbad shall be
notified at least three (3) days in advance to witness the performance testing.
4.1 TEST LEADS.
It is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to test all test leads
A. Test Method. All completed wire connection welds shall be tested by striking the
weld with a 2-fb hammer while pulling firmly on the wire. Welds failing this test shall
have the surface re-prepared, have the wire re-welded to the pipe and re-tested.
Wire welds shall be spot tested by the Engineer. After backfilling the pipe, all test
lead pairs shall be tested using a standard ohmmeter.
-
B. AcceDtance. The resistance between each pair of test leads shall not exceed 150%
of the total wire resistance as determined from published wire data.
4.2 Anode Lead Wire. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for inspecting anode lead wires.
Lead wires shall be spot inspected by the ENGINEER.
A. Test Method. A visual inspection and by running his hand along the full length of the
lead while installing.
B. AcceDtance. All leads shall be free of cuts nicks or abrasions in the wire insulation.
Damaged leads shall be rejected.
4.3 TEST LEAD TRENCHING.
The ENGINEER, at his or her discretion, shall inspect wire trenches and backfill material and
methods.
A. Test Method. The depth, trench bottom, padding, and backfill material shall be
visually inspected prior to backfilling.
B. AcceDtance. Conformance with specifications.
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 13110-9
4.4 PIPELINE CONTINUITY THROUGH IN-LINE VALVES.
The CONTRACTOR’S CORROSION ENGINEER shall measure the linear resistance of sections of
pipe in which in-line valves or other mechanical joints have been installed. All testing shall be done
by the CORROSION ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER.
A. Test Method. Resistance shall be measured by the linear resistance method. A
direct current shall be impressed from one end of the test section to the other
(typically test station to test station). A voltage drop is measured for several different
current levels. The measured resistance (R) is calculated using the equation
R=dV/I, where dV is the voltage drop between the test span and I is the current. The
resistance shall be measured for at least four (4) different current levels.
B. AcceDtance. Acceptance is a comparison between the measured resistance (from
the field test data) and the theoretical resistance. The theoretical resistance must
consider the pipe (length and wall thickness) and the resistance of the bond wires.
The measured resistance shall not exceed the theoretical resistance by more than
130%. The CONTRACTOR’S CORROSION ENGINEER shall submit, within seven
(7) days of the completion of the testing and in a report format, to the ENGINEER all
calculations of the theoretical resistance and measured pipe resistance for each
section tested.
4.5 INSULATING FLANGE KITS
A. ResDonsibility: Insulating flanges shall be inspected and tested by the
CONTRACTOR’S CORROSION ENGINEER and in the presence of the ENGINEER,
prior to backfilling. Testing of the buried insulating flange kit prior to backfill will result
in non-acceptance of the insulator.
B. Test Method: The assembled flange shall be tested using a Gas Electronics Model
601 Insulation Checker specifically design for testing insulating flanges. The testing
shall be done by a qualified CORROSION ENGINEER accepted by the ENGINEER
and shall be done in accordance with NACE RPO 286.
C. Acceptance: The installation of the insulating flange kit shall be considered complete
when the testing device indicates no shorts or partial shorts are present. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance in finding any and all shorts or shorted bolts.
All disassembly and reassembly necessary for acceptance shall be done at the
CONTRACTOR’S expense.
4.6 CATHODIC PROTECTION PERFORMANCE
The cathodic protection system shall be activated and tested by the CONTRACTOR’s CORROSION
ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER.
A. Test Method. The installed cathodic protection system testing shall include: native
pipe-to-soil potentials, protected pipe-to-soil potentials, open-circuit anode potentials,
and anode current output measurements.
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-10
B. AcceDtance. Shall be based on achieving the -850 mV criterion as outlined in NACE
RPO169-96. All data shall be submitted, in a typed 8-1 /2 X 1 1 inch report to the
City's ENGINEER and the City's CORROSION ENGINEER for approval.
C. Compliance With Specifications. Deficiencies or omissions in materials or
workmanship found by these tests shall be rectified at the CONTRACTOR'S
expense. Deficiencies shall include but are not limited to: broken leads, improper or
unclean trenches, lack of 18-inchor slack wire in test boxes; improperly mounted test
boxes; improper installation and testing of insulators; and other deficiencies
associated with the workmanship, installation, and non-functioning equipment.
"END OF SECTION"
January 2004 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 131 10-1 1
SECTION 13221
SURGE ARRESTOR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General Description
Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to construct two
(2) surge arrestor systems as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Surge
arrestor system for the Recycled Water Pump Station shall include a 2,800 gallon
horizontal surge tank, compressed air system, and appurtenances. Surge arrestor
system for the Potable Water Pump Station shall include a 2,100 gallon horizontal surge
tank, compressed air system, and appurtenances.
1.02 References
Publications listed below form part of this Specification to extent referenced in the text
by basic designation only. The latest edition of publication governs unless otherwise
noted.
A. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
B. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
C. NEC National Electric Code c
D. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
E. UBC Uniform Building Code
1.03 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. Product Data and Shop Drawinas
1. As a minimum, submittals shall include product data and shop drawings
for the following: horizontal surge tank@), surge tank appurtenances,
compressed air system(s), including air compressor(s) and receiver(s),
compressor control panel(s), and appurtenances.
2. Product data shall include catalog cut sheets reflecting characteristics,
performance specifications, and selected options for proposed equipment
and appurtenances.
3. Shop drawings shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical
equipment items showing layout of equipment; orientation, details, and
dimensions of all appurtenances; and anchor bolt locations, sizes, and
minimum embedment requirements.
April 2004 Surge Arrestor
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 13221 -1
- __A ____ ___
-
4. Equipment anchorage calculations for the horizontal surge tank(s) and air
compressor/air receiver(s). Equipment anchorage calculations shall be
prepared in accordance with the Uniform Building Code (latest edition) for
Seismic Zone 4 essential facilities. Calculations shall be prepared by a
registered professional civil or structural engineer in the State of
California. Design of each horizontal surge tank, support saddles, and
anchorage system shall be based on the flooded weight of the tank (full
of water).
5. Shop drawings shall also include compressor control panel wiring
diagrams and interconnection diagrams. Wire numbers, terminal
numbers, and legend symbols shall be shown.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals
1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be provided in
accordance with the requirements of the Special Construction Provisions.
2. Documentation shall be specific to the surge arrestor system(s)
constructed and shall cover all aspects of equipment operation and
maintenance. Support data for any equipment shall be provided by those
supplying the equipment. O&M Manuals shall include the following as a
minimum:
a. Functional description of major equipment items. --
b. Complete instructions for operating and maintaining equipment
and components.
c. Calibration and adjustment of equipment for initial start-up or as
required for routine maintenance.
d. Support data for commercially available components not produced
by the prime equipment manufacturer, but supplied in accordance
with the Specifications, shall be supported by literature from the
prime manufacturer and incorporated as appendices.
e. As-built electrical schematic diagrams (control, wiring, and
interconnections).
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Surge Arrestor
1 3221 -2
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Surge Tank
A. General
Surge tanks shall be horizontal cylindrical vessels with dished heads fabricated
of carbon steel and designed and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. All vessel connections 3" in
diameter and larger shall be flanged nozzle type connections. Unless specified
otherwise, flanges shall be 300 Ib. ANSI B16.5. All vessel connections smaller
than 3" in diameter shall be threaded 3,000 Ib. full or half couplings.
Surge tanks shall be as manufactured by Fluid Kinetics Corp., Steel Structures,
Inc., or equal.
B. Fabrication
Each tank shall be of the configuration and size shown on the Drawings. Tanks
shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psig and test pressure
rating of 375 psig (8 hour duration). Each tank shall have a permanently
attached nameplate bearing the ASME pressure vessel label. Recycled Water
Pump Station surge tank shall have a nominal diameter of 6' and a minimum
volume of 2,800 gallons. Potable Water Pump Station surge tank shall have a
nominal diameter of 6 and a minimum volume of 2,100 gallons.
C. Nozzles and Appurtenances
Minimum tank nozzles and appurtenances shall include all items shown on the
Drawings and specified herein. Tank nozzles and appurtenances shall be
suitable for the tank minimum working pressure rating specified herein or shown
on the Drawings. Each tank shall be provided with two lifting lugs, and fabricated
steel saddle type supports fully welded to the vessel and suitable for mounting to
a reinforced concrete foundation. Support saddles shall be of adequate height to
provide the tank invert clearance shown on the Drawings. As a minimum, each
tank shall be provided with the following connections:
1. InleVOutlet:
a. Recycled Water Surge Tank: One (1) 8' diameter, 300 Ib flanged,
rotated 45-degrees from tank bottom
b. Potable Water Surge Tank: One (1) 6" diameter, 300 Ib flanged,
at bottom of tank.
2.
3.
Air Inlet: One (1) 1" diameter, threaded, top mounted
Liquid Level Electrode Holders: Two (2) 3" diameter, 150 Ib flanged, top
mounted
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 Surge Arrestor
13221 -3
4. Access Manways: One (1) 14"x18" elliptical, side mounted. One (1) 24"
diameter hinged, top mounted.
5. Drain Outlet: One (1) 4" diameter, flanged, bottom mounted
6. High Pressure Air Relief Outlet: One (1) 1" diameter, threaded, top
mounted
7. Sight Glass Outlets: Two (2) 1" diameter, threaded, end mounted
8.
Drain and air connections shall be provided with isolation valves. Flanged liquid
level electrode holder connection shall be provided for conductance-type
electrodes (reference Specification Section 17000 herein). Contractor shall
coordinate nozzle size and location with liquid level electrode manufacturer.
Pressure Gauge Outlet: One (1) 1/2" diameter, threaded, end mounted
Each tank shall be provided with a sight glass assembly mounted to the end of
the tank. Each sight glass assembly shall be rated for liquid pressures of 500 psi
at 100°F and shall include upper and lower isolation valves, glass tube, drain,
four (4) guard rods, and automatic ball checks. Sight glass assembly
components shall be constructed of stainless steel. Sight glass assemblies shall
be as manufactured by John C. Emst Co., Eugene Ernst Products Co., or equal.
Contractor shall coordinate sight glass assembly length and connection size with
tank nozzle locations and size.
D. Coatinq
Interior of tanks shall be coated per Service-Condition R of the Basic Coating
and Painting Specification for Water, Recycled Water, and Wastewater
Facilities.
Exterior of tanks shall be coated per Service Condition A of the Basic Coating
and Painting Specification for Water, Recycled Water, and Wastewater
Facilities.
Contractor shall submit color charts to Owner. Colors for interior and exterior of
tank shall be selected by the Owner.
2.01 Compressed Air Supply System
A. General
The compressed air supply system shall be designed to supply air to the surge
tank. Each system shall be capable of delivering not less than 8 cfm of clean, oil
free air, compressed at 250 psig pressure under standard atmospheric
conditions of 14.7 psi pressure, 68°F temperature, and 30% relative humidity.
Each compressed air supply system shall consist of a two-stage air compressor
with air filter, pressure regulator, regulators, low oil level shutdown switch, and
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 Surge Arrestor
13221 -4
gauges. All controls and electrical switchgear necessary to automatically start
and stop the compressor at the specified air pressures shall be provided as
shown on the Drawings.
The compressed air supply systems shall be as manufactured by Gardner
Denver, Ingersoll-Rand, Saylor-Beall, or equal
B. Cornmessor
Each compressor shall be a single acting reciprocating unit, capable of operating
unattended for a period of eight hours at rated speed and capacity. All parts
subject to wear or service shall be field serviceable, and the compressor shall
require only minimum maintenance. Cover plates for access openings shall be
oil-and dust-tight. The compressor shall be air cooled or liquid cooled. The
cylinder cooling area shall be adequate to prevent excessive heating. Air
passages shall be unrestricted. The crankcase or oil pump shall be provided with
means for filling and draining oil and for checking the level of the oil except when
sealed anti-friction bearings are used. Pressure lubricated compressors shall be
provided with an oil pressure gauge mounted on the front of the compressor.
The compressor and the motor shall be mounted on a substantial, single, unified
frame assembly. Cylinder arrangement shall be vertical or V-type. Pistons shall
be of the automotive type, equipped with piston rings of which at least one shall
be an oil ring.
Each compressor shall be provided with a low oil level shutoff switch and inlet
filter/silencer. The filter shall be of the dry type, with replaceable element. The air
filter/silencer shall be readily removable for cleaning.
C. Air Receiver
Each air receiver shall be constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Pressure Vessels, and shall carry the official
ASME code symbol stamp. Each air receiver tank shall be 60 gallon size,
vertical, with a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psig. Unless otherwise
specified, the volume of the receiver, in cubic feet, or gallons shall be
manufacturer's standard size for compressor requested. Each receiver tank
shall be furnished with a top mounted steel plate support for the compressor and
motor, and shall be provided with support legs and vibration isolation pads
suitable for anchoring directly to a concrete pad.
Each receiver shall be equipped with an ASME spring-loaded safety valve, air
pressure gauge, line shutoff valve, and a drain outlet with a solenoid Gpe
automatic tank drain valve. The air pressure gauge shall have a pressure range
of 0 to 300 psi. The automatic tank drain valve shall automatically remove water
from the air receiver at the end of each operating cycle.
!
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Surge Arrestor
1 322 1 -5
D. Electric Motor and Drive
E.
The electric motors shall be 5 hp, minimum, TEFC with a 1.15 service factor, and
suitable for operation on 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power. The motor shall
have a horsepower nameplate rating at least equal to the horsepower required
for continuous operation of the compressor at full load. Unless otherwise
specified, starter shall be furnished with capacity and electrical characteristics
suitable for the motor according to NFPA No. 70.
Each compressor shall be driven by a single or multi-V-belt with belt guard. Belt
guards shall be OSHA approved.
Electrical Equipment and Controls
1. Construction
Each compressor control panel (CCP) shall consist of a combination
starter for the compressor motor, ON-OFF switch, elapsed time meter,
differential air pressure switch, alarm relays and lights, and control
voltage transformer suitably sized for all control wiring. The CCP shall be
provided with a steel support frame and shall be factory mounted to the
compressor assembly. All wiring, switches, push-buttons, lights, and
panels shall be NEMA'12. All switches, push-buttons, lights, and elapsed
time meters shall be mounted to the CCP door.
As a minimum, the CCP shall be provided with the following alarm relays
and lights: low oil level shutoff.
Compressed air systems shall only require main power to be fully
operational. Electrical power furnished to the CCP shall be 3 phase, 60
hertz, 480 volts, maintained within industry standards. Voltage tolerance
shall be plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Operation
When the ON-OFF switch is in the "ON" position, the differential pressure
switch shall provide start-stop control to automatically start the unit when
the air receiver pressure drops to an adjustable minimum setting and to
stop the operation when an adjustable maximum pressure setting is
reached. Initial start-stop pressure settings for the Recycled Water
Surge Arrestor System shall be 210 (i5) psig and 240 (-5) psig, respectively. Initial start-stop pressure settings for the Potable Water
Surge Arrestor System shall be 210 (k5) psig and 240 (-5) psig,
respectively. Final start-stop pressure settings shall be determined during
system start-up and testing.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Surge Arrestor
1 3221 -6
F. Appurtenances
As a minimum, each compressed air system shall be provided with the following
appurtenances:
1. Air Filter
The filter shall be replaceable element, color change type. suitable to
remove 99.9% of 0.5 micron particles and oil aerosols and shall be sized
for compressor rate at 250 psig with a maximum pressure drop of 4 psig
over the element life. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the filter
shall be piped into the system with bypass piping for changing the
element without system shut down.
2. Pressure Regulator
Pressure regulator shall suitable for a maximum inlet pressure of 250
psig and shall be capable of outlet pressure adjustment from 50-200 psig.
Pressure regulator shall be constructed with an aluminum or brass body
and NPT connections (size as shown on the Drawings) and shall be
provided with an integral pressure gauge. Pressure regulator shall be as
manufactured by Norgren, Parker Hannifin, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- 3.01 Installation and Start-up
Surge arrestor system and components shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions and as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall
arrange for qualified representatives of the manufacturer to inspect the installation and
perform start-up of the equipment and to demonstrate required performance to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
Contractor shall arrange for not less than 2 hours of adequate instruction of Operators
selected by the Owner at a time acceptable to the Owner and the manufacturers.
Instruction shall cover system operation and routine maintenance and repair.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Surge Arrestor 13221 -7
_-
SECTION 15000
GENERAL PIPING SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
DESCRIPTION
This Section describes the requirements and procedures for piping systems and
appurtenances that apply to a number of other complimentary Specification Sections.
The items are listed in this Section to avoid repetition in Sections elsewhere. This
Section includes, but is not limited to: Temporary above ground piping (high line), wet
taps, flexible pipe couplings, grooved and shouldered end couplings, joint restraint
system, field touch up, bolts, nuts, polyethylene wrap, warninghdentification tape, tracer
wire, gate well and extension stems, meter boxes, abandonment and removal of existing
facilities, and salvage.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
SUBMllTALS
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
Submit manufacturers’ catalog data showing dimensions, materials of construction by
ASTM reference and grade and coatings..
LINING CONTAMINATION PREVENTION
Volatile organic compounds present in the linings of items in contact with potable water
or recycled water shall not exceed concentrations allowed by the latest requirements of
the State Office of Drinking Water and Department of Health Services. Some products
and materials may also require proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be
used.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-1
1.6 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE) I
High line piping, where shown on the Approved Plans or required by the District
Engineer, shall be furnished, installed, disinfected, connected, maintained, and removed
by the Contractor. Bacteriological sampling and testing shall be performed by a State of
California Certified testing laboratory. The Contractor shall provide a submittal to the
District showing pipe layout, materials, sizing, flow calculations, schedule and duration of
use, and disinfection for all high line piping. The submittal shall be reviewed and
approved by the Engineer prior to ordering or delivery of any materials.
1.7 PIPE TAPPING (WET TAP)
All pipe tap (wet tap) connections to existing pipelines, whether for mainline extensions
or service laterals, shall be performed by the Contractor under the inspection of the
District. The Contractor shall provide materials and labor to excavate, pour thrust block,
backfill, compact, and repair pavement as indicated in this Section.
1.8 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems may be used for PVC or ductile-iron pipe only with prior
approval of the District Engineer. Joint restraint systems shall be used in the place of, or
in conjunction with, concrete thrust blocks as directed. Contractor shall submit shop
drawings, calculations, and catalog data for joint restraint systems.
Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, may be used for PVC or ductile-
iron pipe located within casings, or for PVC pipe casings, only.
1.9 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Polyethylene encasement shall be used for all ferrous metal materials not otherwise
protectively coated.
A. Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the protection of buried ductile-iron fittings
and valves.
B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be used for the protection of buried ductile iron pipe.
C. Polyethylene wrap or sleeves may also be installed around buried PVC pipe for
recycled water identification.
1.10 WARNlNGADENTlFlCATlON TAPE
Warninghdentification tape shall be used to identify location of underground utilities and
to act as a warning against accidental dig-ins of buried utilities. Warningidentification
tape shall be used on all underground water and recycled water mains, potable and
recycled water irrigation systems, sewer mains, and all related appurtenances.
Warninghdentification tape shall also be used on cathodic protection wiring systems and
tracer wire brought into and out of access ports.
January 2004 General Piping System and Appurtenances Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15000-2
1.11 GATE WELLS -
Gate Wells shall be used for buried valves 50mm (4") and larger, unless otherwise indicated on the Standard Drawings. ,Gate well box and lid shall be used on all gate
wells.
1.12 VALVE STEM EXTENSION
Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more than 1.5m (5') below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the operating nut to a point between 300mm (1 2") and 450mm (1 8") below the gate well lid.
1.1 3 METER BOXES
A.
B.
Meter boxes shall be used for 25mm (1") and 50mm (2") water meters.
Meter boxes shall be sized for the specific meter size or size as indicated on the Standard Drawings.
1.14 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION
Facilities installed for the use of recycled water shall be identified with purple color coating, identification labels, or signs.
CURB IDENTIFICATION MARK FOR SERVICES 1.15
The Contractor shall mark the location of all potable water, recycled water and sewer laterals at the curb crossing by stamping the face of the curb in 50mm (2") high letters as described below:
A. Potable water laterals shall be stamped with a letter "W'.
B.
C.
Recycled water laterals shall be stamped with a letter "RW'.
Sewer laterals be stamped with a letter "S'.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE)
High line piping layout, materials and appurtenances shall be as indicated on the approved submittal.
2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
Flexible pipe couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials List and as described below:
A. Steel Couplings shall have middle rings made of steel conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, A 53 (Type E or S), or A 512 having a minimum yield strength of 207 MPa (30,000 psi). Follower rings shall be ductile-iron per ASTM A 536, or steel per ASTM A 108, Grade 1018 or ASTM A 510, Grade 1018. Minimum middle ring length shall be 175 mm (7") for pipe sized 150 mm (6") through 600 mm (24").
January 2004 General Piping System and Appurtenances Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15000-3
B. Sleeve bolts shall be made of stainless steel per ASTM A193 and shall have a
minimum yield strength of 276 MPa (40,000 psi), an ultimate yield strength of
414 MPa (60,000 psi), and shall conform to AWWA C111.
2.3 GROOVED END OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR
STEEL PIPE
Groove end or shouldered couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials
List and as described below:
A. Use square-cut shouldered or grooved ends per AWWA C606. Grooved-end
couplings shall be malleable iron per ASTM A 47, or ductile iron per ASTM A
536. Gaskets shall be per ASTM D 2000.
B. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A 183, 69 MPa (10,000 psi)
tensile strength.
2.4 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems shall be ductile-iron and shall consist of a split-ring restraint with
machined (not cast) serrations - on the inside diameter, a back-up ring, and connecting
bolts, and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be a rubber-ring type with
stainless steel locking segments vulcanized into the gasket.
2.5 FIELD TOUCH-UP APPLICATIONS
All surfaces of metallic appurtenances in contact with potable water and not protected
from corrosion by another system shall be shop-coated by the manufacturer.
Appurtenances with damaged coatings shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
Engineer. Touch-up of damaged surfaces, when allowed by the Engineer, shall be
performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.6 BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts shall be as indicated below.
A. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of
pipelines up to 500mm (20") diameter and shall be carbon steel conforming to
ASTM A307, Grade A, unless otherwise indicated on the approved drawings.
Bolts shall be standard ANSI B1.l, Class A coarse threads. Nuts shall be
standard ANSI B1 .I, Class 2H coarse threads.
B. Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of pipelines
600mm (24") diameter and larger and for submerged flanges. Bolts and nuts
shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM Al93, Grade B8M for
bolts, and Grade 8M for nuts. Use lubricant for stainless steel belts and nuts.
Lubricant shall be Husky Lube "0" Seal by Husk-Ill' Corporation or equal.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-4
C. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal, except where special shapes are
required. Bolts shall be of such length that not less than 6.4mm (1/4") or more
than 12.7mm (1/2") shall project past the nut in tightened position.
D. Provide a washer under each nut and under each bolthead. Use washers of the
same materials as the nuts.
2.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Polyethylene encasement shall be as indicated below and shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List. Polyethylene materials shall be kept out of direct sunlight
exposure.
A. Polyethylene sleeves shall be a minimum 0.305mm (0.012" or 12 mil) thick
polyethylene plastic in accordance with AWA C105.
B. Polyethylene wrap shall be a minimum 0.203mm (0.008" or 8 mil) thick
polyethylene plastic in accordance with AWA C105.
C. Polyethylene wrap and sleeves shall be clear for use with potable water and
purple for use with recycled water.
D. Polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape a minimum of 50mm (2") wide or plastic tie
straps shall be used to secure polyethylene encasement.
2.8 WARNINGADENTIFICATION TAPE -
Warningfidentification tape shall be as indicated below and in accordance with the
Approved Materials List.
A. Tape shall be an inert plastic film or metallic formulated for prolonged
underground use that will not degrade when exposed to alkalies, acids and other
destructive substances commonly found in soil.
B. Tape shall be puncture-resistant and shall have an elongation of two times its
original length before patting.
C. Tape shall be colored to identify the type of utility intended for identification.
Printed message and tape color shall be as follows:
Printed Messaae Tape Color
Caution: Waterline Buried Below Blue
Caution: Recycled Waterline Buried Below Purple
Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Buried Below Red
Caution: Electric Line Buried Below Red
Ink used to print messages shall be permanently fixed to tape and shall be black
in color with message printed continuously throughout.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-5
D. Tape shall be minimum 0.1 02mm (0.00411 or 4 mil) thick x 150mm (6") wide with a
printed message on one side. Tape used with the installation of onsite potable
and recycled water irrigation systems shall be a minimum of 75mm (3") wide.
2.9 INSULATING UNIONS & COUPLINGS
A. For insulating unions, use a molded nylong sealing sleeve mounted in a three-
piece malcable-iron body (ASTM A47 or A197). Use thread ends when
connecting to steel piping, and copper solder joint when connecting to copper
piping. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi.
B. Threaded insulating couplings shall provide dielectric protection from electrolytic
corrosion at points where piping of dissimilar metals is joined.
2.10 GATE WELLS
Valve gate wells shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved Materials
List.
A. Valve gate well size and material shall be as follows:
I .. I- I c-900 PVC
1. PVC gate wells for use in recycled water system applications shall be
white.
2. PVC gate wells for use in potable water system applications shall be
white or blue.
B. Gate well box lids shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved
Materials List,
1. Gate well lids shall be circular ductile-iron, and shall include a skirt for a
close fit inside the upper portion of the gate well. Lids shall be cast with
the AGENCY NAME (CMWD) and the word WATER for use on potable
water systems, and recycled water for recycled water systems.
2.
3.
Lids shall be Brooks 4TT for potable water and Brooks 3RT for recycled
water with long skirt, or approved equal.
Normally closed potable water valves and recycled water valves shall use
box lids by Brooks 3RT with long skirt or approved equal.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-6
4. Lid sizes shall be as follows:
Larger than 100mm (4") where the
speed limit is 56 km/h (35 mph) or
a reate r
Machined ductile-iron frame and
200mm (8") lid with 150mm (6") long
skirt
2.11 VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS
Stem extensions shall be complete with operating nut, location ring, and lower socket to
fit valve-operating nut. The configuration of the extension stem nut shall match that of
the valve it operates.
A. Stem extensions shall be square fiberglass tubing glued together to make a
continuous one-piece unit used to a maximum length of 2.4m, eight feet (8').
B. Steel stem extensions shall be used where the maximum length of the extension
exceeds 2.4m (8') or at the request of the District Engineer. Steel stem
extensions may be round or square hot-dipped galvanized steel tubing of solid
design (no pinned couplings permitted) with guides.
2.12 METER BOXES
Meter boxes shall be polymer-type boxes with lids selected from the Approved Materials
List.
A. Meter box sizes shall be as follows:
E25mm-x 750mm (17" x 30"\ I 50mm (2") water services I
B. Meter box lids for use in potable water system applications shall be gray.
C. Meter box lids for use in recycled water system applications shall be purple.
2.13 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION
Materials used to identify pipe and appurtenances used for recycled water, not
manufactured in purple color, shall be as described in Carlsbad Reclamation Rules & Regulation for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE)
A. All high line piping, fittings, and service connections shall be furnished, installed,
and maintained by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall make connections to
a water source designated by the District Engineer.
January 2004 General Piping System and Appurtenances
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15000-7
3.2
B. All pipe, valves, fittings, hose and connections furnished by the Contractor shall -
be of good quality, clean, and suitable for conveying potable water in the opinion
of the District Engineer.
C. The high line pipe shall be installed in such a manner that it will not present a
hazard to traffic and will not interfere with access to homes and driveways along
its route.
D. Valves shall be installed at 60m (200') intervals or as directed by the District
Engineer. The use of pressure reducing valves (PRV) may be required as
directed by the District Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for disinfecting all high lines, connections,
and flushing.
F. Following disinfection and acceptance of the high line as a potable water system,
the Contractor shall maintain continuous service through the high line piping to all
consumers normally served both directly and indirectly by the pipeline.
G. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove the high line piping
and appurtenances.
H. If progress in making repairs to the high line is inadequate, the District Engineer,
may order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of
directing District personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs
for corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor.
CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES (WET TAPS AND CUT-IN
INSTALLATIONS)
The Contractor shall furnish the tapping sleeve or tee, valves and all other materials as
called for in the Standard Specifications in accordance with the Approved Materials List.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor required for the excavation and
installation of the connection including, but not limited to, backfill and pavement
replacement. In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide a
water truck, high line, and fittings as part of the equipment for making the connections.
In addition, the Contractor shall assist the District in alleviating any hardship incurred
during a shutdown for connections. Emergency standby equipment or materials may be
required of the Contractor by the District Engineer.
Wet taps or cut-in tee and valve installations shall be performed as follows:
A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole the existing pipe at the location of
the proposed connection. The District shall inspect the pothole prior to
Contractor's repair of trench. Refer to the Greenbook for protection of existing
facilities. Contractor shall record the following information on as-built drawings:
1. Pipe size, outside diameter.
2.
3.
4. Elevation, grade, and alignment.
Pipe type such as ACP, PVC, Ductile-Iron or Steel.
Pipe class and/or pressure rating.
January 2004 General Piping System and Appuftenances Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15000-8
5. Location of collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings, if found. Note: collars,
bells, fittings, or couplings shall not be within 18-inches of the outer
dimension of the tapping saddle. Potential conflicts with existing utilities. 6.
B. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustments in
alignment, the Contractor shall leave a minimum 3.0m (1 0') gap between the new
pipe installation and the proposed connection point at the existing water main.
The Contractor shall leave a gap longer than 3.0m (1 0') if conditions warrant, or if
directed by the Engineer. The new pipeline shall have successfully passed pressure testing in accordance
with Section 15044 and disinfection and bacteriological testing in accordance
with Section 15041 prior to proceeding with the connection to the existing
pipeline.
C.
D. After the City Engineer has given approval to proceed with the connection, the
Contractor shall schedule with the District for the wet tap or cut-in installation.
1. Shutdowns will be scheduled at the convenience of the District.
Shutdowns may be scheduled for nights or weekends if required.
2. The Contractor shall give the District a minimum of 5 working days notice
prior to any proposed excavation or shutdown of existing mains or
services. Scheduling shall be subject to approval by the District Engineer.
3. The District may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for
any reason, the District Engineer believes that the Contractor is improperly
prepared with competent personnel, equipment, or materials to proceed
with the connection.
4. If progress in completing the connection within the time specified is
inadequate, the District may order necessary corrective measures.
Corrective measures may consist of District personnel or another
contractor completing the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be
borne by the Contractor.
E. Contractor may proceed with excavation only after potholing has been
completed, materials have been approved and delivered, and wet tap or cut-in
installation has been scheduled with approval of a Connection Permit.
1. The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and install
shoring and steel plating, when necessary, one day prior to the wet tap or
cut-in installation.
2. The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control in
accordance with the agency of jurisdiction and as deemed necessary for
the excavation by the Engineer.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-9
3. The Contractor shall de-water existing mains, in full compliance with
NPDES standards, where cut-in installations are required and shall be in
the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with Section 15041. Only
District personnel are authorized to operate existing valves. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from
unauthorized operation of existing District facilities.
4. The Contractor under the inspection of the City shall perform the following
work for wet taps and cut-in installations:
a. Wet taps: Disinfect and install and tapping saddle and tapping
valve and perform tapping operations.
b. Cut-ins: Cut and remove portions of existing mains, and disinfect
and install tees, valves, couplings, and appurtenances required to
complete the closure. The Contractor shall discard pipe and
appurtenances removed from service in accordance with this
Section.
5. After the Contractor has performed tapping or cut-in operations, and the
Engineer has given approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete the
installation as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the
Standard Specifications including, but not limited to:
a. Disinfecting and installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make
the closure to the new system.
b. Installing and setting the valve gate well(s) in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
C. Installing thrust and anchor blocks in accordance with CMWD
Standard Drawing W 15 and W19.
d. Completing all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance
with CMWD Reclamation Rules & Regulations.
e. Repairing or replacing pavement as necessary.
3.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
Flexible pipe couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and as described below:
A. Use plain-end pipe with flexible couplings per AWWA C200. Provide joint
harnesses per AWWA M11 for aboveground applications or where indicated on
the Approved Plans.
B. Flexible couplings may be used only where indicated on the drawings.
January 2004 General Piping System and Appurtenances
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15000-1 0
C. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe ends and touch-up the epoxy coating
and allow time for curing before installing the coupling. Clean the gaskets before
installing.
D. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for installation and bolt torque using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
E. Lubricate the bolt threads with graphite prior to installation.
3.4 GROOVEPEND OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR
STEEL PIPE
Grooved-end or shouldered couplings shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as described below:
A. Grooved-end or shouldered joint couplings shall be installed per AWWA C606
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Clean loose scale, rust, oil, grease, and dirt from the pipe or fitting groove and
touch-up the epoxy coating as necessary, allowing time for curing before
installing the coupling.
C. Clean the gasket before installation. Apply a lubricant selected from the
Approved Materials List to the gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends, and
housing interiors.
D. Fasten the coupling alternately and evenly until the coupling halves are seated.
Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for bolt toque using a properly
calibrated torque wrench.
3.5 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and as described below:
A. Length of pipe to be restrained on each side of bends, tees, reducers and other
fittings shall be determined by the Private Engineer or manufacturer of the
restraint device.
B. Split ring restraint shall be installed on the spigot end of pipe, connected to a
back-up ring which seats behind the bell of the adjoining pipe or fitting.
C. Restraint devices can be installed prior to lowering pipe into the trench.
D. Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-1 1
3.6 BOLTS AND NUTS
A.
B.
All bolts and nuts shall be new and unused.
Bolts and nuts shall be cleaned, if needed, by wire brushing and lubricated prior
I
to assembly. I
C. Tighten nuts uniformly and progressively.
D. Buried bolts and nuts shall receive a heavy coat of protective non-oxide grease
coating selected from the Approved Materials List prior to being wrapped with
polyethylene.
E. All stainless steel bolts shall be coated with an anti-seize compound selected
from the Approved Materials List.
Bolts and nuts shall not be reused once tightened. Used bolts and nuts shall be
discarded and removed from the job.
F.
3.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene encasement shall completely encase and cover all metal surfaces.
Pipe: All ductile-iron pipe shall be encased with polyethylene sleeves in
accordance with Method 19 described in AWWA C105, or with polyethylene wrap
in accordance with Method C described in AWWA C105.
Fittings: Fittings such as tees, bends and reducers shall be encased with polyethylene wrap in accordance with AWWA C105.
Valves: Valves shall have only the stem and operating nut exposed and the wrap
shall be attached so that valve operation will not disturb the wrapping or break
the seal.
I I
B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape or
plastic tie straps at the ends and quarter points along the sleeve in a manner that
will hold the sleeve securely in place during backfill. Polyethylene wrap shall be
secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape in a manner that will hold the
wrap securely in place during backfill.
3.8 WARNINGADENTIFICATION TAPE !
WarningAdentification Tape shall be installed as described below in accordance with the Standard Drawings. I
A. Tape shall be placed at the top of the pipe zone 300mm (12") above and
centered over the utility intended for identification. Tape used with onsite potable
and recycled water irrigation systems shall be installed at 150mm (6") above the
pipe. I
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Apputtenances Contract 38891 1 5000-1 2
B. Tape shall be installed with the printed side up and run continuously along the
entire length of the utility intended for identification. Tape shall be installed on the
main piping and all appurtenant laterals, including blowoffs, air valve assemblies,
fire hydrants, and services. Tape splices shall overlap a minimum of 600mm (24")
for continuous coverage.
C. Tape shall be installed prior to placement of the Trench Zone Backfill.
3.9 GATE WELLS AND VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS
Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as described
below:
A. Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as
described below:
B. The top exterior portion of the gate well lid and ring shall be coated in accordance
with CMWD Reclamation Rules & Regulations.
C. Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more
than 1.5m (5') below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring
the operating nut to a point between 300mm (12") and 450mm (18") below the
gate well lid. Valve stem extensions shall be installed in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
3.10 METER BOX INSTALLATION -
Meter boxes shall be installed at the elevations and locations shown on the Approved
Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. Near the completion of the
project, a final meter box adjustment to finish grade may be required. Water meters
shall not be installed until final adjustments are made to the meter box and approved by
the District.
3.1 1 ABANDONMENT OR REMOVAL FROM SERVICE OF EXISTING FACILITIES
Before excavating for new mains that are to replace existing pipes or services, the
Contractor shall make provisions for the continuation and maintenance of service to
customers as directed by the District Engineer.
Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water
services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the District Engineer shall be
as directed by the District Engineer.
Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water
services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the District Engineer shall be
as indicated below and in accordance with the Standard Drawings:
A. Abandonment in place:
1. Existing pipe 1OOmm (4") and smaller shall have a short section of pipe
removed and pipe ends encased in concrete.
January 2004 General Piping System and Appurtenances
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 5000-1 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B. Rem
1.
2.
Existing pipe 150mm (6") through 350mm (14") shall be cut and plugged
with concrete or shall be pressure-grouted at intervals of 60rn (200') as
recommended by the Engineer.
Existing pipe 400mm (16") and larger shall be entirely filled by pressure-
grouting or by blown sand as determined by the Engineer. I
Existing pipe ends shall be filled with concrete in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
All valves shall be removed and remaining fitting blind flanged.
Gate wells shall be removed and replaced with compacted backfill.
Water service corporation stops shall be closed. Meter boxes and curb
stops shall be removed. Service lateral to be cut back a minimum of 24"
below the finished grade.
Water services to be abandoned that are connected to pipelines that will
remain in service shall be abandoned in-place.
Sewer laterals shall be cut and plugged with concrete or capped at the
main as directed by the Engineer for the specific circumstance and
material type identified.
Sewer access holes shall have the cover and frame, concrete ring, grade
rings and cone section removed. Inlet and outlet piping shall be plugged
with concrete, manhole void shall be filled with sand, and a 300mm (12")
thick, reinforced concrete slab shall be poured over the top of remaining
manhole. The Contractor shall backfill hole to ground surface with
compacted select fill. I
loval by excavation:
Existing pipe and appurtenances shall be removed from the ground as
indicated on the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer.
Contractor shall provide measures that allow for the removal of existing
sewer mains and appurtenances with no leakage of raw sewage.
Transportation of sewer mains and appurtenances removed from service
shall be in waterproof trucks to prevent raw sewage from leaking on
public streets.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 15000-1 4
3. Removal of asbestos-cement pipe (ACP) and sewer mains and
appurtenances shall be in accordance with all applicable State and
Federal requirements. Legal disposal is the responsibility of the
Contractor. Obtain approval from the agency having disposal jurisdiction
with respect to disposal sites.
4. Backfill, compaction, and surface repair of all excavations for removal of
pipe and appurtenances shall be made in accordance with the Approved
Plans, the Standard Specifications, and the Standard Drawings.
3.12 SALVAGE
When the Contractor is required to remove existing pipe and appurtenances, or portions
thereof, from the ground, such material may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be
considered salvage. All materials identified as salvage are considered property of the
District.
A. The Contractor shall remove and temporarily stockpile all materials identified as
salvage in a safe location that will not disrupt traffic or shall deliver salvage to the
District's Field Operations Yard as directed by the District Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall legally dispose of all other materials in an appropriate
manner. Disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. Obtain concurrence from
the agency having disposal jurisdiction with respect to disposal sites and
transportation methods.
3.1 3 RECONNECTIONS
A. The Contractor may encounter unused service laterals or appurtenant piping
connected to an existing pipeline being replaced. Laterals and appurtenance
piping that will not be connected to the new pipeline shall be abandoned as
described in section 3.1 1.
B. Existing service laterals or appurtenances to be connected to new pipelines shall
be as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer in
accordance with the Standard Drawings.
END OF SECTION
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
General Piping System and Appurtenances
Contract 38891 1 5000-1 5
.- SECTION 15041
DISINFECTION OF PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes requirements for disinfection by chlorination of potable and
recycled water mains, services, pipe appurtenances and connections.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
8300 Standard for Hypochlorites
8301 Standard for Liquid Chlorine
C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Specifications 15000,15044,15056,15057,15061, and 15064
1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A. All water mains and appurtenances taken out of service for inspection, repairs, or
other activity that might lead to contamination shall be disinfected before they are
returned to service.'
All new water mains and temporary high lines shall be disinfected prior to
connection to the District's existing system.
B.
C. All components incorporated into a connection to the District's existing system
shall be disinfected prior to installation.
1.5 SUBMllTALS
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. A written disinfection and dechlorination plan signed by a certified chlorinator
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to starting
disinfection or dechlorination operations. Plan for disinfection method and
procedure shall include equipment used to inject the chlorine solution, gauges or
scales to measure the rate at which chlorine is injected, qualifications of
personnel, testing location and schedule, source of water and water disposal
locations. Personnel performing the disinfection shall demonstrate a minimum of
five years experience in the chlorination and dechlorination of pipelines. -
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
15041 -1
B. Qualification of certified testing laboratory. I
C. Four copies of bacteriological test results to the Engineer upon completion of
each test.
D. Emergency Response Plan.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Chlorination and dechlorination shall be performed by competent individuals
knowledgeable and experienced in the operation of the necessary application and safety
equipment in accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local laws and regulations.
The transport, storage and handling of these materials shall be performed in accordance
with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 191 0.1 20 Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response, CFR 49.1 72 Hazardous Materials Regulations, and the General
Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194.
1.7 CONCURRENT DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING
The specified disinfection of the pipelines may be performed concurrently with the
hydrostatic testing in accordance with Section 15044. In the event repairs are necessary,
as indicated by the hydrostatic test, additional disinfection may be required by the
Engineer in accordance with this specification.
1.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Prior to connection to existing mains, disinfection and bacteriological testing shall be
performed in accordance with this specification, and hydrostatic testing shall be
performed per Section 15044. A District Connection Permit is required authorizing
connection to an existing system and shall be given only on the basis of acceptable
hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results. Connection to existing mains
shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 CHLORINE (GAS)
A. Liquid chlorine contains 1 OO-percent available chlorine and is packaged in steel
containers in net weights of 68.1kg (150 Ib.) or 907.2kg (1 ton).
B. Liquid chlorine shall be used with appropriate gas flow chlorinators, heaters, and
injectors to provide a controlled, high-concentration solution feed to the water.
The chlorinators and injectors shall be the vacuum-operated type.
2.2 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (LIQUID)
Sodium hypochlorite is available in liquid form in glass or plastic containers, ranging in
size from 0.95 L (1 Qt.) to 18.93 L (5 Gal.). The solution contains approximately 10% to
15% available chlorine.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
1 5041 -2
2.3 TABLET OR GRANULAR HYPOCHLORITE -
Tablet or granular hypochlorite may be used if a solution container is utilized to provide a
continuous feed method.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Disinfection of pipelines shall not proceed until all appurtenances and any
necessary sample ports have been installed and the Engineer provides
authorization.
B. Every effort shall be made to keep the water main and its appurtenances clean
and dry during the installation process.
All piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances which become contaminated during
installation shall be cleaned, rinsed with potable water, and then sprayed or
swabbed with a 5 percent sodium hypochlorite disinfecting solution prior to
installation.
C.
D. Water mains under construction that become flooded by storm water, runoff, or
groundwater shall be cleaned by draining and flushing with metered potable
water until clear water is evident. Upon completion, the entire main shall be
disinfected using a method approved by the Engineer.
3.2 METHODS
A. Chlorine (Gas)
1.
2.
Only vacuum-operated equipment shall be used. Direct-feed chlorinators,
which operate solely from gas pressure in the chlorine cylinder, shall not
be permitted. The equipment shall incorporate a backflow prevention
device at the point of connection to the potable water source used to fill
the line being tested.
The chlorinating agent shall be applied at the beginning of the system to
be chlorinated and shall be injected through a corporation stop, a
hydrant, or other approved connection to ensure treatment of the entire
system being disinfected.
3. Only a certified, licensed chlorination and testing contractor shall perform
gas chlorination work. The chlorination contractor must also possess a
Grade II Treatment Plant Operator Certification from the State of
California.
.-
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
15041-3
B. Sodium Hypochlorite Solution (Liquid)
1. Sodium hypochlorite solution shall be used for cleaning and swabbing
piping and appurtenances immediately prior to installation and for
disinfecting all components of connections to the District's existing
system.
2. Sodium hypochlorite solution may be used for the initial disinfection of
newly installed water mains. The solution shall be applied at a terminus
of the system to be chlorinated using an injector which can adjust the
amount of solution being injected into the piping system. The solution
shall be injected in the appropriate concentration to achieve the specified
concentration range of chlorine throughout the entire piping system.
Where pumping equipment is used in conjunction with an injector, an integral backflow prevention device shall be used and connected to the potable water supply.
3. Water trucks, pumping equipment, piping, appurtenances and all other equipment in contact with potable water shall be disinfected prior to use.
4. Sodium hypochlorite solution may also be used to increase the total
chlorine residual if the concentration from the initial chlorination of the
system is found to be low. The solution shall be added to the system in
sufficient amounts at appropriate locations to ensure that the disinfecting
solution is present at a concentration within the specified range
throughout the piping system.
3.3 PROCEDURE FOR DISINFECTING WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
A. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 1,135 liters per minute (300 GPM) or a velocity of 0.3m per second (1 foot per second), whichever is less.
B. Disinfection shall result in a total chlorine concentration of not less than 25-mgA. This concentration shall be evenly distributed throughout the system to be disinfected, using a continuous feed method of chlorination.
All valves shall be operated with the disinfection solution present in the pipeline.
All appurtenances such as air-vacuum relief valves, blowoff s, hydrants, backflow prevention devices, and water service laterals shall be flushed with the treated
water a sufficient length of time to ensure a chlorine concentration within the
specified range in all components of each appurtenance. (Note the limitations for
discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.)
C.
D. The Engineer will verify the presence of the disinfection solution throughout the system by sampling and testing for acceptable chlorine concentrations at the various appurtenances and/or at the test ports provided by the Contractor. Areas of the system found to be below the specified chlorine concentration level shall receive additional flushing as noted above and/or additional disinfection solution as necessary. (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.) Addition of disinfection solution after the initial charging of the line shall be made by either the liquid chlorine (gas) method, or the sodium hypochlorite method as directed by the Engineer.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
15041 -4
E. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
The District Engineer will test the total chlorine residual. The system shall contain
a total chlorine residual of not less than 80% of the initial total chlorine residual
before the 24-hour soaking period began. If the total chlorine residual has
decreased more than 20%, the system shall be soaked for an additional 24-hour
period. If the total chlorine residual has not deceased after this additional 24-hour
period, the system shall be flushed in accordance with the procedure detailed
herein. If the total chlorine residual has decreased, the system shall be flushed in
accordance with the procedure detailed herein, and shall be re-disinfected.
F. Following a successful retention period as determined by the District Engineer,
the chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system at its extremities and at
each appurtenance, using potable water from a source designated by the District
Engineer. The minimum water velocity during flushing shall be 0.9 meters per
second (3 feet per second) or as directed by the Engineer. Flushing shall
continue until the replacement water in the new system is equal in chlorine
residual to the potable source of supply as verified by the District. (Note the
limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.)
G. The Contractor shall contract with a State certified sampling laboratory to perform
sampling, transport samples and perform bacteriological sampling and testing as
specified herein.
3.4 DISCHARGE OF CHLORINATED WATER
I A. Indiscriminate onsite disposal or discharge to sewer systems, storm drains,
drainage courses or surface waters of chlorinated water is prohibited.
B. All discharge of chlorinated water shall require the neutralizing of the chlorine
residual by means of a reducing agent in accord with AWWA C651 and the
requirements of this specification.
C. The reducing agent shall be applied to the water as it exits the piping system.
The Contractor shall monitor the chlorine residual during the discharge
operations. Total residual chlorine limits in these locations, and for the discharge
of chlorinated water from the testing of pipelines to surface waters of the San
Diego Region are as follows:
Total Residual Chlorine Effluent Limitations
30-Day Average - 0.002mgA
Average Daily Maximum - 0.008 mg/l
Instantaneous Maximum - 0.02 mg/l
The various methods of dechlorination available can remove residual chlorine to
concentrations below standard analytical methods of detection, 0.02 mg/l, which
will assure compliance with the effluent limit. The Developer will perform all
necessary tests and keep records to ensure that the total residual chlorine
effluent limitations listed above are met.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
1 5041 -5
D. In locations where no hazard to the environment is evident based on the joint
examination described above, the chlorinated water may be broadcast for dust
control on the surface of the immediate site. Care shall be exercised in
broadcasting the water to prevent runoff.
3.5 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
The Contractor shall employ a State certified laboratory to perform bacteriological
sampling and testing of all new system installations. The testing methodology employed
by the District shall be as set forth in "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
and Waste Water" (current edition). Testing requirements are as set forth in the
California Domestic Water Quality and Monitoring Regulations and commensurate with
current requirements for surface water testing. The testing laboratory will analyze the
samples for the presence of coliform bacteria and heterotrophic-type bacteria
(heterotrophic plate count). The evaluation criteria employed by the District for a passing
test sample is as follows:
A. Coliform bacteria: no positive sample, and
B. Heterotrophic plate count (HPC): 500 colony forming units/ml or less.
3.06 REDISINFECTION
If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the
pipeline system shall be re-flushed and re-sampled. If the second set of samples does
not produce satisfactory results, the pipeline system shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and
re-stamped. The chlorination, flushing, and sampling procedure shall continue until
satisfactory results- are obtained. Re-disinfection and retesting shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.07 DISINFECTING TIE-INS AND CONNECTIONS
Pipes, fittings, valves and all other components incorporated into connections with the
District's existing system shall be spray disinfected or swabbed with a liquid chlorine
solution in accordance with AWWA C651 and as specified herein. Upon connection to
the main, the line shall be flushed as directed by the District Engineer. Disinfection by
this method is generally limited to assemblies of 6m (20') or less in length.
Alternate methods such as "predisinfection" prior to installation in accordance with
AWWA C651 may be required at the discretion of the District Engineer.
END OF SECTION
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Disinfection of Piping
1 5041 -6
SECTION 15044
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .I DESCRIPTION
This section describes the requirements and procedures for pressure and leakage
testing of all pressure mains.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 15000, 15041, 15056,15057,15061, and 15064
1.3 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO TESTING
A. Provide testing procedure submittal including testing pressure, testing schedule,
test bulkhead locations, and water supply details.
B. All piping, valves, fire hydrants, services, and related appurtenances shall be
installed prior to testing.
C. The pipe trench shall have trench zone backfill placed and compacted with a minimum of 0.76m (2.5') of material over the pipe.
D. All concrete anchor blocks shall be allowed to cure a sufficient time to develop a
minimum strength of 13.79 MPa (2,000 psi) before testing.
E. Pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping shall be conducted only after
the entire piping system has been installed and attached to pipe supports,
hangers or anchors as shown on the Approved Plans.
F. Steel pipelines shall not be tested before the mortar lining and coating on all pipe
lengths within the line have been in place for a minimum of fourteen (14) days.
Cement-mortar lined pipe shall not be filled with water until a minimum of eight
hours has elapsed aftei the last joint has been mortared.
1.4 CONCURRENT HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES
Hydrostatic testing of pipelines shall be performed prior to or concurrently with the
disinfection operations in accordance with Section 15041. In ,the event repairs are
necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test, the District may require additional
disinfection in accordance with Section 15041.
January 2004 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15044-1
1.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Hydrostatic testing shall be performed prior to connections to existing mains. A
District Connection Permit authorizing connection to the existing system shall be given
only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results.
Connection to existing mains shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 WATER
A. Potable water sha
mains.
be used for hydrostatic testing 0, potable and recycled water
B. Potable water shall be supplied by a District-approved source. Make-up water for
testing shall also be potable water.
C. A chlorinated water solution, in accordance with Section 15041, shall be used to
charge the line and for make-up water when hydrostatic testing and disinfection
operations are combined.
D. Meet all applicable state and local requirements for disposal of testing water.
2.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Testing water shall be supplied through a metered connection equipped with a
backflow prevention device in accordance with Section 151 12 at the point of
connection to the potable water source used.
B. The Contractor shall provide any temporary piping needed to deliver potable
water to the piping that is to be tested. Temporary piping shall be in accordance
with Section 15000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ' GENERAL
A. All water systems shall be pre-tested to insure passage of test prior to scheduling
official test with inspector.
The Contractor shall provide the District with a minimum of 48 hours' notice prior
to the requested date and time for hydrostatic tests.
B.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for testing.
D. Temporary blocking during the tests will be permitted only at temporary plugs,
caps or where otherwise directed by the District.
January 2004 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15044-2
E. All valves and appurtenances shall be operated during the test period. The test
shall be conducted with valves in the open position. The Contractor is not
permitted to operate any valves on the District’s system.
F. At the onset of testing, all valves, air vacuum assemblies, blowoffs, and services
shall be monitored for possible leakage and repairs made, if necessary, before
the test proceeds. The appurtenances shall be monitored through the duration of
the testing.
G. For pipe with porous lining, such as cement mortar, the pipe shall be filled with
water and placed under a slight pressure for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours
prior to the actual hydrostatic test.
H. Testing shall be made before connecting the new line with the existing District
pipes and mains.
I. The pipeline should be filled at a rate such that the velocity of flow is less than 1
fps.
J. Maximum length of pipe to be included in any one (1) test shall not exceed 2,500
linear feet or a vertical elevation difference of 58 feet.
3.2 FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
A. Before applying the specified test pressure, care shall be taken to release all air
within the pipe and appurtenances to be tested. Air shall be released through
services, fire hydrants, air release valves, or other approved locations.
8. The leakage shall be considered as the total amount of water pumped into the
pipeline during the test period.
C. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump.
D. Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it
falls an amount of 5 psi:
Pipe Diameter
18 and less 4
20 to 36 8
Greater than 36 24
(inches) - Hours
January 2004 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15044-3
E. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water
added to maintain the pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage
in the piping system., The allowable leakage for various sizes of PVC and DIP
with rubber gaskets are shown in the following table:
TYPE OF PIPE:
CLASSES: 150 & 200
P.V.C. & D.I.P.
Pipe Sizes
(inches)
6”
8”
10”
12”
14”
16”
1 8”
Allowable Leakage
Gals/4 hrdl000’ of pipe
.50 Gals
-66 Gals
.83 Gals.
.99 Gals.
1 .I 6 Gals.
1.32 Gals.
1.53 Gals.
F.
G.
The allowable leakage for welded steel pipe shall be zero gallons.
The allowable leakage for piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including
solvent welded) joints shall be zero gallons.
H. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in
the above criteria.
3.3 TEST PRESSURE
Pipe sizes in excess of 16” diameter shall be tested at a pressure based on hydraulic
gradient elevation (H.G.L) as shown on the drawings. If no test H.G.L. is shown, the
pipeline at the low point in test section shall be pumped to a hydrostatic test pressure of
75 p.s.i. in excess of the working pressure. Pressure shall be maintained for a duration
shown in section 3.2 and shall be repumped when it falls an amount of 5 p.s.i.
The test pump gauge and meter shall be connected to the water main at a location other
than the highest point in the line, in order to allow release of air from the high point.
Means shall be provided for accurately measuring the quantity of water pumped through
a meter and pumped into the pipe immediately, during and after the test period in order to
maintain or restore the initial test pressure. All pipe, fittings, valves, services and
appurtenances shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test and irrespective of the measured
quantity of leakage, all detectable leaks shall be repaired by the Contractor at the
contractor’s expense and no cost to Carlsbad Municipal Water district.
If a tested system is damaged or a leak occurs after official test the entire system or
portion of system will be retested as directed by Inspector.
END OF SECTION
January 2004 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15044-4
SECTION 15056
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FImNGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
This section includes materials and installation of ductile-iron pipe and fittings for potable
water systems.
1.02 Reference Standards
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
ANSI 616.42 Ductile iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings, classes 150 and 300.
ASTM A536 Specification for ductile iron castings.
AWWA C104 Cement mortar lining for ductile iron pipe and fittings for water
AWWA C105 Polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe systems
AWWA C1 1 1 Rubber-gasket joints for ductile iron pipe
AWWA C600 Installation of ductile iron water mains and their appurtenances
1.03 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 0991 0, 15000,15044,15061,15064,151 08, and 151 12
1.04 Service Application
Ductile-iron pipe shall be used only in specific areas, locations, and uses allowed by the
District.
1.05 Design Requirements
A. General
1. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured per AWWA C110,
C111, C115, C150, C151 , and C153. Gray-iron and cast-iron fittings or
flanges shall not be used.
2. Ductile-iron fittings manufactured per AWWA C153 shall be installed on
mains 300mm (1 2") and smaller only.
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-1
3. Joints for ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be mechanical, flanged, or -
push-on in accordance with AWWA C1 IO, C111 , and C153.
Except as amended herein, or otherwise shown on the Approved Plans,
joints for ductile-iron pipe and ductile-iron fittings shall have a pressure
rating equal to or greater than the adjacent piping.
4.
5. Joints in buried piping may be of the push-on, flanged or mechanical-joint
type per AWWA C111 except where particularly specified on the
Approved Drawings.
6. Joints that are aboveground, within structures, or submerged shall be
flanged unless otherwise shown on the Approved Plans.
8. Unless otherwise specified, ductile-iron flanges shall be in accordance with
AWWA C115, rated at a working pressure of 1,724 KPa (250 psi). Where
required in order to connect to the flanges of 1,724 KPa (250 psi) butterfly valves,
or as otherwise shown on the approved plans, ductile-iron flanges shall be
compatible with AWWA C207, Class "F".
Maximum working pressure of flanges shall be as specified in AWWA or
ASMUANSI. Flanges shall be integrally cast per AWWA C110 or shop-threaded
per AWWA C115. Flanges shall be solid. Hollow-back flanges are not permitted.
Gray-iron or cast-iron flanges are not permitted. Threading of flanges in the field
is not permitted. -
Where threaded flanges are used, the pipe or spool piece to which they are
connected will be hydrostatically tested in the presence of the Engineer prior to
installation. The pipe section or spool piece shall be hydrostatically tested for 15
minutes at the pressure rating of the flanges. No leaks shall be permitted.
C. Plain ends shall conform to the requirement of AWWA C151 and to the
dimensions included within AWWA C110 to accept a mechanical joint, push-on
joint, flanged coupling adaptor, flexible coupling, or grooved coupling. Refer to
Section 15000 for coupling descriptions.
D. The exterior surfaces of all pipe and fittings shall be factory coated with a
minimum one-(1) mil thick petroleum asphaltic material per AWWA C110 and
C151.
E. All pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA
(2104, using the double thickness requirements indicated in said standard. Type
II or Type V Portland cement per ASTM C 150 shall be used.
1.06 Quality Assurance
A. The manufacturer of each shipment of pipe shall be required to supply a
statement certifying that each lot or load of pipe and fittings has been subjected
to and met the tests specified for ductile-iron pipe and fittings per AWWA C110,
C111, C115, C150, C151 , and C153, as applicable. I
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-2
8. All pipe shall have a home mark on the spigot end to indicate proper penetration
when the joint is made.
C. Ductile-iron pipe shall bear indelible identification markings as required by
AWWA C151.
1.07 Submittals
The following items shall be submitted and reviewed by the District prior to shipping of
ductile-iron pipe and fittings:
A. An affidavit of compliance with AWWA (2104, C110, C111 , C115, (2150, C151,
C153, and the requirements of this specification.
B. Typical joint details.
C.
D.
Typical details and description of lining and coating.
Calculations supporting selected wall thickness.
E. Calculations demonstrating that each proposed restrained joint arrangement can
resist the applied forces.
F. Cathodic protection materials.
1.08 Delivery, Storage, and Handling -
Delivery, storage, and handling of ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall follow the
recommendations of AWWA C600 and as specified herein:
A. Handling of pipe shall be performed with lifts, cranes, or other suitable equipment
and devices. Slings, hooks, or pipe tongs shall be padded and used in such a
manner as to prevent damage to the pipe, linings, and coatings. The pipes shall
not be dropped or dragged.
B. During transport, the pipe shall be supported and secured against movement
using padded devices in such a manner to prevent damage.
C. Stored pipe shall be protected from damage and kept free from dirt and foreign
materials by closing the ends of the pipe. Other pipeline materials shall be
protected by appropriate packaging or wrapping. Gaskets shall be stored in a
cool location out of direct sunlight. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be handled and
stored in a dry location in a manner that will ensure proper use with respect to
types and sizes.
Pipe laid out for installation shall be placed on earth berms or timber cradles
adjacent to the trench in the numerical order of installation.
D.
E. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and fittings in good condition until the pipe is
ready to be installed in the trench. Periodically open the plastic end caps and
spray clean potable water inside the pipe for moisture control.
I
September 2004 Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15056-3
F. Under no circumstances shall ropes or other devices be attached through the
fitting's interior for handling.
1.09 Recycled Water Identification
Ductile-iron pipe and fittings for recycled water shall be identified with purple-colored
coating, purple polyethylene sleeves, identification labels or signs in accordance with
Section 151 51.
1.1 0 Polyethylene Encasement
Polyethylene encasement shall be installed for buried ductile-iron pipe and fittings in
accordance with Section 15000.
1.11 Tracer Wire
Tracer wire shall be installed for ductile-iron pipe and fittings in accordance with Section
15000.
1.12 Warningndentification Tape
Warning/ldentification tape shall be installed for ductile-iron pipe and fittings in
accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 Ductile-Iron
Ductile-iron pipe and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List in accord with the Standard Drawings.
2.02 Gaskets
A. Mechanical joint rubber gasket configuration and materials shall comply with
AWWA C1 1 1 , and according to the applicable joint type and pressure rating of the
piping system.
B. Flange gaskets shall be 3.2mm (1/8") thick acrylic or aramid fibers bound with
nitrile for all sizes of pipe. Gaskets shall be full-face type with pre-punched holes.
Ring gaskets extending to the inner edge of the bolt circumference may be used
only upon approval of the District Engineer.
C. Push-on joint rubber gaskets shall be per AWWA C1 1 1 .
D. If organic solvents or petroleum products are encountered during the course of
the work, alternate gasket materials or joint treatment may be required by the
Engineer.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-4
2.09 Bolts and Nuts for Flanges -
Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List.
2.1 0 WarningAdentification Tape
Waming/ldentification tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and
selected from the Approved Materials List.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, including worker break
times, ends of the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or plug.
Do not permit trench water to enter the pipe. Do not place tools, clothing, or other
materials in the pipe. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe in a sanitary
condition free from foreign materials.
3.02 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
Trenching, backfilling and compacting shall be performed in accordance with SSPWC.
3.03 Dewatering
I
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction ample means
and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from any source entering trench
excavations or other parts of the work. Any damage caused by flooding of the trench
shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will maintain a dry excavation,
preservation of the final lines and grades and protection of all utilities. If flooding of the
trench does occur, the Contractor shall immediately dewater and restore the trench.
Damaged or altered pipeline appurtenances or trench materials shall be repaired or
replaced as directed by the Engineer.
3.04 Pipe Installation
When the work requires and the size of the pipe allows entry of personnel into the pipe,
the Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State regulations for confined space
entry. Work inside pipelines shall not be undertaken until all the tests and safety
provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations 191 0.1 46, and the General Industry Safety
Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5159 for confined space
entry have been performed and the area is verified as safe to enter.
September 2004
' Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
Contract 38891 15056-5
The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, specials, fittings, closure pieces, valves,
supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other appurtenances as shown
on the Approved Plans and as required to provide a complete and workable installation.
Install pipe in the trench as follows:
A. Inspect each pipe and fitting before lowering the pipe or fitting into the trench.
Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings. Patch damaged areas in the
field with material recommended by the protective coating manufacturer.
Thoroughly clean the ends of the pipe. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside
of the pipe and keep pipe clean during and after installation.
B. Install pipe according to the manufacturer's approved order of installation. Install
pipes uphill if the grade exceeds 10%. Lower the pipe onto the bedding at the
proper lines and grades.
C. The manufacturer's printed installation guide outlining the radius of curvature that
can be negotiated with pipe sections of various lengths shall be followed, except they shall not exceed the deflections allowed in AWWA C600 according to joint
type. Combined deflections at rubber gasket or flexible coupling joints shall not
exceed that recommended by the manufacturer.
D. The pipe shall have firm bearing along its full length, and bell holes shall be
provided at each joint to permit visual inspection of the joint and prevent the pipe
from being supported by the bell end or coupling.
E. Pipe Assembly
1. Push-On Type: Assemble the pipe joint using a lubricant selected from the
Approved Materials List. Insert the spigot end into the bell or coupling to
the proper insertion mark. Check that the elastomeric ring has not left the
groove during assembly by passing a feeler gauge around the completed
joint. Drive spigot ends of the pipe into bell ends in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Stabbing shall not be permitted.
2. Mechanical Joint Type: Assembly of mechanical joint fittings shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations regarding
installation.
F. During installation operations, do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in
the pipe.
G. When pipe installation is not in progress, including worker break times, ends of
the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or plug. Do not
permit trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe.
3.05 Polyethylene Encasement
Polyethylene encasement shall be used for the buried installation of ductile iron pipe and
fittings and shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-6
- 3.06 Flanged Pipe and Fittings
Flanged connections shall be installed where indicated on the Approved Drawings.
A. Bolt holes shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines.
B. The bolts, nuts and flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brush prior
to assembly.
C. Bolts and nuts shall be lubricated with a District-approved anti-seize compound.
D. Nuts shall be tightened in an alternating "star" pattern to the manufacturer's
recommended toque.
E. Coat the exterior of exposed flanges, bolts and nuts located aboveground or
within vaults in accordance with Section 0991 0.
3.07 Mechanical Joint Connections
A. Install mechanical joint connections per AWWA C600 and the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Prior to installation of the mechanical joint, clean the socket and plain end of the
pipe. Lubricate both the gasket and plain end of the pipe with an approved
lubricant per AWA C111 immediately prior to slipping the gasket onto the plain
end of the pipe.
C. Tighten the bolts to the normal range of bolt toque per the manufacturer's
recommendations and AWWA C600k, Table 3, as follows:
PiDe Diameter Bolt Size Ranue of Toruue
75 mm (3") 16 mm (5/8") 61 -81 N-M (45-60 ft.-lb.)
100-600 mm (4-24") 19 mm (3/4") 102-1 22 N-M (75-90 ft.-lb.)
750-900 mm (30-36") 25 mm (1") 136-163 N-M (100-120 ft.-lb.)
3.08 Crosses
A. Each flanged ductile-iron cross shall be installed with flanged ductile-iron pipe
spools between the cross and the valves. The spools are included to position the
valves a sufficient distance from the cross to allow installation of the thrust blocks
without conflicting with the valve actuators.
The spools shall be 450mm (1 8") long for pipe sizes 200mm (8") through 300mm
(IZ"), and 600mm (24") long for pipe sizes 400mm (16") and larger.
6.
C. The spools shall be equal in class to the adjacent pipe.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-7
3.09 Joint Bonding and Cathodic Protection
Bonding of joints to provide continuity, flange insulation kits, internal epoxy linings, and
other cathodic protection items and materials shall be installed where shown on the
Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings and Section 131 IO.
3.1 0 Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe
Mechanical type flexible joints shall be installed where shown on the Approved
Drawings. Grooved couplings shall be used in vaults and above ground. Flexible
couplings may be used, where indicated on the drawings, below ground, but may also
be used above ground with restrained joints. Flanged coupling adapters shall be used
for buried pipelines, where allowed by the District.
A. Grooved joint couplings shall be installed per AWWA C606 and as indicated in
Section 15000.
B. Flanged coupling adapters, where allowed by the District, shall be installed per
the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Flexible couplings shall be installed per Section 15000 and the manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. All couplings for ductile-iron pipe shall be shop-coated in accordance with
Section 15000.
3.1 1 Concrete
Concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with SSPWC and the
Standards Drawings.
3.12 WarningAdentification Tape
WarningAdentification tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the
Standard Drawings.
3.1 3 Disinfection and Bacteriological Testing
Disinfection, bacferiological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with
Section 15041.
3.14 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044.
END OF SECTION
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
15056-8
SECTION 15057
COPPER TUBING, BRASS AND BRONZE PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4 -
1.5
1.6
DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and installation of copper tubing, brass and bronze pipe
fittings and appurtenances.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe treads, general purpose
ANSI B16.18 Case copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 0991 0, 15000, 15041,15044,15056,15061 and 1 5064
SERVICE LATERAL WET TAP CONNECTIONS
All wet tap connections to existing pipelines shall be performed in accordance with
Specification 15000, Section 1.7.
RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION
Copper Tubing, Brass, and Bronze Pipe Fittings for recycled water shall be identified with
purple polyethylene sleeve, identification labels or signs in accordance with Section
15151.
WARNlNG/IDENTlFlCATION TAPE
Warning/ldentification Tape shall be used for all copper tubing, except that which is bored
or jacked, in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 COPPER TUBING
Copper tubing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 Type K or ASTM B 88 M
(Metric) Type A seamless copper water tube. Copper tubing up to 25mm (1”) diameter
shall be soft; 50mm (2”) may be soft or rigid. Components shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings.
January 2004 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15057-1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
BRASS PIPE, NIPPLES, AND FllTlNGS
Threaded nipples, brass pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM B43, regular wall
thickness. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. Fittings shall be flared or silver
soldered per the CMWD standard drawings.
BRONZE APPURTENANCES
A. Corporation stops, curb stops, meter and angle meter stops, meter flange
adapters, and bronze-bodied service saddles shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings.
B. Fittings shall be flared type or silver soldered.
C. All items specified herein shall be manufactured of bronze conforming to ASTM B
62.
D. Service saddles shall be the double strap type. Service saddles shall be used on
all service and appurtenance connections on PVC piping. For piping materials
other than PVC, service and appurtenance connections shall be performed in
accordance with the Approved Drawings.
BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Specification 1'5000 and the Approved Materials List. I
WARNlNGhDENTlFICATlON TAPE
WarningAdentification Tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and
shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Trenching, bedding, backfilling and compacting shall be performed in accordance
with CMWD Rules and Regulations and the Standard Drawings. Provide a
minimum cover of 760mm (30") below finished street grade. I
B. Cut tubing true and square and remove burrs.
C. Bends in soft copper tubing shall be long sweep. Shape bends with shaping
tools. Form bends without flattening, buckling, or thinning the tubing wall at any point. I
D. Assemble copper tubing and fittings per the manufacturer's recommendation in
accordance with the Standard Drawings.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings
15057-2 Contract 38891
3.2
E. Install warninghdentification tape in accordance with Section 15000 and the
Standard Drawings.
F. AI1 fittings shall be soldered or flared, as shown on the Approved Plans and
Standard Drawings.
SERVICE SADDLES
A. Service saddles shall be located a minimum of 600mm (24”) from any pipe joint
or fittings.
B. Service saddles for connections shall be located a minimum of 600mm (24“) from
other saddles. Additionally, multiple service saddles for connections that are
installed on the same side of a single pipe length shall be alternately staggered
between 100 and 300 to prevent a weak plane in the pipe.
C. The surface of the pipe shall be clean and all loose material shall be removed to
provide a hard, clean surface.
The service saddle shall be tightened in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations to ensure a tight seal, using care to prevent damage or
distortion of the service saddle or corporation stop due to over-tightening.
D.
E. The tap into the pipe shall be made m accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
recommendation. Tapping tools and shell cutters with internal teeth or double
slots that will retain the coupon shall be used.
3.3 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with
Section 15041.
3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044.
END OF SECTION
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings Contract 38891 . 15057-3
SECTION 15061
CEMENT-MORTAR LINED AND COATED STEEL PIPE AND SPECIALS
PART I GENERAL
I .I
1.2
I .3
1.4
I .5
DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, design, fabrication, and installation of cement-mortar
lined and coated steel pipe and specials.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
AWWA C200
AWWA C205
AWWA C206
AWWA (2207
AWWA C208
AWWA C209
AWWA C210
AWWA C213
AWS
ASME
AWWA C214
Steel Water Pipe 6-Inches and Larger
Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating
Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
Steel Pipe Flanges
Dimensions for Fabricated Fittings
Cold Applied Tape Coating for the Exterior of Special Sections,
Connection and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
Coal-Tar Epoxy Coating System for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines
Standard Qualification Procedure for Manual Welding Operators
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Tape Coatings Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipeline
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 02223, 09900, 131 IO, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15074,
15100, 15102, 15108, 151 12 and 15300.
SERVICE APPLICATION
Cernent-mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials shall be used only for specific
purposes as shown on the Approved Plans. Generally, cernent-mortar lined and coated
steel pipe shall be used for transmission mains of 24 or larger.
SPECIALS
A special is defined as any piece of pipe other than a normal full length of straight pipe.
This includes, but is not limited to, elbows, short pieces, reducers, tees, crosses, spools,
sections with outlets, beveled sections and access holes.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061-1
1.6
1.7
I .8
SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 2-5.3, Submittals
Shop Drawing. Submittals are required for the following:
A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts
of, but not limited to, the following:
Shop Drawings Fabrication Details
Layout Schedule Dimensional Checks
Manufacturer's tests Protective Coatings
Mill Reports or Plant Test Reports Welding Rods for Field Welding
Shop Drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to manufacture of pipe. The
layout schedule shall indicate the order of' installation, the length and location of
each pipe section and special, the station and elevation of the pipe invert at all
changes in grade, and all data on curves and bends for both horizontal and vertical
alignment.
B. Submit data used by the Contractor in manufacture and quality control.
C. Test reports showing the physical properties of the rubber used in the gaskets shall
be submitted.
PAYMENT
A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or
unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.
B. Payment by the linear foot shall be for each diameter and for each pipe strength
designation measured horizontally over the pipe centerline.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall be inspected at the supplier's
manufacturing plant by the District Engineer. Developer shall be responsible for
District Engineer's expenses, including travel, time, meals and overnight
accommodations. Overnight accommodations and air travel may be required,
at the discretion of the Engineer, if the manufacturing plant is more than
100 miles from the District Engineer's office.
B. In addition to the shop hydrostatic testing performed on pipe cylinders required
per AWWA C200, all welds of specials and attachments (i.e., joint rings and
nozzles) shall be tested by a dye-penetrant process. Certification of such testing
shall be submitted to the District.
C. Field welders shall be certified under Section IX, Part A of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code or in accordance with AWWA C206, Section 3. Welders
shall present a copy of their certification to the District prior to performing any
field welding. Certifications shall be dated within three (3) years of the job to be
performed.
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15061 -2
D. Plainly mark each length of straight pipe and each special at the bell end to
identify the proper location of the pipe item by reference to the layout schedule.
E. The top of all pipe and specials shall be clearly identified by marking the top with
"T.O.P." for easy identification in the field.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery, storage, and handling of the pipe and specials shall be as follows:
A. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled and shall be protected against
damage to linings and coatings due to impact shocks. Pipe shall not be placed
directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the
pipe against injury whenever stored at the site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be
handled and stored per these requirements and in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Temporary internal bracing shall be installed in all pipe 600mm (24") and larger
prior to shipment to the job site. Temporary internal bracing shall be 1OOmm x
IOOmm (4" x 4") wooden struts installed in both the horizontal and vertical
directions. Each set of struts shall be nailed together as a unit. Wooden wedges
may be used to maintain the proper tight fit of the internal bracing. The bracing
shall be located 300mm (12") in from each end of the pipe section for all pipe,
and additionally at the mid-point for piping 800mm (30) and larger. Maintain
internal bracing as specified under Pipe Installation.
C. Transport pipe to the job site on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps or
padded bonding to protect the pipe.
D. Pipes and specials shall only be handled with appropriate spreader bars and
wide nylon slings. Chains or wire rope slings shall not be used. Under no
circumstances shall pipe or specials be pushed or dragged along the ground.
All pipe sections over 6m (20') in length shall be lifted at the quarter points from
each end.
E. Store pipe on earth berms or timber cradles adjacent to the trench in the
numerical order of installation. Place the supports at about one-quarter point from
the pipe ends.
F. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and specials in good condition until the pipe
is ready to be installed in the trench. Periodically open the plastic end caps and
spray potable water inside the pipe for moisture control.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 PIPE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
- Pipe lining and coating shall be the product of one company in the business of designing
and manufacturing cement-mortar lined, tape wrapped and mortar coated steel pipe.
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15061 -3
2.2
2.3
2.4
- Use of subcontractors or subcontracts to apply the lining and coating of the steel pipe is
not allowed.
The pipe shall consist of the following components:
A welded steel cylinder with joints formed integrally with the steel cylinder or with steel
joint rings welded to the ends; A centrifugally-cast cement-mortar lining; A self-centering
bell and spigot joint with a circular preformed elastomeric gasket, so designed that the
joint will be watertight under all conditions of service; Tape wrapping of the cylinder over
a dielectric coating; A dense, concentric, steel reinforced exterior cement-mortar
coating.
The Plans indicate the elevations and alignment of the pipeline, the nominal inside diameter of the lined pipe, and the minimum steel cylinder thickness or design pressure
(adjusted to satisfy transient conditions). Design soil cover shall be as stated on the
Plans or Specifications or, if none is stated, the amount of cover shall be scaled from the
Plans.
Minimum thickness of the steel cylinder shall be as shown on the Plans or, if not shown
on the Plans, as determined by the following formula, except that steel thickness shall
not be less than 10 gauge (0.1345-inch).
t = Pd Where P = Design pressure, in psi plus 50 psi minimum
2s S = Steel stress at design pressure, i.e., 16,500 psi
t = Steel cylinder thickness, in inches
d = OD of steel cylinder, in inches
STEEL CYLINDERS
Materials used in fabricating steel cylinders shall be hot rolled carbon steel sheets
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B, ASTM A570 Grade 36 or Grade
33, or steel plates conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36. The method of testing
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A570.
Full penetration welds will be required. Welds may be straight or spiral seam. The
circumferential stress in the steel shall not exceed 16,500 psi at the design pressure.
CEMENT
Cement for mortar lining and coating shall be Portland Cement Type II and conform to
ASTM C150, unless otherwise specified. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be
used.
STEEL BAR OR WIRE REINFORCEMENT
Circumferential steel bar or wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A61 5, Grade 40,
"Specifications for Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". Wire fabric reinforcing
for cement-mortar coatings and linings of fittings shall conform to ASTM Al85,
"Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric," or ASTM A497, "Specifications for Welded
Deformed Steel Wire Fabric." Spiral-wire reinforcement for cement-mortar coatings shall
conform to ASTM A82.
Septern ber 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15061 -4
2.5 STEEL FOR JOINT RINGS
.-
Steel for bell rings shall conform to ASTM A575, "Specification for Merchant Quality Hot
Rolled Carbon Steel Bars." Steel for spigot rings shall conform to ASTM A576,
"Specification for Special Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars."
2.6 DIMENSIONS
The steel pipe sizes shown on the Plans or otherwise referred to shall be the nominal
inside diameter. Unless otherwise specified, the nominal diameter shown on the Plans
shall be considered to be the inside diameter after lining.
2.7 MANUFACTURER'S TESTS
Each steel cylinder with joint rings attached and cylinders for specials shall be
hydrostatically tested to a circumferential stress of at least 22,000 psi, but not more than
25,000 psi. If leaks develop during testing, the cylinder shall be repaired by welding and
retested until all leaks are eliminated.
The seams in short radius bends and special fittings shall be tested by the air-soap
method using air at a pressure of 5 psi or by the dye-check method. However, if the
fitting is fabricated from cylinders which have been previously hydrostatically tested, no
further test will be required on seams so tested.
Hydrostatic testing of fittings to 150% of the design pressure may replace the tests
described above. Any defects revealed by any of the alternate test methods shall be
repaired by welding and the fitting retested until all defects have been eliminated.
2.8 FABRICATION DETAILS
Each special and each length of straight pipe shall be plainly marked at the bell end to
identify the design pressure and the proper location of the pipe or special by reference to
layout schedule.
Exposed portion of joint rings shall be protected from corrosion by the manufacturer's
standard coating.
The pipe shall be fitted with devices shown on the Plans to permit continuous electrical
bonding of the various joints following field installation.
2.9 PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted or coated as specified in Section 09870 and
09900, Painting and Coating, except where other coatings are specified elsewhere and
in this section.
All steel pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C205
and C602. Linings shall be in accordance with table below.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061 -5
All steel pipe and fittings for underground service shall be cement-mortar lined, taped
wrapped and cement-mortar coated in accordance with AWWA C205, C214 and C602
and Section 09870 unless otherwise specified on the Plans.
For the following nominal inside diameters, the lining thickness and minimum
cement-mortar coating thickness shall be as follows:
LINING COATING
Nominal Pipe Size Thickness Tolerance Thickness Tolerance
(inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
4-10 I i4 - 1 132+ 1 132 112 +I18
12-18 318 -1 I1 6+ 118 518 +I18
20 - 44 1 I2 -1 I1 6+1/8 314 +I18
45 - 58 314 -l/16+1/8 1 +I18
60 and over 314 -1 I1 6+ 118 1 114 +I18
2.10 STEEL PIPE AND SPECIALS
Steel pipe and specials shall conform to the requirements of the AWWA C200 and C205,
and AWA MI 1 , except as modified herein.
A. Steel for fabricated cylinders shall conform to ASTM A 36lA 36M, ASTM A 2831 A
283M, Grade D, or ASTM A 57OlA 570M, Grade 36. Other steel grades may be
used only upon approval of the District Engineer.
B. Cement-mortar coating shall be reinforced in accordance with AWWA C205.
C. Cement mortar grout for field joints shall consist of a mixture of 1-112 to 2 parts
sand to 1 part Type II or Type V Portland Cement with enough clean, potable
water to permit packing and troweling without crumbling. The sand shall be
washed, well-graded sand such that all will pass a No. 8 sieve. The quantity of
water to be used in the preparation of grout shall be the minimum required to
produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Grout shall
attain a minimum compressive strength of 12.4 MPa (1,800 psi) in 28 days.
D. In certain circumstances, rapid-setting mortar may be required. Acceleration
admixtures may be used in the mix as permitted by the District Engineer. Calcium
chloride shall not be used in the mix.
2.11 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Paint and coating products for exterior surfaces of all pipe and appurtenances not
otherwise mortar-coated shall be in accordance with Section 09900 and the
Approved Materials List.
B. Paint and coating products for areas in contact with potable water such plain
ends of pipe, grooved and shouldered ends of pipe and exposed inside surfaces or threaded outlets and blind flanges shall be in accordance with Section 15000 .
and selected from the Approved Materials List.
-
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 5061 -6
2.12 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials
List.
2.13 GASKETS
A. Rubber-ring gaskets shall comply with AWWA C200 according to the applicable
joint type and pressure rating of the piping system.
B. Flange gaskets shall comply with AWWA C207. Flange gaskets shall be 3.1 8mm
(1/8") thick acrylic or aramid fibers bound with nitrile for all sizes of pipe. Gaskets
shall be full-face type with pre-punched holes or ring-type extending to the inner
edge of the bolt circumference of the flange.
C. In the event of encountering organic solvents or petroleum products during the
course of the work, alternate gasket materials or joint treatment will be required
as directed by the District Engineer.
2.14 CEMENT-MORTAR CURING
The pipe shall be cured by water curing, steam curing or a combination of both. Water
curing and steam curing may be used interchangeably on a time ratio basis of four hours
water curing to one hour of steam curing. Where steam curing is used, the pipe shall be
kept in steam maintained at a temperature of 100 F to 150 F for the specified period and,
where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continually moist by spraying or other
means for the specified periods. The pipe shall not be allowed to dry either on the inside
or outside surfaces during the curing period.
Where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continuously moist for seven days at
a temperature of not less than 40 F before being moved to the trench site.
Cement-mortar lining and coating of special pipe and fittings may be cured in
accordance with the above provisions or by prompt application of a white-pigmented
sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309. Sealing compound shall not be applied
at joint ends where compound will interfere with the bond of joint mortar.
2.15 SPECIAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
The manufacturer shall furnish all fittings and special pieces required for closures,
curves, bends, branches, manholes, outlets, connections for mainline valves, and other
appurtenances required by the Plans.
Special fittings shall be fabricated of welded steel sheet or plate, lined and coated with
cement-mortar of the same type as the adjoining pipe and applied as specified for lining
and coating of specials in AWWA C205 and as modified herein. Butt welding shall be
used, unless othewise indicated on the Plans. _-
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061 -7
Minimum centerline radius of an elbow or bend shall be as follows. The maximum
deflection at a mitered girth seam shall be 22-112 degrees.
Pipe Size (Inches)
30 - 48
51 -60
Over 60
Minimum Centerline Radius
2-112 times ID
1 O-feet
2 times ID
The circumferential stress in the sheet or plate shall not exceed 13,500 psi at the design
pressure. The minimum thickness of sheet or plate shall be as follows:
Fittina Diameter Range
(Inches)
18 and under
20 - 24
26 - 36
38 - 45
48 - 54
57 - 60
63 - 72
75 - 84
Minimum Thickness of Sheet or Plate
10 gauge
311 6" or 7 gauge
1 14"
511 6"
318"
711 6"
112"
518"
Outlets at special fittings shall be reinforced with collars or crotch plates. If collar
reinforcement is used, the outlet diameter shall not exceed 69% of the ID of the fitting.
The diameter of outlets reinforced with crotch plates may equal the fitting diameter.
The effective shoulder width "W of collars from the inside surface of the steel outlet to
the outside edge of the collar measured on the surface of the cylinder shall be not less
than one-third or more than one-half the ID of steel outlet. The thickness of the collar
shall be not less than "T" as determined by:
Pw x ID cvl. x ID outlet
T= 36,000 x W
where Pw is the design pressure in pounds per square inch, and all other dimensions
are in inches. Collars may be oval in shape or rectangular with well-rounded corners.
Outlets 3-inches in diameter and smaller may be installed without collars.
The design of crotch plates shall be based upon the paper by Swanson, Chapton,
Wilkinson, King, and Nelson, originally published in June 1955 issue of the Journal of the
American Water Works Association and in conformance with AWWA M-1 1.
2.16 TAPE WRAP AND MORTAR SHIELD
Tape wrap and mortar shield for concrete mortar lined steel pipe shall be in accordance
with Section 09870.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Contract 38891 15061 -8
- 2.17 HANDLING AND SHIPMENT
Pipe and special fittings shall be handled carefully, and blocking and holddowns used
during shipment shall prevent movement or shifting. Both ends of pipe and fittings on
trucks or rail cars shall be bulkheaded or covered in order to prevent excessive drying of
the interior lining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, including worker break
times, the ends of the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or
plug. Do not permit trench water to enter the pipe. Do not place tools, clothing, or other
materials in the pipe. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe in a sanitary
condition free from foreign materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
The Contractor shall provide, and maintain at all times during construction, ample means
and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from any source entering
trench excavations or other parts of the work. Any damage caused by flooding of the
trench shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor shall obtain a Discharge Permit
as required by the Regional Water Quality Control Board.
Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will maintain a dry excavation,
preservation of the final lines and grades and protection of all utilities. If flooding of the
trench does occur, the Contractor shall immediately dewater and restore the trench.
Damaged or altered pipeline appurtenances shall be repaired or replaced as directed by
the Engineer.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
When the work requires and the size of the pipe allows entry of personnel into the pipe,
the Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State regulations for confined space
entry. Work inside pipelines shall not be undertaken until all the tests and safety
provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations 1910.146, and the General Industry
Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5159 for confined
space entry have been performed and the area is verified as safe to enter. Generally,
the aforementioned safety provisions apply to pipe 600mm (24") and larger. Note that for
pipe less than 600mm (24") diameter, more stringent safety procedures apply.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, specials, fittings, closure pieces, valves,
supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other appurtenances as shown
on the Approved Plans and as required to provide a complete and workable installation.
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061-9
-
Pipe installations shall be as shown on the Approved Plans and Shop Drawings in
accordance with the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
No pipe shall be installed where the linings or coatings show cracks that may be
harmful as determined by the District Engineer. Such damaged linings and
coatings shall be repaired or new, undamaged pipe sections shall be provided.
Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to ensure that there are no
damaged portions of the pipe. The Contractor shall remove or smooth out any
burrs, gouges, weld splatter, or other small defects prior to laying the pipe.
Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly
cleaned of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be
kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and
fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the work as noted
above.
Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. No blocking will be permitted,
and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full
length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of
handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of
the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings and to permit visual
inspection of the joint. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal
trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field
connection operations and for application of coatings on field joints.
Installation Tolerances: Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and
position shown on the approved layout schedule to the proper lines and grades in
accordance with the following:
1. Each section of pipe having a nominal diameter less than 1200mm (48")
shall be laid not to vary more than 0.3 ft. horizontally or 0.1 ft. vertically
from the alignment and elevations shown on the Approved Plans.
2. Each section of pipe having nominal diameter 1200mm (48") and larger
shall be laid not to vary more than five percent (5%) of the pipe diameter
horizontally or two and one half percent (2.5%) of the pipe diameter
ve rti ca II y .
3. In addition to the horizontal and vertical tolerances above, lay the pipe so
that no high or low points occur along the pipeline other than those
shown on the approved layout schedule.
Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or
other causes, the District Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades.
Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel
adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the
deflection in the joint exceed seventy five percent (75%) of the maximum
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15061 -1 0
deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be deflected
any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the
finished joint. In all cases the joint opening, before finishing with the protective
mortar inside the pipe, shall be the controlling factor.
H. Pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a
downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until the following pipe section
has been installed to provide sufficient support to prevent movement.
I. Temporary internal pipe bracing shall be left in place in pipe sizes larger than
600mm (24") until pipe zone compaction has been completed. Bracing in pipe
smaller than 600mm (24") may be removed immediately after the pipe has been
laid into the trench. The Contractor shall employ a laboratory to monitor pipe
deflection by measuring pipe inside diameter before bracing is removed and 24
hours after struts are removed. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 3 percent in 24
hours after the bracing has been removed. After the backfill has been placed, the
struts shall be removed.
J. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation onto
which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation
of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid
unless it can be established that the trench will be backfilled prior to formation of
ice and frost.
K. Pipe and Special Protection: The openings of all pipe and specials where the
pipe and specials have been mortar-lined in the shop shall be protected with
suitable bulkheads to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized
access by persons, animals, water, or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads
shall be designed to prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe. The Contractor
shall introduce water into the pipe to keep the mortar moist where moisture has
been lost due to damaged bulkheads.
3.4 RUBBER-RING JOINTS: SHALL ONLY BE USED AS SHOWN ON PLANS
For pipe sizes smaller than 24-inches, the bell end shall be buttered with cement mortar
in a manner and quantity that will completely fill the recess between the respective
linings of the two joined sections of pipe. The spigot end shall then be entered into the
bell end of the adjacent pipe section the distance shown on the Shop Drawings.
Immediately after joining, the pipe interior shall be swabbed to remove all excess mortar
by drawing a swab or squeegee through the pipe. The pipe interior shall be inspected
by a closed circuit television camera, to assure quality of internal mortar.
For pipe sizes 24-inches and larger, the joint recess shall be pointed from the inside with
cement mortar after the backfill has been placed and compacted and the pipe permitted
to take any normal settlement. The mortar shall be mixed of one part cement to one and
one-half parts of sand and pointing accomplished in two or more lifts and finished off
flush by troweling. Pipe shall be inspected visually by work persons within the pipe, to
assure internal mortar quality.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061 -1 1
Each pipe joint shall be bonded to provide electrical continuity along the entire pipeline.
The bond shall be made by the proper welding of pipe joints together as indicated on the
Plans.
The outside joint recess shall be grouted with cement mortar after a diaper has first been
placed around the joint and tightened securely to prevent leakage while the mortar is
being poured. The diaper shall be made of moisture resisting paper or heavy duty sail
cloth of sufficiently close weave to prevent cement loss from the mortar. The diapers
shall be hemmed on each edge and shall contain a metal strap within each hem
sufficiently longer than the circumference of the pipe to allow a secure attachment of the
diaper to the pipe. The diaper width will depend upon pipe size and design and shall be
the width recommended by the manufacturer. Following installation of the diapers, the
joints shall be poured and rodded from one side only until the mortar comes up to the top
of the diaper on the opposite side. Approximately one hour subsequent to the pouring of
the joint, the joint shall be rechecked and, if any settlement, leakage or shrinkage has
taken place, the joint shall be refilled with mortar.
Outside joints may be grouted before or after the placement of bedding and backfill
materials if those materials are to be mechanically compacted. If bedding and backfill
materials are to be hydraulically densified, grout shall be poured and allowed to set
before applying water. In any case, joints shall be grouted before backfill is placed over
the top of the pipe.
3.5 BUTT-STRAP CLOSURE JOINTS
Butt-Strap Closure Joints: Butt-strap closure joints shall be completed in the trench after
the pipe has been laid to the alignment and grade shown on the Plans. They should be
field welded by full-circumferential fillet welds or one of the edges may be shop welded
and the other field welded. Welding shall be done in the same manner as specified for
welded joints.
The interior of the joints shall be filled with stiff plastic mortar and finished off smoothly
with the inside of the pipe. Clean the inside steel surfaces by wire brushing or power
brushing. Wire mesh, 2" x 4" x No. 13 gauge, clean, and free from rust, shall be applied
to the interior of the joints so that the wires on the 2-inch spacing run circumferentially
around the pipe. The wires on the 4-inch spacing shall be crimped in such a manner
that the mesh will be held 3/8-inch from the metal joint surface. The mesh shall be
lapped a minimum of 8-inches and shall be securely wired in position. Pack the cement
mortar into the recess of the joint and steel trowel finish to match the adjoining pipes.
The joint exterior shall be coated with mortar to a minimum thickness of 1%-inches.
Immediately prior to applying mortar to the interior or exterior of the joints, a cement
wash shall be applied to the metal to be coated.
3.6 FIELD WELDED JOINTS
A. Welded joints shall be completed after the pipe is in final position. Welded joints
shall be a lap-welded slip joint as shown on the Plans. The minimum overlap of
the assembled bell and spigot section of lap joint shall be shown on the plans.
Any recess between the bell and spigot shall be caulked with a rod to facilitate
the welding. Pipe of 30-inches in diameter or more may be welded from the
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 5061 -1 2
0.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
inside. Joints shall be welded on the inside and outside where indicated on the
Plans as “Double Welded Joints.” Field Welding shall be in accordance with
AWWA C206 and AWS D1.1, except as modified herein. Welders assigned to
the Work shall be qualified under the AWS standard qualification procedure,
within the past three (3) years.
Joints to be welded shall be cleaned, preferably prior to placing the pipe in the
trench, of all loose scale, heavy rust, paint, cement, and grease. At least a
1 /2-inch recess shall be provided between adjacent mortar-covered surfaces to
place the weld. In all hand welding, the metal shall be deposited in successive
layers and the minimum number of passes shall be 2. Preheat the joints to be
welded where required in accordance with Table 1 of AWWA C206.
All joints shall be visually inspected and shall undergo dye testing and hydrostatic
testing in accordance with AWWA C-206.
After the joints have been welded, the interior joint shall be grouted with cement
mortar.
Welded joints shall be completed in the trench per AWWA C206.
Both the bell and spigot ends shall be cleaned of foreign matter prior to welding.
Welding electrodes shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Typically, electrodes shall be E6010 for root passes and E7018 for additional passes. Do not deposit more than 3.2mm (118”) of throat thickness per pass.
Weld material shall be deposited in successive layers. Complete and clean each
pass around the entire circumference of the pipe before commencing the next
pass.
The minimum number of passes in the completed weld shall be as follows:
Steel Cylinder Thickness
mm (inches) Number of Passes
Field Weld Minimum
6.35 or less (0.2500 or W) 2
Greater than 6.35 (0.2500 or W) 3
To minimize longitudinal stresses due to temperature variations, it is necessary to
leave unwelded one joint per each 120m (400’) of pipeline. This joint shall be left
unwelded until all the joints on both sides of it are welded, and it shall be welded
at the coolest time of the working day. The District Engineer shall decide if and
when this procedure is warranted.
Tack-welding the joint may be permitted to hold the pipe in place. If the joint is to
be circumferentially welded, sufficient time shall elapse to allow for an initial set
of interior joint lining prior to proceeding with joint welding. Rapid-setting mortar
may be used in accordance with this Section. In some cases, the District
Engineer may require hand holes.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Contract 38891 15061 -1 3
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
- L. Field welders shall be certified in accordance with ASME Section 9 (pipe
welders) or AWS D1.l (plate welders). Welders shall present a copy of their
certification to the District Engineer prior to performing any field welding.
M. Prior to butt-strap welding, the pipe and pipe joint shall be properly positioned in
the trench using line-up clamps so that, in the finished joint, the abutting pipe
sections shall not be misaligned by more than 1.59mm (1/16").
N. The pipe ends shall be cut straight on joints where butt straps are used for
realignment, adjustment, or deflection, and fillet welds shall be made as
indicated.
0. Inspection of Field Welded Joints:
1. The District shall arrange for the welds to be inspected. Inspection of
welds shall take place as soon as possible following the completion of the
welds.
2. The Contractor shall coordinate and supply ventilation, lighting, and other
equipment deemed necessary for inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing safe entry into and out of the trench, safety of
inspection personnel, traffic control and other safety precautions deemed
necessary for the inspections.
PREVENTING FOREIGN MATTER FROM ENTERING THE PIPE
At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed
with a tight-fitting cap or plug to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the pipe.
These provisions shall apply during the noon hour as well as overnight. In no event shall
the pipeline be used as a drain for removing water which has infiltrated into the trench.
The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign materials and in a
clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Owner's Representative.
HANDLING OF PIPE
Refer to Section 09870 regarding handling of the concrete mortar lined and tape
wrapped and mortar coated steel pipe.
INTERIOR JOINT FINISH - PIPE LESS THAN 600mm (24")
Complete interior mortar joints for pipe sizes less than 600mm (24") by drawing through
a tight-fitting swab or squeegee. Coat the face of the cement mortar lining at the bell with
a sufficient amount of stiff cement mortar to fill the gap. Immediately after joining the
pipes, draw the swab through the pipe to remove all excess mortar and expel it from the
open pipe end. Do not move the pipe after the swab has been pulled past the joint.
See requirements under "Field Welded Joints" for these joints requiring welding.
INTERIOR JOINT FINISH - PIPE 600mm (24") AND LARGER
A. Complete interior mortar joints for pipe sizes 600mm (24") and larger by the
trowel method. Prior to applying interior mortar at the joints all backfill in the area
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 5061 -1 4
.-
shall be completed. After cleaning the interior joint, pack cement mortar into each
joint. Finish the surface with a steel trowel to a smooth finish and equal thickness
to match the adjoining pipe mortar.
B. Where more than a 1OOmm (4") joint strip of mortar is required, place galvanized
welded wire mesh reinforcement in 50mm x 1OOmm (2" x 4") pattern of No. 13
gauge over the exposed steel. Install the mesh so that the wires on the 50mm
(2") spacing direction run circumferentially around the pipe. Crimp the wires on
the 1OOmm (4") spacing to support the mesh 9.5mm (3/8") from the metal
surface. Steel-trowel finish the interior mortar to match adjoining mortar-lined
pipe sections.
3.1 1 EXTERIOR JOINT FINISH
A. The outside annular space between pipe sections shall be completely filled with
grout formed by the use of polyethylene foam-lined fabric bands. The grout space
shall be flushed with water prior to filling so that the surfaces of the joint to be in
contact with the grout will be thoroughly moistened when the grout is poured.
The joint shall be filled with grout by pouring from one side only. Grout shall be
rodded with a wire or other flexible rod or vibrated so that the grout completely
fills the joint recess by moving down one side of the pipe, around the bottom of
the pipe and up the opposite side. Pouring and rodding the grout shall be
continued to allow completion of the filling of the entire joint recess in one
operation. Care shall be taken to leave no unfilled space. Grouting of the outside
joint spaces shall be kept as close behind the laying of the pipe as possible
except that in no case shall grouting be closer than three joints of the pipe being
laid.
B. The grout bands or heavy-duty diapers shall be polyethylene foam-lined fabric
with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh mortar, resist nodding
of the mortar, and allow excess water to escape. The foam plastic shall be 100 percent closed cell, chemically inert, insoluble in water and resistant to acids,
alkalis and solvents. Foam Plastic shall be Dow Chemical Company,
Ethafoam 222, or equal.
The fabric backing shall be cut and sewn into 224mm (9) wide strips with slots
for the steel strapping on the outer edges. The polyethylene foam shall be cut
into strips 150mm (6") wide and slit to a thickness of 6.35mm (1/4") that will
expose a hollow or open-cell surface on one side. The foam liner shall be
attached to the fabric backing with the open or hollow cells facing towards the
pipe. The foam strip shall cover the full interior circumference of the grout band
with sufficient length to permit a 200mm (8) overlap of the foam at or near the
top of the pipe joint. Splices to provide continuity of the material will be permitted.
The polyethylene foam material shall be protected from direct sunlight.
The polyethylene foam-lined grout band shall be centered over the joint space
with approximately equal widths extending over each pipe end and securely
attached to the pipe with the steel straps. After filling the exterior joint space with
grout, the flaps shall be closed and overlapped in a manner that fully encloses
the grout with polyethylene foam.
September 2004 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1 5061 -1 5
- C. Following grouting, the joint shall then be wrapped with two layers of
polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 15000.
3.12 BUTT STRAP JOINTS
Butt strap closure joints shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in
accordance with AWWA C206.
A. Butt straps shall be field welded to the outside plain end of the pipe along both
edges with a full circumferential weld. A minimum of two weld passes shall be
used.
B. The interior of the joints shall be filled with a rapid-set mortar and finished off
smoothly to match the pipe interior diameter.
C. Clean the butt strap with a wire brush and apply a cement and water wash coat
prior to applying cement mortar.
D. Galvanized wire mesh, 50mm x 1OOmm (2" x 4") x No. 13 gauge shall be
installed to the exterior of the joint prior to applying the mortar coating.
E. Coat the exterior of the closure assemblies with mortar to cover all steel with a
minimum of 32mm (1-IW).
F. Seal weld the steel plug to the hand hole after the interior of the joint has been
inspected and approved by the District Engineer.
G. Following grouting, the joint shall then be wrapped with two layers of
polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 15000.
3.13 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
Flanged connections shall be installed where indicated on the Approved Plans.
A. Bolt holes shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines.
B. The bolts, nuts and flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brush prior
to assembly.
C. Bolts and nuts shall be lubricated with a District-approved anti-seize compound.
D. Nuts shall be tightened in an alternating "star" pattern to the manufacturer's
recommended torque.
E. Slip-on type flanges intended for field fit-up and welding shall be welded inside
and outside in accordance with AWWA C207.
F. Coat the exterior of exposed flanges, bolts and nuts in accordance with Section
0991 0.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061 -1 6
-.
3.14 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS
Flanged coupling adapters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in the presence of the
District Engineer to the torque recommended by the manufacturer.
3.1 5 JOINT BONDING/CATHODIC PROTECTION INSULATION
Bonding of joints to provide continuity, flange insulation kits, internal epoxy linings, and
other cathodic protection items and materials shall be installed where shown on the
Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings and Section 131 10.
3.16 WAXTAPE
Wax tape shall be installed as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the
District Engineer in accordance with Section 131 IO and the Standard Drawings.
3.17 CONCRETE
Where required, concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with
CMWD Reclamation Rules & Regulations and as shown on the Approved Plans. Prior to
filling the pipeline with water, refer to CMWD Reclamation Rules & Regulations for the
minimum concrete curing time required.
3.18 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Waming/ldentification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the
Standard Drawings.
3.19 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with
Section 15041.
3.20 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044.
3.21 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING
A. Exterior surfaces of all pipe and appurtenances not otherwise mortar-coated shall
be field painted in accordance with Section 09900.
6. Areas in contact with potable water such plain ends of pipe, grooved and
shouldered ends of pipe and exposed inside surfaces of threaded outlets and
blind flanges shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
END OF SECTION
Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials
Contract 38891 15061-1 7
SECTION 15092
MISCELLANEOUS COUPLINGS, PIPE AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION
All valves, couplings, and appurtenances shall conform to requirements of the standard dimensions and pressure classification of the immediately adjacent pipe, valve or
appurtenance as specified.
RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section@) for additional requirements:
A. Painting and Coating: 09900 B. Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating: 09902
SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 2-5.3, Shop Drawing Submittals. The following submittals are required:
A. Submit Shop Drawings for all miscellaneous couplings, pipe and appurtenances. Shop Drawings shall include listing of materials of construction, with ASTM reference and grade, including lining and paint coating intended for use, with lining and coating manufacturers' and paint numbers listed.
PAYMENT
Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit- price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 GASKETS, NUTS, AND BOLTS
Gaskets for flanged joints shall be fullface, asbestos composition sheet packing,
graphited on both sides, "drop-in" type, boltholes prepunched, conforming to the requirements of ANSI B16.21 and shall be as manufactured by Crane Co., Garlock or approved equal.
Bolts and studs for aboveground installations shall be cadmium plated and shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade 6, "Steel Machine Bolts and Nuts and Tap Holes," when a ring gasket is used and shall conform to either ASTM A261, "Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Bolting Material" or ASTM A1 93, "Alloy-Steel Bolting Material for High Temperature Service," when a full-face gasket is used. Bolts and nuts shall be heavy hexagon series. Nuts shall conform to ASTMAl94, "Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service" either in Grade 1, 2 or 2H. The fit shall be ANSI B1 .I , "Unified Screw Threads,' Class 2, except that Class 3 fit shall be used in holes tapped for studs. Threads may be made by either cutting or cold forming. Between 1/4-inch and 3/8-inch shall project through the nut when drawn tight. Washers shall be provided for each nut and shall be the same material as each nut. All buried flanges, including bolts, nuts and washers, shall be encased in wax tape per Section
09902.
January 2004 Miscellaneous Couplings, Pipe and Appurtenances
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15092-1
All bolt threads shall be lubricated with non-oxide grease. Flanged faces shall be wire
brushed and cleaned prior to joining each flange.
2.2 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, all couplings and appurtenances for
underground installation shall be encased in wax tape per Section 09902.
2.3 PAINTING AND COATING
All miscellaneous couplings, pipe and appurtenances referenced in this section shall be
painted and coated, interior and exterior, in accordance with Section 09900, Painting
and Coating.
2.4 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
Joints for which flexible couplings are required, shall be made with Baker, Smith-Blair, or
approved equal. Gaskets shall be plain rubber gaskets. Threads on bolts of compression
collars shall be lubricated with non-oxide grease before assembling the coupling.
For cast-iron, ductile-iron or asbestos cement pipe sizes 2-inches through 1 6-inches,
use Baker Series 228, Smith-Blair Series 41 3, or approved equal.
Transition couplings shall be Baker Series 212, Smith-Blair Series 41 3, or approved
equal.
Flanged coupling adapters for cast iron or ductile iron pipe sizes 4-inches through
12-inches shall be Baker Series 601, Smith-Blair Series 912, or approved equal.
Flanged coupling adaptors for cast or ductile iron pipe greater than 12-inches shall be
Baker Series 602 or Smith-Blair Series 913.
2.5 PIPE UNIONS
Screw unions may be employed on pipelines 2-1/2-inches in diameter and smaller.
Pipes and fittings made of non-ferrous metals shall be isolated from ferrous metals by
nylon insulating pipe bushings, unions or couplings manufactured by Smith-Blair, Pipe
Seal and Insulator Co. or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
January 2004 Miscellaneous Couplings, Pipe and Appurtenances
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15092-2
SECTION 15099
PROCESS VALVES, REGULATORS AND MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
....
1.4
1.5
DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, testing and installation of manually operated process
valves such as check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves and ball
valves.
REFERENCESTANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
American Water Works Association
AWA C508 Standards for Swing Check Valve
ASTM B62 Standards for Ball Vales
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Specification Sections 0991 0, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15074, 151 08,
15112 and 15152
SERVICE APPLICATIONS
Check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves, bronze gate valves
and ball valves are primarily used in the installation of potable and recycled water main
appurtenances and where called for on the Approved Plans and indicated on the
Standard Drawings.
SUBMllTALS
The following items shall be submitted to the District for review and approval prior to
ordering or delivery of valves per Section 2-5.3 Submittals.
A. The valve manufacturers catalog data showing the size to be used, valve
dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction.
B. Manufacturers catalog data and proof of NSF certification on the lining materials
to be used.
C. Installation procedures including field adjustments as required.
_-
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves
Contract 38891 15099-1
1.6 SIZING OF VALVES
Valves shall be the same size as the appurtenance in which they are to be installed with
unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard
Drawings.
1.7 VALVE ENDS
Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system or appurtenance in which they are
to be installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard
Drawings.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Valves shall remain in factory packaging until ready for installation.
Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground.
1.9 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the buried installation of valves in accordance with
Section 15000.
1-10 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
Valve boxes and extension stems shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000
and the Standard Drawings.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 RUBBER-FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVE
A. Swing check valves and appurtenant components shall be in accordance with
AWWA C508 and selected from the Approved Materials List. A submittal will be
required as described in this Section.
6. Rubber-flapper swing check valves shall have a heavily constructed ductile-iron
body and cover. The body shall be long pattern design (not wafer), with integrally
cast-on end flanges. The flapper shall be Buna-N having an "0" ring seating
edge and be internally reinforced with steel.
C. Flapper shall be captured between the body and the body cover in a manner to
permit the flapper to flex from closed to full open position during flow through the
valve. Flapper shall be easily removed without need to remove valve from line.
Check valves shall have full pipe size flow area. Seating surface shall be on a
45' angle requiring the flapper to travel only 35' from closed to full open position,
for minimum head loss and non-slam closure.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves
Contract 38891 15099-2
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
D. Buna-N flapper shall be high-strength coated fabric, coated both sides with
70 DURO, which creates an elastic spring effect, molded internally, to assist the
flapper to close against a slight head to prevent slamming. When essential to
create backflow through the check valve, as directed by the District Engineer, an external backflow device shall be furnished.
E. Valve ends shall be flanged ductile-iron in accordance with Section 15056 unless
otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or directed by the District Engineer.
F. Check valves shall be tested by the manufacturer and the test results shall be approved by the District Engineer prior to shipment to the project. Check valves must unseat at a head no greater than 600mm (24").
SMALL DIAMETER ISOLATING VALVES
Provide all small diameter valves and cocks for shut-off process connections, instrumentation and other miscellaneous uses in accordance with the Approved Plans. These valves shall be of the same material and pressure rating as the adjacent process
piping. Shutoff valves shall be compatible with instrumentation and other equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops shall be in the ball type with a bronze body and T-Head operator.
Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. Corporation stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Corporation stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
ANGLE METER STOPS
Angle meter stops shall be the ball type with a bronze body and 90' lock wing. Valve
ends shail be flare style inlet and swivel meter nut for 25mm (1") and meter flange for 50mm (2") outlets. Angle meter stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Angle meter stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
CUSTOMER METER SHUT-OFF VALVE
Customer meter shut-off valves shall be the ball type with a bronze body and lever
handle operator. Valve ends shall be swivel meter nut for 25mm (1") inlets and meter
flange for 50mm (2") inlets. Customer meter shut-off valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). The District Engineer may require the use of a customer meter shut-off valve equipped with a 90' lock wing.
BALL VALVES
Ball valves 50mm (2") and smaller shall be of bronze construction conforming to ASTM 862 and equipped with a T-Head or lever handle operator as required. Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as indicated on the Approved Plans or Standard Drawings. Ball valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Ball valves shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
January 2004 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15099-3
2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers shall be in accordance with Section 151 12 and selected from the
Approved Materials List.
2.8 POLYTHYLENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the
Approved Materials List.
2.9 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance wit Section
15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be set in true alignment straddling the centerline of pipe with the
valve operator in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved
Plans or shown on the Standard Drawings.
B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint
type being used.
-
C. Aboveground valves shall be rigidly held in place using supports and hangers in
accordance with the Approved Plans and Standard Drawings. The stem
orientation of valves in elevated piping shall be as approved by the District
Engineer for accessibility, except that no valves shall be installed with stems
aligned below horizontal. Saddle type valve supports shall be provided. Supports
shall be of rugged construction providing at least one hundred twenty degrees
(120') under support for the valve body. Valve supports shall be constructed of
steel, and shall be anchored to the foundations using stainless steel anchor bolts.
3.2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Installation of polyethylene wrap for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section
15000.
3.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section
15000 and the Standard Drawings.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves
Contract 38891 15099-4
3.4 DISINFECTION OF THE VALVES -
Disinfection and flushing shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the
progress of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the
disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts.
3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipelines in which they are
installed in accordance with Section 15044.
END OF SECTION
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves
Contract 38891 15099-5
SECTION 151 00
RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGVs)
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .I DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated resilient wedge gate valves (RWGVs).
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 0991 0, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, 15064,15074,15108 and 151 12
1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A. Resilient wedge gate valves (RWGVs) shall be installed on potable and recycled
water mains and appurtenances in accordance with the Approved Plans and the Standard Drawings.
Resilient wedge gate valves shall be used for open/closed operations, throttling service and frequent operation after long periods of non-actuation.
In general, resilient wedge gate valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines and appurtenances 1 OOm (4") through 400mm (16").
Valves for pipelines sized 450mm (18") and larger generally require the use of butterfly valves (BIV) in accordance with Section 151 02.
B.
C.
D.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
The following items shall be submitted for review and approval per Section 2-5.3, prior to ordering or delivery of resilient wedge gate valves.
A. An affidavit from the valve manufacturer stating that valves have successfully passed hydrostatic tests in accordance with AWA C509 and manufacturer's
own coatings tests.
B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve
dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction.
Manufacturer's catalog data and proof of NSF certification for the lining materials
to be used.
C.
c
September 2004 . Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's)
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 00-1
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
SIZING OF VALVES
Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise
noted on the Approved Plans.
VALVE ENDS
Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed in accordance with the Approved Plans or directed by the District Engineer.
Ductile-iron flanges shall be in accordance with Section 15056.
VALVE TESTING
Resilient wedge gate valves shall be hydrostatically tested and valve coatings shall be
holiday detected prior to shipment to the field in accordance with the testing procedures
shown in Appendix A. Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing
and holiday detection shall be subject to rejection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA (2550. The port
openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during
storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until valves are ready to be
installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be
stacked.
"NOT USED"
POLY EMY LENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the buried installation of resilient wedge gate valves
in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's)
A. Resilient wedge gate valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be
selected from the Approved Materials List.
B. RWGV's shall be ductile-iron in accordance with AWWA C509 and C515 except
as modified herein.
C. Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free from any sediment
pockets.
D. All RWGVs shall be leak-tight at their rated pressure.
Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGVs)
151 00-2 September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
RWGV's shall have a non-rising low-zinc bronze or stainless steel stem, opened
by turning left (counterclockwise).
Stem seals shall be the O-ring type incorporating a minimum of two rings as
required by AWWA C509.
Low-friction torque-reduction thrust washers or bearings shall be provided on the
stem collar.
Wedge (gate) shall be fully encapsutated with a bonded-in-place Nitrile elastomer
covering. Minimum thickness of the rubber seating area shall be 6.35mm (1/4").
Valves for buried applications shall be provided with a 50mm (2") square
operating nut, and valves located above ground or in structures shall be
equipped with a hand wheel in accordance with AWWA C509 unless otherwise
indicated on the Approved Plans.
RWGV interior and exterior surfaces (except for the encapsulated disc) shall be
coated as described below.
All bolts and nuts used in the construction of RWGV's shall be Type 31 6 stainless
steel.
2.2 EPOXY LINING AND COATING
Epoxy linings and coatings for valves shall be provided in accordance with AWWA (2210,
(2213, and C550, with the following modifications:
A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the
manufacturer in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be
controlled. Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is prohibited.
Repairs made to manufactures applied coatings shall be performed in a facility
with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. The facility
shall be approved by the valve manufacturer.
6.
C. Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5, White-Metal Blast
Cleaning.
D. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for
Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable
water.
E. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.203mm (0.008" or
8 mils). Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance AWWA
e21 0.
F. Powder epoxy coating materials shall
solids, in accordance with AWWA C213.
contain one hundred percent (1 00%)
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's)
. 15100-3
2.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section
15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List.
2.4 CONCRETE
Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks shall be Class 500-C-3250.
2.5 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the
Approved Materials List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical centerline of pipe and the
operating nut in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved
Plans.
Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint
type being used.
B.
C. Joints shall be cleaned and installed in accordance with Section 15056.
3.2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Installation of polyethylene wrap for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section
15000.
3.3 CONCRETE
Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed in accordance the
Standard Drawings. The concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will
be accessible for repairs or replacement.
3.4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be installed in accordance with
Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings.
3.5 DISINFECTION OF VALVES
Disinfection and flushing of valves shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of
the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the
disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts.
September 2004 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 00-4
3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING -
Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which they are
installed in accordance with Section 15044.
3.7 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING
The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be
field painted in accordance with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's)
Contract 38891 151 00-5
SECTION 151 08 AIR RELEASE VALVE. AIR AND VACUUM VALVE, AND COMBINATION' AIR VALVE ASSEMBLIES ~
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .I
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION
This section includes the materials and installation instructions for above ground air release valve, air and vacuum valve, and combination air valve assemblies.
The term "air valve" is used generically in this specification to refer to requirements common to all of the specified air release valves, air and vacuum valves, and combination air valves. Otherwise, the various types of air valves are addressed by the individual designations commonly used in AWWA and industry standards.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
C512 Standards for Combination Air Valve Assemblies
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 0991 0, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061 ,
15064,15100,16640
SERVICE APPLICATION
A. Combination air valves are generally installed on all potable and recycled water
mains at high points and where shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings.
B. Unless otherwise directed by the District Engineer, combination air valves will be
required as indicated below:
1. 25mm (1 'I) combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline
sizes 150mm (6") and 200mm (8").
2. 50mm (2") combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 250mm (10") and 300m (12").
Multiple (2") 50mm (4") combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 400mm (16") and 500mm (20"). 3.
4. 150mm (6") combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on
pipeline sizes 600mm (24") through 900mrn (36"). .-
January 2004 Air Release Valve, Air & Vacuum Valve, &Combination Air Valve Assemblies Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 08-1
1.5
1.6
1.7
C. Air release valves and air and vacuum valves shall be installed in accordance
with the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C550. The port
openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard, or wood while in transit and during
storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to be
installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be
stacked. I
I I
“NOT USED”
WARNINGADENTIFICATION TAPE
Warningndentification tape shall be installed for air valve assemblies in accordance with
Section 15000.
I
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 COMBINATION AIR VALVES
I
A. Combination air valves and appurtenant components and materials suitable for
the system pressure shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
Combination air valves shall comply with AWWA C512 except as modified
herein.
25m (1”) and 50mm (2”) combination air valves shall be the single-body type
incorporating stainless steel internal components and National Pipe Threaded
(NPT) inlet and outlet configurations.
I
B.
C.
D. 1OOmm (4”) and 150mm (6”) Combination Air Valves shall be the single-body
type. Valves shall incorporate stainless steel internal components, protective
hood and flanged inlet.
E. Internal protective epoxy coatings shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C550. I
1. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing
for Drinking Water1 Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with
potable water.
2. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.203m (0.008”
or 8 mils). Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in
accordance with AWWA C210.
January 2004 Air Release Valve, Air & Vacuum Valve, &Combination Air Valve Assemblies
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 08-2
2.3 -
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
.I
ENCLOSURES
Air Valve Enclosures shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
CONCRETE
Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks and equipment pads shall be in accordance
with Section 03000.
BREAK-AWAY BOLTS
Combination air valves, air release valves and air and vacuum valves located above
ground sized 1OOmm (4") and larger shall be installed with break-away bolts in
accordance with the Standard Drawings and selected from the Approved Materials List.
WARNINGADENTIFICATION TAPE
WarningAdentification Tape shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected
from the Approved Materials List.
FIELD PAINTING AND COATING
Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09910 and
0991 5 and selected from the Approved Materials List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
I_---
INSTALLATION
A. Air valve assemblies shall be provided as shown on the Approved Plans.
Additional air valve assemblies may be required in areas of potential air
entrapment, at the discretion of the District Engineer.
B. Air valve assemblies shall be installed relative to street improvements in
accordance with the Standard Drawings.
Connections for the air valve assemblies shall be made within a section of the
main line no closer than 600mm (24") to a bell, coupling, joint or fitting.
C.
CONCRETE
Concrete thrust or anchor blocks and equipment pads shall be installed in accordance
with the Standard Drawings.
WARNlNGADENTlFlCATlON TAPE
WarningAdentification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the
Standard Drawings.
January 2004 Air Release Valve, Air & Vacuum Valve, &Combination Air Valve Assemblies Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 08-3
3.4
3.5
3.6
DISINFECTION
Air valve assemblies shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041 in
conjunction with disinfecting the main to which it is connected. The assembly valves
shall be operated and the assembly flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts.
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Air valve assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in
conjunction with the pipeline to which they are connected.
FIELD PAINTING AND COATINGS
A. Field repairs to the enclosure shall not be permitted. Enclosures requiring repairs
to the coating shall be returned to the supplier or coating vendor for repairs or
recoating in accordance with Section 0991 5.
END OF SECTION
January 2004 Air Release Valve, Air & Vacuum Valve, &Combination Air Valve Assemblies
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 151 08-4
SECTION 151 51
RECYCLED WATER FACILITIES (OFFSITE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes special provisions, materials, and identification of off site recycled
water systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
(TO BE ADDED LATER)
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 02202, 02223, 03000, 0991 0, 15000, 15041, 15044,
15056,15057,15061,15064,15074,151 00,151 02,151 08, and 151 12 - 1.04 APPROVED USE
All potential applications of recycled water shall be reviewed and approved by the
District prior to installation of facilities. The facilities shall be constructed in accordance
with the procedures and requirements of the District. No connections to recycled water
main(s) shall be installed unless shown on the Approved Plans or permission has
otherwise been granted in writing by the District.
1 .OS OFFSITE AND ONSITE CRITERIA
Recycled water facilities are separated into two categories:
A. "Offsite" (pre-meter, public) recycled water facilities consist of those facilities
which are on the upstream side of the meter. These facilities are, or will be,
owned, operated and maintained by the District. The Specification Section will
detail the requirements for construction of Offsite Recycled Water Facilities.
B. "Onsite" (post-meter, private) recycled water facilities consist of those facilities
which are on the downstream side of the water meter. These are facilities which
will be owned, operated and maintained by the customer. Refer to Section 15152
for the detailed requirements of onsite irrigation and plumbing systems.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Recycled Water Facilities (Offsite)
151 51-1 Contract 38891
1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
A licensed Civil Engineer registered in the State of California shall be responsible
for the design of offsite recycled water facilities, including the preparation of
plans and specifications.
Plans for offsite potable and recycled water systems in the same street or
easement shall show both potable and recycled water mains on the same sheets
of plans.
The minimum depth of cover for recycled water mains shall be in accordance
with Section 02223 or as shown on the Approved Plans. in general, where both
recycled and potable water mains are to be installed in the same street or
easement, the top of pipe of the recycled water main shall be 300mm (12") below
the top of the potable water main.
A horizontal separation of 3.05m (lo), and a vertical separation of 300mm (12")
shall be maintained between recycled water lines and potable water lines, and
between recycled lines and sanitary sewers. Recycled water lines shall be
designed to cross under potable water mains and above sanitary sewers.
In the event that it is not possible to maintain the required separation and relative
positions between recycled water lines, potable water lines, and sanitary sewers,
special construction shall be required in accordance with the Standard Drawings
and as directed by the District Engineer.
The minimum size distribution main shall be 150mm (6). The District shall be the
final authority concerning the size and pressure rating of the distribution main.
Offsite recycled water mains shall typically be located on the opposite side of the
street or easement from the potable water main.
H. Offsite recycled water mains shall be designed with service laterals
perpendicular to the main. Service laterals shall be a minimum of 50mm (2") in
size. Larger sized laterals may be required. A service lateral shall be designed
for each lot or area to be served with recycled water. A service lateral shall not
be designed to serve opposite sides of a street or easement and shall not be
located in street medians or center islands.
I. Offsite recycled water systems shall not be designed with fire hydrants, wharf
heads, or other appurtenances which would allow recycled water to be used for
other than the approved uses unless the appurtenances are expressly approved
by the District.
J. Offsite recycled water mains shall not be designed with temporary connections
unless expressly approved by the District. When permitted, temporary
connections shall be located, sized, and designed according to the requirements
of the District.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Recycled Water Facilities (Off site)
Contract 38891 151 51 -2
1.07 PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE USE OF RECYCLED WATER -
In those areas where the District has determined that recycled water will be supplied to
the subject area in the future but is not currently available, recycled facilities shall be
installed as detailed in this Section. Provisions for future connection to the permanent
recycled water system shall be included in the initial installation'of the system as
directed by the District. In the interim, the new recycled system will be supplied with
potable water via a temporary connection performed by the Contractor as directed by
the District. This temporary service connection shall be provided in accordance with the
Standard Drawings and shall incorporate a master backflow prevention device located
and installed in accordance with Section 151 12. Connections between offsite recycled
water mains and potable water mains shall only be permitted when the recycled water
main is to temporarily convey potable water. No connection of any other kind shall be
permitted between the potable water and recycled water mains. In the future, the Owner
shall be responsible to remove the temporary service and transfer the main to a
permanent connection to the recycled system when it becomes available.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 OFFSITE RECYCLED WATER FACILITIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
January 2004
Materials for offsite recycled water systems shall generally consist of those
specified for potable water systems as detailed within these Standard
Specifications, the Standard Drawings, the Approved Materials List, and as
modified herein.
Recycled water mains sized 150mm (6") and larger shall be PVC in accordance
with Section 15064. PVC pipe for recycled water system applications and related
gate well casings shall be manufactured in the purple color. Pipe markings shall
include the designation "RECYCLED WATER" in addition to the standard factory
labeling required by AWWA.
Devices and appurtenances such as air valve assemblies, backflow preventers,
blowoff assemblies, butterfly valves, gate valves, services and other items shall
be provided in accordance with the various applicable Sections of these
Standard Specifications, the Standard Drawings and the Approved Materials List.
Color coding and other identification shall be provided as indicated below.
Miscellaneous materials such as gate wells, meter boxes, warning tape, tracer
wire, copper tubing, ductile iron fittings, brass and bronze fittings and devices,
and all related items shall be provided in accordance with the various applicable
Sections of these Standard Specifications, the Standard Drawings and the
Approved Materials List. Color coding and other identification shall be provided
as indicated below.
WarningAdentification Tape shall be as specified in Section 15000 in accordance
with the Approved Materials List.
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Recycled Water Facilities (Off site)
Contract 38891 151 51 -3
F. Paint products for protection and identification shall be provided as specified
below and in accordance with Sections 0991 0,0991 5 and the Approved
Materials List.
G. Warning signs and labels shall be post mounted aluminum or vinyl, self adhesive
with peel off paper backing, bearing the warning "RECYCLED WATER - DO
NOT DRINK'' or the equivalent, in English and Spanish, along with the
international "Do Not Drink" symbol. Warning labels and signs shall have a
purple background with contrasting lettering and markings.
Utility identification tape shall be 0.1 02mm (0.004" or 4 mils) PVC, pressure-
sensitive adhesive-backed tape in rolls of various widths. The tape shall be color-
coded purple and shall bear the designation "RECYCLED WATER" or the
equivalent, in contrasting permanent lettering at approximately 300mm (1 2")
intervals. Identification tape will generally be used in the 50mm (2") width to
identify buried materials and components as detailed below.
H.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 OFFSITE RECYCLED WATER FACILITIES
In general, offsite recycled water facilities shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements for potable water materials and facilities within these Specifications, the
Standard Drawings and the Approved Plans.
3.02 FIELD IDENTIFICATION - PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
Recycled water mains and appurtenances shall be identified with purple-colored coding
and identification labels and signs as specified herein.
A. PVC pipe and related gate well casings shall be colored purple as manufactured.
If purple-colored PVC pipe in the specified size or class is not readily available
from suppliers, standard colored PVC pipe may be used and sleeved with a
0.203mm (0.008" or 8 mils) purple-colored, high-density polyethylene
encasement sleeve which totally encloses the pipe.
B. Buried items that are not available from the manufacturer in the purple color shall
be identified in the field by means of utility identification tape applied to the
surface of the items. Valves, ductile iron fittings and similar items shall receive a
band of the tape applied circumferentially at the ends of the fittings adjacent to
connections to the adjoining piping sections, and to the operator portions of gate
and butterfly valves. The identification tape shall also be used to secure the
polyethylene wrap specified for the various piping materials and appurtenances.
Copper tubing and appurtenant bronze fittings shall be identified by means of
utility identification tape applied continuously along the upper surface of the
entire length of the line.
C. Meter and blowoff boxes shall be colored purple as manufactured.
January 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Recycled Water Facilities (Off site) Contract 38891 151 51 -4
D. Accessible items that are not available from the manufacturer in the purple color,
such as those located at grade, above ground and within meter boxes and vaults
shall be identified in the field by means of a paint coating in the purple color.
. Meters, blowoff piping and blowoff box covers or blowoff manhole covers, valve
box lids, air valves and enclosures, piping, valves, backflow devices and all other
items either accessible or exposed to view, shall be identified by means of the
purple coating or integral purple color. The coating system shall be suitable for
the substrate material and the degree of protection required for the various
items, in accordance with Section 0991 0 and the Approved Materials List.
E. Tracer wire shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard
Drawings.
F. Warning/ldentification tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000
and the Standard Drawings.
3.03 LABELS AND SIGNAGE
Labels shall be installed on recycled facilities exposed to view including above ground
piping and appurtenances, meter and blowoff box covers, and where indicated on the
Standard Drawings and the Approved Plans. Signs shall be installed where necessary
and as indicated on the Approved Plans.
3.04 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
In the event the recycled water mains are installed with provisions for future use for
transporting recycled water, but will initially transport potable water (see item above),
disinfection, flushing and bacteriological testing shall be performed in accordance with
Section 15041.
I-
3.05 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Potable water shall be used for filling, flushing, and hydrostatic testing. Field hydrostatic
testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044.
3.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
During the course of flushing and disinfection and hydrostatic testing of the recycled
water mains, an appropriate backflow prevention device shall be installed on the
potable source piping to isolate the potable from the non-potable system in accordance
with Section 15044 and 151 12.
END OF SECTION
January 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Recycled Water Facilities (Offsite)
151 51 -5
SECTION 15800
HEATING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Specific Project Description
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test the ventilation equipment for the Recycled
Water Pump Station (RWPS) and Potable Water Pump Station (PWPS) equipment
buildings including, supply ventilators and relief ventilators, and accessories as specified
herein and shown on the Drawings.
1.02 Specific Project Supply Ventilator Requirements
Contractor shall furnish and install supply ventilators as manufactured by Loren Cook, or
equal as follows and shown on the Drawings:
Minimum
Ventilator CFM Q Minimum Maximum
Locat ion No. TvDe 112" S.P. HP Sound Power Remarks
RWPS SF1 Roof 2,375 314 90 d8 (1) (2) SF2 Roof 2,375 314 90 dB (1) (2)
PWPS SF3 Roof 2,375 314 90 dB (1 1 (2) SF4 Roof 2,375 3/4 90 dB (1) (2)
(1) 460 volt, three phase, two speed, two winding motor. Low speed shall be one-half of
(2) Each supply ventilator shall be operated by timer and thermostat control.
Specific Project Gravity Relief Ventilator Requirements
high speed.
1.03
Contractor shall furnish and install gravity relief ventilators as manufactured by Loren
Cook, or equal as follows and shown on the Drawings:
Minimum Throat Ventilator CFM Q Size
Location No. TyDe .05" S.P. fL x W) Remarks
30" x 24" (1)
GV2 Roof 1,800 30" x 24" (1 )
GV3 Roof 1,400 24" x 24" (1 1
PWPS GV4 Roof 1,800 30" x 24" (1 1
GV5 Roof 1,800 30" x 24" (1)
24" x 24" (1)
RWPS GV1 Roof 1,800
GV6 Roof 1,400
(1) Each gravity relief ventilator shall be furnished with an automatic aluminum backdraft
damper with counterbalance weight.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Heating & Ventilation
15800-1
1.04 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. Data to be Submitted bv Contractor
Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical data for all
equipment and components, including, but not limited to, the following:
materials, fabrication, assembly, detailed specifications, performance curves,
and installation instructions and dimensions.
B. ODeration and Maintenance Manual
Contractor shall submit a detailed operation and maintenance manual for each
item of equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Roof Mounted Supply Ventilators
Roof mounted supply ventilators . shall be belt driven, supply fans (SF) with cast
aluminum propellers and spun aluminum top caps.
Each fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant
fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum
16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. The
aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners. The motor, bearings
and drives shatl be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated
from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. Unit shall bear an engraved
aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM, static pressure, and
maximum RPM.
-
Propeller shall be cast aluminum airfoil design with cast aluminum hub. The blade pitch
shall be factory set and locked using set screws and roll pin. The hub shall be keyed
and locked to the shaft utilizing two set screws or a taper lock bushing. Propeller shall
be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration
Levels for Fans.
Motor shall be heavy-duty type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and
furnished at the specified voltage and phase. Unless other specified, motors shall be
open drip-proof. Fans shall be completely weatherproof with motor accessible from the
roof. Drives shall be sized for 150% of motor horsepower capabilities and shall be of
the cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts. Variable pitch drives shall be
standard. Drive belts shall be of the oil and heat resistant, non-static, non-sparking
type. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Bearing construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in
a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at
maximum rated operating speed.
.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Heating & Ventilation
15800-2
Fans shall be Model SEP as manufactured by Loren Cook, or equal.
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, roof supply fans shall be mounted on
prefabricated metal roof curbs. Prefabricated metal roof curbs shall be a minimum of 8"
high, constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel, with 2" x 2" treated wood nailer, 1"
(minimum) semi-rigid thermal insulation, and 3" x 3" integral cant. Prefabricated metal
roof curbs shall be Model SC as manufactured by Louver & Dampers, Inc., or equal.
Ventilators shall be provided with automatic aluminum gravity backdraft dampers.
2.02 Roof Mounted Gravity Relief Ventilators
A. General
Gravity relief ventilators shall be low profile type, hooded aluminum rectangular
roof mounted units as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
Ventilators shall be suitable for mounting on fabricated or prefabricated metal, or
concrete roof curb as shown on the Drawings.
Ventilators shall be anchored into curbs with stainless steel threaded fasteners
or stainless steel expansion anchors sized to utilize manufacturer's mounting
holes.
All aluminum ventilators mounted on concrete curbs shall be isolated from
contact with the curb utilizing neoprene gaskets.
Ventilators shall be weatherproofed by caulking edges with exterior grade
caulking compound.
Ventilator size shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
B. Construction
Units shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant
fasteners. The aluminum hood shall be constructed of minimum 14 gauge
marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a minimum 8 gauge aluminum support
structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners.
Birdscreen constructed of 1/2" mesh shall be mounted across the relief opening.
Unit shall bear an engraved nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM
and static pressure.
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, each gravity relief ventilator shall be
furnished an automatic aluminum backdraft damper with counterbalance weight.
Gravity backdraft dampers shall be constructed with extruded aluminum frames,
aluminum blades, and aluminum hinge pins with brass bushings.
Low profile aluminum gravity relief ventilators shall be Model VR as
manufactured by Loren Cook Company, or equal.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Heating & Ventilation
15800-3
2.03 Ductwork and Miscellaneous Accessories
All ductwork and miscellaneous accessories shall be provided in accordance with
Section 15890 and as shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
Contractor shall examine all equipment upon arrival at jobsite and determine that it is
the specified equipment, or approved replacement, and that it is in good condition.
Contractor shall connect all necessary electrical power including furnishing of all
necessary materials in addition to that included in the specified equipment. Wiring
materials and installation shall be in accordance with the Basic Electrical Specifications
and controls in accordance with System Description Technical Specifications.
3.02 Start-up and Instruction
Contractor shall arrange for qualified representatives of the manufacturer to inspect the
installation and perform start-up of the equipment and to demonstrate required
performance to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Contractor shall balance the ventilation systems by adjusting louvers or grills to obtain
even air flow across a room. Contractor shall furnish calibrated (certification required)
air velocity meters for such balancing.
-
Contractor shall arrange for not less than 1 hour of adequate instruction of operators
selected by the Owner at a time acceptable to the Owner and the manufacturers.
Instruction shall be for operation and routine maintenance and repair of ventilation
equipment.
END OF SECTION
Heating 8. Ventilation
15800-4
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General Requirements
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of all
low pressure sheet metal duct systems necessary for the conveyance of air from air
handling units as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Each system shall be
complete with all accessories, etc., as described herein and in other sections of the
Contract Documents.
1.02 Regulations, Codes, Standards, and Reference Specifications
The design, materials, and installation of the specified air conveyance facilities shall
conform to the latest editions of all applicable local, state, and federal regulations,
codes, standards, and specifications, including, but not limited to the following:
A. National Fire Protection Association (NPFA) 90A - Standard for the Installation
of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
B. NFPA 90B - Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Duct
Materials and Air Duct Connections.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) -
HVAC Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Except as otherwise noted,
fabricate, reinforce, support, join and install ductwork, access doors, dampers
and accessories per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
SMACNA - Round and Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. E.
1.03 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
Section 15800 Building Ventilation Technical Specifications
1.04 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
A. Complete specifications, dimensioned drawings for all ductwork, including gauge
size, welds, and configurations, bill of materials, and catalog cuts for all
accessories.
B. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for the ducts to be furnished.
September 2004 Ductwork and Accessories Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15890-1
1.05
1.06
SMACNA
C. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other changes or
modifications necessary to adapt equipment and materials to be supplied to the
arrangement or details shown on the Drawings.
Static
Pressure
Rating
Duct (In.
Verification of Dimensions
Duct
HPDCS
Contractor is responsible for coordination and proper relation of all work to the building
structure and to work of all trades. The Contractor shall verify all air handling unit and
building framing dimensions and coordinate same with ductwork fabrication.
Class Water)
Pressure-Velocity Classification
A. Table of Values
High
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
I 1 O-inch
6-inch
4-inch
3-inch
Pressure
Positive
Positive
Positive or
Negative
Positive or
Negative
Velocity
2500 FPM Up
2000 FPM Up
2000 FPM Up
4000 FPM Dn
Seal Class
A, seal all seams, joints,
fasteners, Penetrations
and connections
A, seal all seams, joints,
fasteners, Penetrations
and connections
A, seal all seams, joints,
fasteners, Penetrations
and connections
A, seal all seams, joints,
fasteners, Penetrations
and connections
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-2
SMACNA
Duct
LPDCS
Low
Pressure
Low
Pressure
FGDCS
1 -inch Positive or
Negative
%-inch Positive or
Negative
Static
Pressure
Rating
Class Water Pressure
Pressure Negative
I I
Velocity
2500 FPM Dn
2500 FPM Dn
2000 FPM Dn
2000 FPM
Seal Class
B, Snaplock-seams
sealed; other type seams;
not more than one
unsealed longitudinal
seam on perimeter. Seal
transverse joints and
fitting connections c, Snaplock-fittings
sealed; maximum of two
unsealed longitudinal
seams on the perimeter.
Seal transverse joints.
D, Comer of transverse
joints (including branch
intersections) sealed.
Seal entire transverse
joints if joint perimeters
are less than 4 feet.
Shiplap sealed; Reinforce
ducts with tie-rod systems
or channels and tee-bar
systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Ductwork Materials and Fabrication
A, General Ductwork Requirements
1. All duct construction shall conform to the latest edition of the SMACNA
Duct Manual, except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the
Drawings. Unless specified otherwise, ductwork shall be fabricated per
SMACNA low pressure class, with static pressure rating of 2" w.g.
(positive or negative) and suitable for air velocities of up to 2500 fpm.
Except as noted, all reinforcement shall be external.
Flat oval and round fittings shall be factory fabricated.
Alternate Joining Methods: As an alternate to specified SMACNA joining
methods, Contractor may propose proprietary joining systems for
Owner's approval, provided suitability can be adequately demonstrated.
Manufacturers: Ductmate Industries, Inc., Ward Industries.
2.
3.
4.
-
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-3
B. Ductwork Construction
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ductwork shall be constructed in
accordance with the following requirements:
1. Provide fittings, branches, inlets and outlets in such a manner that air
turbulence is reduced to a minimum. Construct all fittings, elbows, and
transitions to provide a minimum of noise and resistance. Unless shown
otherwise on the Drawings, construct elbows with a minimum radius of 1-
1/2 times the width (or depth). Where space conditions necessitate
abrupt changes in direction (or as elsewhere indicated), use square
elbows with turning vanes.
Round and oval elbows shall be 5 gore for 90 degrees and 3 gore for 45
degrees, with an inside radius equal to the duct diameter.
Transitions: Increase and reduce duct sizes gradually. Limit transition
angle (for each side), to 15 degrees.
Branch .Take-Offs (carrying 25% or less of duct main): Provide flanged
increased area branch take-off (45 degree entry, "shoe' type) or 45
degree lateral wye takeoffs. See SMACNA Standards, Figs. 2-6, 3-4.
Conical fittings may be used for spiral round and oval ductwork. See
SMACNA Standards, Fig. 3-5.
Branch Take-Off directly to side outlet for register or grille: Provide
increased area tap.
Main Take-Off (carrying more than 25% of duct main): Provide an
increasing branch elbow with an inside radius equal to branch duct width.
Size branch and main at elbow for equal velocity. See SMACNA
Standards, Figure 2-5, type 4A.
Crossbreak or bead rectangular ductwork (SMACNA Standards, Fig. 1-8)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C. Ductwork Materials
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Minimum rectangular duct gage shall be as follows:
a. Ducts through 12" wide: 24 Gage
b. Ducts 13" through 30" wide: 22 Gage
C. Ducts 31" through 60' wide: 20 Gage
d. Ducts 60" and larger: 18 Gage
All rectangular panels above 12" in width shall be cross broken on all four
sides.
All round and oval duct shall be spiral, with minimum gage per SMACNA
Standards, Tables 3-2A, 3-28, 3-4 and manufacturers recommendations.
Reinforcing: Galvanized structural steel per ASTM A36 and ASTM A123;
Mill galvanized steel sheet per ASTM A527, Coating Designation G-90.
Bolts and Fasteners: Carbon steel, zinc coated per ASTM A1 53
Welding Materials: Refer to SMACNA "Guidelines for Welding Sheet
Metal" for applicable requirements.
Caulk: elastomer caulk, UL listed and per NFPA 90A.
Duct Sealant: Hardcast, United McGill, Polymer Adhesives No. 11,
Ductmate Seal all transverse joints per SMACNA Class C with Hardcast,
vinyl acrylic duct sealant, nonflammable wet or dry, UL listed, with flame
spread 0, fuel contributed 0, smoke developed 0, or equal.
September 2004 Ductwork and Accessories Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 15890-4
9. Manufactured duct joining systems may be used provided they are
demonstrated to meet the requirements of SMACNA for the pressure
class, by independent testing laboratory data. Comply with all
requirements of leakage testing. Do not use plastic clips with these
couplings.
Gaskets for Flanged Duct Joints: 1/4-in.-thick1 full face, closed cell,
expanded Neoprene sponge in accordance with ASTM D1056,
Grade SCE-43.
Inorganic Zinc Rich Paint (Touch-up painting of damaged galvanized
coating): Manufacturers: Carboline, "Carbo-Zinc", Tnemec, or Ameron.
10.
1 1.
D. Galvanized Steel Ductwork
1. ASTM A527 mill galvanized steel sheet, 1.25 oz per sq. ft. zinc coating on
each side in conformance with coating designation G-90.
E. Polvvinvl Chloride Coated Galvanized Steel Ductwork (PCD)
1. Except where noted, comply with Galvanized Steel Ductwork paragraph
above. Factory coat interior and exterior with a 4 mil thick coat of fused
polyvinyl chloride. Construct and install horizontal ductwork and fittings
with longitudinal seam located on top of duct.
Connections shall be corrosion resistant using stainless steel screws.
Manufacturers: Foremost, Tangent, United McGill
2.
3.
F. Stainless Steel Ductwork
All duct material shall conform to ASTM AI 67, type 31 6.
G. Flexible Ductwork
Flexible ductwork shall be factory insulated, 4" W.G. negative to 6" W.G. positive
pressure class acoustical duct, with full internal liner to shield air from fiberglass.
Manufacturers: Flexmaster Type 8M, Atco Insul-Flex, Flex-Aire, Hart and Cooley
(Genflex). All duct, insulation and adhesives shall be fire and smoke resistant in
conformance with NFPA 9OA and UL 181 for Class 1 duct.
2.02 Volume Control Dampers
PI. General Volume Damper Requirements
1. Provide factory fabricated volume dampers in all supply, return and
exhaust branch ducts and where indicated on Drawings, constructed per
SMACNA Standards, Figures 2-1 2 and 2-1 3 with locking quadrant and 8"
maximum blade width.
2. Dampers in PVC coated ductwork shall be PVC coated and in stainless
steel ductwork shall be of stainless steel construction.
3. Volume damper may be integral with branch take-off fitting.
Manufacturers: Flexmaster STO-D. -
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-5
B. For Svstems Uo To 2" WG Construction
1. Manufacturers: Ruskin MD-25 or MD-35 (rectangular), MDRS-25 (round),
American Warming and Ventilation, Arrow, Krueger, Vent Products,
Young Regulator
C. For Systems 2" to 6" WG Construction
1. High Performance Rectangular Dampers: 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge
equivalent airfoil blades, concealed opposed blade linkage, continuous
shaft, low leakage jamb and edge seals.
Round Dampers: Steel, sleeved in duct style, with neoprene blade seal
Manufacturers: Ruskin CD60 (rectangular), CDRS-25 (round), American
Warming and Ventilation, Arrow, Krueger, Vent Products, Young
2.
3.
Regulator I
2.03 Fire Dampers
A. Provide UL labeled fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, where
shown on Drawings. Install in approved manner, per manufacturer's instructions
and "SMACNA State Fire Marshal Fire and Smoke Damper Clarification 1994".
Fire Dampers: Type B (curtain out of the air stream) spring loaded for dynamic
operation, 1-1/2 hour fire rated, with sleeve and closure angles, 212F fusible
link,. Manufacturers: Ruskin Model IBD2, Air Balance, Inc., American Warming
and Ventilation, Nailor, Vent Products
I
B.
C. Install damper integral with assembly being protected. When fire damper cannot
be installed in assembly, install fire damper in 10 ghuge sleeve, and attach
sleeve to assembly with retaining angles.
D. Fire dampers located in stainless steel or PVC coated ductwork shall be
constructed of stainless steel.
2.04 Air Turning Vanes
I
A. Provide factory manufactured turning vanes in each elbow where inside radius is
less than the width of the duct, per SMACNA Standards Figures 2-2, 2-3, and 2-
4. Mount the outboard-most vane irl the duct heal. ~Vahes shall be spaced
across the entire corner diagonal.
Turning vanes longer than 12" shall be double wall. B.
C. Turning vanes in negative pressure ductwork with pressure rating above 2" shall
be installed in accordance with SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standard.
Turning vanes shall not be installed in stainless steel or PVC coated exhaust
duct. Provide radius elbows. I
I
D.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
I
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-6
E. Turning vanes are not required in elbows with area less than one square foot.
Provide long radius elbows.
F. Manufacturers: Aero-dyne (high efficiency type), Ductmate, Sheet Metal
Connector, Duro-Dyne, Dyne Air
2.05 Flexible Duct Connections
A. UL listed 30 ounce, waterproof and fire-retardant, air-tight woven fibrous glass
cloth, double coated with chloroprene or chlorosulphonated polyethylene,
suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. Clear width, not including
clamping section, shall be 6 inches.
B. Cover outdoor flexible connections with 16 gage sheet metal.
C. Manufacturers: Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventglass", United McGill, Duro-Dyne,
Ductmate.
2.06 Duct Access Doors
A. Access door materials and pressure rating shall match ductwork. Provide seal
gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, access
doors shall be double panel type with minimum one inch thick insulation between
panels.
B. Access doors shall be sized to provide appropriate access for service, minimum
8" x 8" for hand access, minimum 12" x 18" for shoulder access.
C. Construct access doors of galvanized sheet metal 2 gauges heavier than the
duct, with rolled edges, hinges and Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventlock" #260 latch.
Make airtight with neoprene gasketing, and provide 1" x 1" x 1/8" galvanized iron
frame for installation in ductwork.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three
hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up
to 24 x 48 inches. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not
acceptable.
E. Manufacturers: Ruskin, Air Balance Inc., American Warming and Ventilation,
Ductmate, Duro-Dyne
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-7
2.07 Duct Test Holes
A. Provide permanent, factory fabricated duct test holes, with air tight flanged
fittings and screw cap where indicated on Drawings. Provide extended neck
fittings to clear insulation. Manufacturers: Ventlock Model 699
2.08 Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Performance of all units shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with
ADC Standards 1062 A2, "Air Diffusing Equipment Test Code" and ASHRAE
Standard 3368 "Method of Testing for Rating the Acoustic Performance of Air
Control and Terminal Devices and Similar Equipment." Diffusers, registers, and
grilles shall be off-white finish, unless noted otherwise.
Registers and Ceiling Diffusers: Registers and ceiling diffusers installed in
ceilings shall be carefully located so as to create a symmetrical pattern with other
ceiling mounted components.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Diffusers: Diffusers shall be 24" x 24" steel
material, without damper. Neck size to match duct sizes as indicated on
Drawings.
Supply Registers: Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, registers shall be
provided with individually adjustable horizontal and vertical louvers with an
adjustable opposed blade damper, steel material. Rectangular size shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
Return and Exhaust Registers: Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, return
and exhaust registers shall have 0 degree, 112" blade spacing and an adjustable
opposed blade damper. Rectangular size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
Manufacturers: Titus (TMSA supply diffusers; PAR return diffusers; 300 FS
supply registers; 350RL return registers), Krueger, Metal Aire, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Ductwork Installation
A. Before fabrication, check all ductwork with the building construction for
dimensions locations, clearances, etc. Fabricate duct with any necessary
variations to conform to the details of the construction of the building, to suit the
space available, and to fit the equipment furnished. Provide necessary offsets
and transitions to avoid interference with building structure elements, piping, or
equipment.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating
and maintenance activities. The entire duct system must be substantially
constructed, rigidly erected and free of any duct vibration and/or noises.
B. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc rich paint.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-8
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers in a
sheet metal collar and seal to building construction.
Set plenum doors 6" to 12" above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static
pressure holds door in closed position.
Provide temporary closures on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from
entering ductwork system.
PVC coated ductwork: Repair PVC coated steel ductwork where coating is
damaged or exposed by connections.
Provide straight runs of ductwork at equipment, fans, coils, air terminal units, and
humidifiers per manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide flexible connector where ductwork connects to fans, air handling units
and other rotating equipment and where indicated on Drawings.
Flexible Ductwork: Unless noted otherwise, install flexible ductwork at maximum
lengths of 5 feet. Provide sheet metal elbow fittings for 90 degree turns.
Cover all ductwork exposed to weather with 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal as
an outer layer, seal all outer layer joints with a minimum of 2 coats of asphalt
based roofing compound painted with aluminum paint.
Indicated sizes are to the inside of acoustical linings. Increase the size of all
sheet metal ducts as required to accommodate acoustical linings.
Flash all ducts passing through the roof, floor or through exterior walls.
3.02 Duct Access Doors
A. Provide access doors to access fire dampers, control dampers, fans, coils,
filters, air flow measuring stations, humidifiers, controls or items requiring
periodic inspection, adjustment, maintenance or cleaning, and where indicated
on the Drawings.
B. Access doors shall comply with SMACNA Standards, Figures 2-10, 2-IOM and
2-1 1.
C. Where specifically noted on Drawings, provide access doors suitable for
commercial duct cleaning, space with a frequency and at points which will permit
ready access to duct with no duct or insulation cutting.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-9
3.03 Ductwork Hangers and Supports
A. Hang and support ductwork as shown on the Drawings and per SMACNA
Standards, Chapter 4.
B. Provide supplemental structural steel to span building framing and joists where
required. Deflection of supplemental structural steel shall be limited to
lengtW240 of fhe span.
C. Ductwork shall not be hung from furring, suspended ceilings, metal floor decking,
metal roof decking, piping, other ducts, or equipment.
Provide at least two supports for each length of duct. Install supports on both
sides of duct turns, branch fittings and transitions.
Where vertical ducts penetrate roof or floor openings, provide two horizontal strut
channel or angle supports attached to the long side of the duct and anchored to
the floor or roof support structure.
D.
E.
F. Duct shall be attached to strut channels with solid galvanized steel straps and
bolted channel clip angles.
G. Use strut channel or angle iron "v" construction supports or similarly rigid
construction for ducting which needs lateral support.
Anchor duct and supports to prevent swaying. After system start-up replace or
otherwise alleviate condition of any duct support element which vibrates.
- H.
I. Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, hang equipment
independently of the ductwork.
3.04 Flexible Connections
A. Provide flexible connections per SMACNA Standards, Figure 2-1 7. Install
flexible connections between sheet metal work and vibrating equipment, where
ducts cross building expansion joints, and where indicated on the Drawings.
Seal ends with caulk.
B. Check connections during operation for leaks and binding.
3.05 Duct Test Holes
A. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing
purposes.
3.06 Air Diffusion-Devices
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position
to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-1 0
B. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
3.07 Painting
A. Where interior of duct and duct accessories would be visible through air diffusion
devices, paint the viewed interior flat black. Coordinate work with architectural
finishes and colors.
6. For Plenum Returns: Where construction above ceiling would be visible through
return air grilles, provide black sheet metal baffle with turned edges suspended
from building construction. Size and position of baffle to not restrict air flow.
Where space above ceiling precludes use of baffle, paint visible building
surfaces flat black.
3.08 Ductwork Sealing, Inspecting and Leakage Testing
A. Seal, inspect and test ductwork per SMACNA Standards, prior to insulating or
otherwise concealing ductwork.
B. Seal ductwork per SMACNA seal classifications specified in Table 1.06.A herein.
C. Visually inspect all ductwork: Place fan system in operation, or pressurize
ductwork with portable fan. Inspect ductwork for audible leaks, and leaks
perceptible to hand 2" from duct. Reseal all perceptible leaks.
D. Duct Leakage Testing:
1.
2.
Conduct ductwork leak testing for all ductwork with pressure classification
of more than 2" WG, positive or negative .
Prior to fabrication and installation, develop and submit for approval a
ductwork testing plan, indicating locations of temporary caps, square feet
of ductwork, test pressure, leakage class and allowable leakage.
3. Notify the Owner at least (2) days prior to each test.
4. Provide necessary test apparatus and all required instrumentation.
Provide, and later remove all temporary caps or seals necessary to
complete leak testing.
After completing visual inspection, conduct ductwork leakage tests at the
specified pressure class for the duct. Leakage shall not exceed a
SMACNA Leakage Class 6. Reseal and retest as required to achieve
specified leakage.
6. Submit leakage test report for approval, using SMACNA or other
approved form.
5.
3.09 Ductwork Cleaning
A. On existing ductwork, when cleaning is specifically required by Drawings, the
following procedure shall be used:
1. Supply, return, and exhaust grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be
removed. Supply air outlets shall be covered with filter media.
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
1 5890- 1 1
2. Entire duct system interior shall be cleaned using HEPA filtered portable
vacuum. Duct size inadequate for entry shall have access doors installed
at 10' to 15' spacing by Sheet Metal Trade.
When chemical cleaning is specifically required by Drawings, spray all
interior surfaces with degreaser and allow time for chemicals to activate.
Rinse interior using 1000 psi minimum hot water power washer. Provide
means for containment of liquid. Remove liquids using wet vacuums.
When chemical disinfecting is specifically required by Drawings on supply
air systems downstream of filtration media, spray or fog interior surface
with disinfectant.
5. Internally lined acoustical construction shall be vacuumed with soft
bristled brush and hand wiped with chemical or damp cloth.
6. Wash all diffusers, grilles, and registers in chemical degreaser and
reinstall.
3.
4.
END OF SECTION
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Ductwork and Accessories
15890-1 2
SECTION 16040
SHORT CIRCUlT/COORDINATlON STUDY
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
The Contractor shall provide short circuit and protective device evaluation and
coordination study to verify protective devices selected and selective tripping
coordination for proposed facilities.
The evaluations and study shall include all portions of the proposed electrical distribution
system from the normal power source or sources down to and including the smallest
adjustable trip circuit breaker in the distribution system. Normal system connections
and those which result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the
study.
The study shall be performed, stamped and signed by a registered electrical engineer in
the State of California. Credentials of the individual@) performing the study and
background of the firm shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to start of the
work. A minimum of five (5) years experience in power system analysis is required for
the individual in charge of the project. The firm performing the study shall provide
assistance during start up as required.
The Engineer performing the system studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of
the required data immediately after award of the contract and the Contractor shall
expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies prior to final approval
of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or release of the equipment for
manufacture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Short Circuit and Protective Device Evaluation and Coordination Study
A. The short circuit study shall be performed in accordance with the latest
applicable IEEE and ANSI standards. Provide calculation methods and
assumptions, the base per unit quantities selected, one-line diagrams, source
impedance data including power company system characteristics, typical
calculations, tabulations of calculation quantities and results, conclusions, and
recommendations. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when
applicable) duties for an assumed 3-phase bolted fault at each supply switchgear
lineup, unit substation primary and secondary terminals, low-voltage switchgear
lineup, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent
branch circuit panelboard, and other significant locations throughout the system.
Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas, including the
associated zero sequence impedance data. Include in tabulations fault
impedance, X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit kVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
November 1997 Short CircuitlCoordination Study
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 16040-1
B. In the protective device evaluation and coordination study include utility company
device characteristics, system medium-voltage equipment relay and device
characteristics, low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics,
pertinent transformer characteristics, pertinent motor and generator
characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices.
Include at least all devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder
circuit breaker in each motor control center, and main breaker in branch
panelboards.
Provide time-current curves graphically indicating the coordination proposed for
the system. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram
with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by that
particular curve sheet. Include a detailed description of each protective device
identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics.
Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time
delay settings.
Include all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices. Include
manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse characteristics.
Show transformer full load and 150, 400, or 600 percent currents, transformer
magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and significant
symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Terminate device characteristic
curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault
current to which the device is exposed.
C. When emergency generator is provided, include phase and ground coordination
of the generator protective devices. Show the generator decrement curve and
damage curve along with the operating characteristic of the protective devices.
Obtain the information from the generator manufacturer and include the
generator actual impedance value, time constants and current boost data in the
study. Do not use typical values for the generator.
D. For motor control circuits, show the MCC full-load current plus symmetrical and
asymmetrical of the largest motor starting current and time to ensure protective
devices will not trip during major or group start operation.
2.02 Study Report
A. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. Six
(6) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted to Owner.
B. The report shall include the following sections:
1. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study.
2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings
versus calculated short circuit duties, and commentary regarding same.
November 1997
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Short CircuiVCoordination Study
16040-2
3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of
relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary
regarding same.
4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for
interpretation of computer printout.
2.03 Modifications Required by Study
The Contractor shall coordinate the study results with the manufacturer and supplier of
the electrical equipment to incorporate the recommendations and modifications therein,
prior to fabrication.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Utility Company Approval
A. Where required, copies of the final report shall be submitted to the utility
company for their review and approval. Approved copies of the report shall be
submitted to the Owner.
3.02 Field Settings
A. The Contractor shall petform field adjustments of the protective devices as
required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall
be in accordance with the approved short circuit study, protective device
evaluation study, and protective device coordination study.
B. Necessary field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to
equipment to accomplish conformance with the approved short circuit and
protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
November 1997
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Short Circuit/Coordination Study
16040-3
.-
SECTION 16420
SOLID STATE MOTOR CONTROLLERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Specific Project Scope
The work included in this Section shall consist of furnishing and installing reduced
voltage solid state motor controllers (SSMC) within Motor Control Center as shown on
the Drawings and specified herein, including all accessories and controls necessary for
a complete and operable system.
The equipment furnished under this Section shall be required to operate electric motor
driven equipment specified elsewhere by Technical Specifications. Contractor shall be
responsible to coordinate the work under this Section, with all other related equipment
and the work shown on the Drawings. Load, torque, horsepower, and ramp capabilities
and ranges of SSMCs shall meet or exceed that of the driven equipment.
1.02 Specific SSMC Requirements
Contractor shall furnish and install SSMCs with bypass contactors to drive Pumping
Units 4, 5, and 6 in the potable water pump station as shown on the Drawings and
specified in the Special Construction Provisions and Technical Specifications.
SSMC units shall be rated to match the full load amperage of the pumping unit motor;
125 Hp with full load motor RPM of 1770.
SSMC components, operation, and features shall be as specified herein and as shown
on the drawings. SSMC bypass contactors and controls shall be provided. SSMC shall
provide soft start, soft stop and operation once at full speed with bypass contactors.
SSMC units shall be housed within the MCC enclosure. MCC enclosure construction,
including ventilation and heating, shall be as specified in Section 16400, "Distribution
Switchboard and Motor Control Centers Technical Specification". SSMC manufacturer
shall size ventilation for the SSMC MCC section.
1.03 QualityManufacturer
Contractor shall provide complete, reliable, fully tested, adjustable SSMC systems
suitable for manual or automatic start/stop operation. The SSMCs shall be as
manufactured by Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, Allen Bradley, Square D, or equal.
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers
16420-1
1.04 Submittals
A. Shop Drawinas
Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical data for all
equipment and components, including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Design capabilities and operating parameters.
2) Catalog cut sheets and data for all control devices.
3) Enclosure drawings, including overall dimensions, anchor hole sizes and
locations, and exterior door elevations showing location of all door
mounted components, including lights, switches, meters, controllers, and
corresponding nameplates. General arrangement drawings of enclosure
interior, including location and identification of all internal components.
4)
5)
Enclosure cooling system (if necessary) and design calculations.
System schematic diagrams, block diagrams, interconnection diagrams
and ladder diagrams.
6) Detailed specifications and data covering all necessary components,
including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, switches, bypass contactors,
equipment, status lights, and push buttons.
metal oxide varistors (MOVs), silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs), cooling -
7) Manufacturer's warranty guaranteeing the operation of the SSMC against
failure due to defects for two (2) years from date of project acceptance.
During this period, parts and labor shall be supplied at no cost to the
Owner.
B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions
Operation and maintenance manuals (four (4) copies) shall include: design
capabilities, operating parameters, recommended ranges, system schematic
diagrams, block diagrams, interconnection diagrams, ladder diagrams, complete
wiring diagrams, enclosure drawings, safety provisions and precautions,
standard publications on all major items furnished, parts list with specification
packets on the entire unit, list of recommended spare parts, and installation
diagrams. Manuals shall be completely indexed and include step-by-step
procedures for the operation and maintenance of the SSMC as installed. The
maintenance portion of the manual shall include preventive maintenance and
troubleshooting for the entire system. Contractor shall provide approved
operations and maintenance manuals at least 30 days prior to SSMC startup and
testing.
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers
16420-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -
2.01 Solid State Motor Controller (SSMC)
A.
B.
C.
D.
General
The SSMC units shall be integrated, solid state systems, designed to energize
the electric motor drivers for the driven equipment specified. SSMC units shall
be as specified herein, including all requirements and modifications listed in
Section 1.02, Specific SSMC Requirements.
Environmental Conditions
Unless otherwise specified, the SSMC units shall be capable of operation under
any combination of the following conditions without mechanical or electrical
damage.
Ambient Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Altitude:
0 to +50 degrees C (32" to 122" F)
Less than 95% non-condensing
300 ft above sea level
Ratinq
SSMC shall be sized based on the maximum motor horsepower and required
starting and operating torque of the selected equipment to be driven or the
minimum output as shown on the Drawings or specified herein, whichever is
greater.
Basic DescriDtion
The SSMC units shall operate at 480 volts (i15%), three phase, 60 Hertz (e
Hertz), and control voltage of 120 volts. The SSMC unit shall provide a smooth
and stepless acceleration (on startup) and deceleration ramp (on shut down) to
reduce hydraulic surges and inrush current.
Power semiconductors shall be SCRs connected in an inverse parallel
configuration for three phase power. Peak inverse voltage (PIV) rating shall be
1,200 V at 460 (or less) volts.
SCR assemblies shall contain MOVs and resistor capacitors to protect the SCR
from line voltage transients. The MOVs shall maintain voltages at 10% below
the PIV of the power device. Voltage transient suppression shall not cause motor
to energize. The resistor capacitor shall prevent the motor from misfiring due to
the dV/dt characteristics of the SCRs.
Each power phase shall have a current transformer to monitor current for
protection against phase loss, phase imbalance, instantaneous overload, or
shorted SCRs.
September 2004. Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers
16420-3
E.
SSMC shall have a closed loop voltage ramp start with current limit override to
produce a smooth acceleration of the motor load. The control shall provide
adjustments for initial torque, maximum starting current, and ramping time. A full
voltage output signal will be generated once the motor reaches full speed (full
voltage). Said signal shall be derived from internal control measurements and
shall not be based on time. Bypass contactors shall be energized by the full
voltage output signal. Once the unit receives a stop signal, the bypass
contactors shall drop out, and the SCRs shall provide a smooth, stepless
deceleration.
Unless othewise specified, each SSMC unit shall be provided with bypass
contactors. Contactors shall be vacuum contactors with full current ratings for
specified motor loads. Contactors shall have as a minimum, two normally open
and two normally closed auxiliary contacts rated for control voltage of 120 volts.
The SSMC units shall be suitable for use with standard NEMA Design B squirrel-
cage induction motors having a 1.15 service factor or with existing standard
NEMA Design B squirrel-cage induction motor@) with nameplate data as shown
on the Drawings, without derating and without requiring any motor modifications.
The SSMC units shall operate satisfactorily when connected to a bus supplying
other solid state power equipment which may be causing up to 10% total
harmonic voltage distortion.
All equipment and work shall comply with the latest applicable standards of
ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC.
Features and ComDonents
Unless otherwise specified, the SSMC units stiall be provided with the following
minimum features and components:
An input circuit breaker shall be supplied to provide NEC required branch
circuit protection. The circuit breaker shall be of the molded case type,
sized to provide a short circuit interrupting capacity as shown on
Drawings, but no less than 35,000 RMS symmetrical amps (minimum),
and shall be mechanically interlocked with the SSMC unit enclosure door.
Where more than one (1) SSMC unit is provided in a line-up, a bus bar
matching the rating of the motor control center (MCC) shall be provided
unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.
Each SSMC shall be provided with current overloads.
Controls and Indicators: Each SSMC shall be equipped with door-
mounted controls and indicators as shown on Drawings and as specified
herein:
a. Power on indicator lamp (light).
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers 16420-4
b. SSMC malfunction indicator lamp.
c. SSMC fault reset push button.
d. Motor thermal and motor overload reset push buttons.
e. Elapsed time meter (six (6) digit).
h. Indicator lamps for motor running, motor off, motor high
temperature, and motor overload.
1. On/off switch for emergency bypass of SSMC and operation with
bypass contactors.
i- On/off switch for power saving, for selection to operate when at
full speed with bypass contractor.
k. Other functions and devices shown on the Drawings or otherwise
specified.
F. Protective Features
Unless otherwise specified, the SSMC unit shall be provided with the following
protective features:
1) Phase loss and undervoltage protection.
2) Power unit overtemperature protection.
3) Input line fuses.
4) peak.
Noise suppression per NEMA ICs 2-230 showering arc test at 2,000 V
5) Overload Ratings Duration
% FLA @ 25" C (seconds)
600 15
300 60
200 120
115 Continuous
G. Parameter Settinas
The following system configuration settings shall be provided and shall be field
adjustable through the keypaddisplay unit. Except for motor nameplate data, all
parameters shall be adjustable while the unit is on-line.
1) Current Limit: 150% to 500% rated current
September 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers 16420-5
2) Acceleration/Deceleration: 0.5 to 30 seconds, independently I
adjustable
3) Current Limit Shutdown Time: 1 to 30 seconds
4) Current Unbalance/Phase Loss Alarm: 5% to 50% unbalance
H. Diagnostic Features
SSMC units shall be provided with diagnostic features, including monitoring for
full voltage and distorted SCR. Diagnostic conditions shall be displayed via an
operator interface or by individual LEDs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. All equipment furnished hereunder shall be installed and aligned under the
supervision of a factory-trained service engineer, other than a sales
representative.
B. Conduit stub-ups for interconnected cables and remote cables shall be located
and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations
which shall be subject to Owner's review and approval.
C. The Contractor shall have the manufacturer examine the Contract Documents as
to the operating environment that the SSMC unit will be subjected to, and advise
the Owner prior to bidding of any potential problems, which could prevent the
SSMC from functioning as intended, and its recommendations for preventing
expected problems.
D. Under no circumstances are any portions of the SSMC unit to be energized
without authorization from the manufacturer's representative.
3.02 Testing and Training
A. Upon completion of manufacturing, each SSMC unit shall be factory inspected
and fully tested with a motor load. Certification that the factory inspections and
load tests have been successfully performed shall be submitted to the Owner
prior to shipment.
B. Contractor shall include in his bid the services of a factory-trained field
engineer's time to assist in installation, inspect, make final adjustments and
operational checks, perform field testing and instruct the Owner's operation
personnel in the use of the equipment. Classroom type instruction (two (2)
hours, minimum) shall address the details of operation, routine maintenance,
and repair of the equipment supplied under this Section, and shall be at a time
acceptable to both the Owner and manufacturer.
C. Field testing shall be witnessed by the Owner. Prior to the commencement of
field testing service engineer shall set and/or adjust all operating parameters
according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
September 2004 Solid State Motor Controllers Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 16420-6
SSMC field testing shall be conducted concurrently with field testing of the driven
equipment. SSMC performance shall be documented by obtaining motor inrush
amperage, start ramp time, stop ramp time, and output: voltage, amperage,
power factor and power. Readings shall be obtained from Contractor furnished
metering equipment. A written report covering the field engineer's inspection
findings, field test readings, field test results and installation certification shall be
submitted to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
September 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Solid State Motor Controllers
16420-7
_- SECTION 16050
BAS1 C E LECTRl CAL S P ECI FI CAT1 0 NS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
Description
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials to provide a complete and
operable electrical system, all accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Reference Codes and Standards
All electrical equipment and materials, including the design, construction, and installation
thereof, shall comply with the following codes and standards (latest editions), as
applicable. Where two codes or standards are at variance, the most stringent
requirements shall govern:
I
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
National Electric Code (NEC).
Basic Electrical Regulations, Title 24, State Building Standards, California
Administrative Code.
Low Voltage Electrical Safety Orders, Title 8, Division of Industrial Safety, State of
California.
City and County Electrical Codes.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Safety and Health Standards
(29CFR1910 and 29CFR1926), State Building Standards, and applicable local
codes and regulations.
All equipment and material furnished by the Contractor shall be listed by and shall bear the
label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory accet3able to the local aaencv with iurisdiction over the electrical work.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1
1.03 Submittals
A. Shop Drawinns
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical data for all
equipment and components, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Catalog data including catalog cut sheets, bulletins, brochures, etc.
Applicable sizes, model numbers, and options shall be clearly marked and
delineated.
2. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, and internal wiring diagrams.
3. Equipment and material temperature limitations.
4. Drawings for all grounding work not specifically shown.
5. Nameplates for all electrical panels, including nameplate material, lettering .
height, and proposed inscriptions.
B. ODeration and Maintenance Manuals
Contractor shall submit detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each item
of equipment in accordance with the Special Construction Provisions.
C. Record Drawinas
Contractor shall maintain and keep current a complete record set of construction
drawings showing every change from the Contract Drawings and Specifications
and the exact locations, sizes, and types of equipment and material installed.
Record drawings shall show all conduit runs (sizes and number), circuits, and
conductors (sizes and numbers). Record drawings shall show depths and
routing of all concealed and below grade electrical installations. Record
drawings shall be available to the Owner during construction and shall be
delivered to the Owner upon project completion.
1.04 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliverv
Deliver electrical materials and equipment in manufacturer's original cartons and
containers with seals intact. Deliver conductors on sealed reels. Deliver large
multi-component equipment in sections to facilitate field handling and installation.
B. Storaue
Unless designed for outdoor exposure, store electrical equipment and material of
the ground and under cover. Equipment and material shall be protected from
weather, corrosion, contamination, and deterioration. Dents, marred finishes,
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-2
and other damage shall be repaired to its original condition or replaced as
directed by the Owner.
C. Handlinq
All equipment and material shall be handled in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Large or heavy items shall be lifted at the
points designed by the manufacturer. Equipment and material shall be handled
and installed as necessary to prevent damage.
1.05 Public Utilities
A. Contractor shall obtain electrical service requirements from public utility
furnishing electrical power to the project. Contractor shall coordinate installation
of power service with public utility. Contractor shall obtain, at his expense, all
permits, licenses, and inspections required for electrical construction work by
public utilities having jurisdiction.
B. Contractor shall furnish and install all service conduit, fittings, transformer pad@),
manholes, vaults, grounding, and conductors not furnished by the serving utility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 General I
-- All equipment and materials shall be new, shall be listed by UL, and shall bear the UL
label, where UL requirements apply. All equipment and material shall be of industrial
grade and be capable of long term, reliable, and trouble-free service. Similar equipment
and material items shall be products of the same manufacturer.
2.02 Grounding
A. Grounding and grounding components shall comply with the applicable
requirement of the NEC, Article 250.
B. Grounding cable shall be stranded copper and shall be sized in accordance with
Code requirements when sizes are not shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall
submit shop drawings for all grounding work not shown on the Drawings.
C. Grounding rods shall conform to ANSI/UL 467 and shall be copper-clad steel,
3/4-inch (minimum) in diameter and 10 feet (minimum) in length. Rods shall be
driven in the ground at least 9' -6" deep.
Provide the number of rods required to obtain proper ground resistance, as
applicable to all manholes, padmount switches, transformers, service entrances,
etc.
D. Ground rod mechanical connector bodies shall be manufactured from high
strength, high conductivity cast copper alloy material. Bolts, nuts, washers and
October 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-3
lockwashers shall be made of silicon bronze and supplied as a part of the
connector body and shall be of the two bolt type.
Split bolt connector types are not allowed.
The connectors shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 467 and be clearly
marked with manufacturer and conductor size.
E. Ground rod compression connectors shall be manufactured from pure wrought
copper. The conductivity of this material shall be no less than 99% by IACS
standards.
The connectors shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of IEEE
837, latest revision. The connectors shall be clearly marked with the
manufacturer and conductor size.
The installation of the connectors shall be made with a compression, tool and die
system, as recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Each
connector shall be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound.
2.03 Manholes and Pull Boxes
A. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall be of precast concrete, designed for H-20 traffic
loading. Concrete sections shall modular with tongue and groove joints. A
continuous waterproof gasket shall be provided at all section and slab joints.
Manhole and Pull-Box minimum inside dimensions shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall be equipped with galvanized steel
pulling irons opposite each ductbank entrance. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall
be provided with a sump opening and one (1) one-inch ground rod opening in the
base section. Sump opening shall be provided with cast iron perforated cover.
Manhole and Pull-Boxes shall be placed on a 12" thick crushed rock base.
B. Manhole covers shall be cast iron, 30" round (minimum), designed for H-20
traffic loading, and supported on the necking section. Pull-Box covers shall be
hot dipped galvanized, checkered plate steel suitable for H-20 traffic loading
(unless noted otherwise), and bolted down to cast-in-place hot dipped galvanized
steel frames with stainless steel hardware. Manhole and Pull-Box covers shall
be marked "High Voltage Electric", unless noted otherwise.
C. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall be provided with cable supports as required to
support cable at 3-fOOt (minimum) intervals. Cable supports shall be fabricated
from hot dipped galvanized or fiberglass strut channel and attached to slotted
galvanized steel channel cast-in-place inserts. Provide glazed porcelain
insulators with channel clamps for support channels. Strap cable to insulators
with plastic tie wraps. All phase and ground cables in each circuit shall be kept
together and contained onhn the porcelain cable supports. No phase cable shall
be run separate from the other two phases and ground.
--
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-4
D. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall be provided with knockouts for connections to all
underground conduit and ductbanks. Ductbank entrances shall be grouted flush
with non-shrink grout. Ducts and conduits shall be terminated with flush-end
bells.
E. One ground rod shall be provided for each manhole and pull-box, unless
otherwise noted. Provide #4/0 bare stranded copper ground wire completely
around the inside perimeter of each manholes and pull-box and anchor to walls.
Connect the ground wire to the ground rod. Bond the bare copper ground wire
to any splice shield wires, ground wires, cable racks, cover frames, sump frames
and other metal items in the manholes. All separate ground wires accompanying
circuits shall be grounded in each manhole passed through.
F. Manholes and Pull-Boxes shall be manufactured by Brooks, Quikset, or equal.
2.04 Conduit
A. General
Each length of conduit shall bear the UL label and be a minimum size of 3/4", unless noted otherwise. Exposed elbows shall be standard radius sweeps
meeting the requirements of the NEC. Buried or concealed elbows shall be long
radius sweeps.
B. Riqid Steel Conduit
1. Rigid steel conduit shall be Schedule 40 steel, pipe size, finished inside
and out by hot-dipped galvanizing, and shall conform with ANSI C80.1
and UL. All rigid steel conduit in direct contact with the ground or
concrete shall be protected by double wrapping with 20 mil PVC tape.
2. Couplings shall be galvanized steel.
3. Insulating Bushings: threaded malleable iron with thermoplastic liner.
4. Insulated Grounding Bushings: threaded malleable iron body with
insulated thermoplastic liner throat and "lay-in" ground lug with
compression screw.
5. Insulated Metallic Bushings: threaded malleable iron body with plastic
insulated throat.
6. Running threads are not acceptable.
C. PVC Coated Riaid Steel Conduit
1. Conduit shall be Schedule 40 steel, pipe size, finished inside and out by
hot-dipped galvanizing, and shall conform with ANSI C80.1 and UL. A
PVC coating of 40 mils (minimum) thickness shall be bonded to the outer
galvanized surface of the conduit and a urethane coating shall be applied
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-5
to the interior surface of the conduit. The bond between the PVC coating -_
and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the
plastic. A PVC jacketed coupling shall be furnished with each length of
conduit. PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings shall be
manufactured by Robroy, Occidental, or equal.
2. Conduit fittings shall be PVC coated and furnished by the same
manufacturer as the conduit to provide a complete and compatible
protective system. PVC coated fittings and couplings shall have specially
formed sleeves to tightly seal to conduit PVC coating. The sleeves shall
extend beyond the fitting or coupling a distance equal to the conduit
outside diameter or two inches, whichever is greater.
D. Riaid Non-Metallic Conduit
1. Conduit shall be UL listed, sunlight resistant, Schedule 40 polyvinyl-
chloride (PVC) conduit, rated for 90' C conductors, and manufactured to
NEMA TC-2 standards.
2. Couplings and connectors shall be of the same manufacturer as the
conduit and shall be joined as recommended by the manufacturer. All
PVC conduits shall be terminated with approved connectors or end bells.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubina (EMTI
1. Conduit shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electroplated, and shall
meet ANSI and UL requirements.
2. Couplings shall be electroplated steel, UL listed rain and concrete tight.
3. Connectors shall be gland compression type with insulated plastic throat.
F. Liauid-Tiaht Flexible Metallic Conduit
1. Conduit shall be liquid tight and shall have an interlocking flexible
galvanized steel core with permanently bonded continuous exterior gray
PVC jacket. Exterior jacket shall be moisture and oil-proof, and UV
protected. A copper bonding conductor shall be included between the
segments. Interior surfaces shall be smooth and offer minimum drag to
pulling conductors. Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall be as
manufactured by Anaconda, Electroflex, or equal.
2. Connectors shall be the screw clamp or screw-in (Jake) variety with cast
malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats or
insulated bushings. Liquid-tight fittings shall be of cadmium plated cast
malleable iron, with insulated throat, with provisions for grounding.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-6
2.05 Non-Metallic Cable Tray _-
A. General
Non-metallic cable tray shall be ladder-type conforming to applicable sections of
NEMA FG-1 and ASTM E-84. Non-metallic cable tray system shall be
constructed of fire-retardant polyester resin. All composite material shall be
provided with an ultra-violet light inhibiting chemical additive and meet ASTM E-
84, maximum 25 flame spread (Class l rating).
Cable tray load class shall be selected based upon the weight of specified
cables/conductors shown on the Drawings with a 25% additional weight
allowance for future cables/conductors while maintaining a minimum safety
factor of 1.5.
The non-metallic cable tray system shall be as manufactured by Enduro
Composite Systems, Inc., or equal.
B. Construction
Unless specified otherwise, cable tray shall conform to the following dimensional
requirements:
Nominal Width = 12" minimum
Cable Loading Depth = 4" minimum
Fitting Radius = 12" minimum
Rung Spacing = 6"
Cable tray side rail members shall turn inward. Rungs and side members shall
be connected by both mechanical and chemical (adhesive) means. All bonded
connections shall be sanded to maximize adhesion and structural integrity. The
cable tray interior shall be clear of all projections or sharp objects. All straight
sections and fittings shall be pre-drilled to accept connector plates. All cut ends
and drilled holes (factory and field) shall be sealed with resin coating.
All fittings shall be designed and installed so as to have the same load carrying
capacity as straight sections. Unless specified otherwise, all fittings shall be
concentric curved molded type, not mitered.
C. Connections, Accessories, and Supports
Connector plates shall be fiberglass and designed to transfer cable tray loads to
the support system. Fasteners for connector plates shall be Type 316 stainless
steel or FRP studs and hex nuts as required.
Where specified on the Drawings, cable trays shall be provided with fiberglass
flat covers.
Cable tray support systems shall be constructed of polyester or vinyl ester resin
strut channels (single or double channel as necessary) and appurtenances.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-7
Support spacing shall be in accordance with the cable tray manufacturer's
printed recommendations for the specified loads.
Cable tray manufacturer shall provide all clamps, support assemblies, and
appurtenances necessary for the installation of a complete cable tray system.
2.06 Non-Metallic Wireway
A. General
Non-metallic wireway shall be solid bottom type construction with minimum wall
thickness of 0.1875 inches. Covers and cover splice plates shall be snap-on
type construction requiring no installation fasteners.
The wireway system shall conform to the applicable sections of NEC Article 362.
The non-metallic wireway system shall be as manufactured by Enduro
Composite Systems, Inc., or equal.
B. Construction
Wireways, covers, and connector plates shall be pultruded utilizing polyester
resin with UV light inhibiting additives and exterior nexus veil coverage.
All composite material shall meet ASTM E84, maximum 25 flame spread rating.
All cut ends and drilled holes (factory and field) shall be sealed with resin
coating.
C. Connections, Accessories, and Su~~orts
Connector plates shall be fiberglass and designed to transfer wireway loads to
the support system. Fasteners for connector plates shall be Type 316 stainless
steel or FRP studs and hex nuts as required.
Wireways shall be provided with fiberglass flat snap-on/snap-off covers.
Wireway support systems shall be constructed of polyester or vinyl ester resin
strut channels (single or double channel as necessary) and appurtenances.
Support spacing shall be in accordance with the wireway manufacturer's printed
recommendations for the specified loads.
2.07 Conductors and Cable
A. General
Cables and wires shall be new, stranded conductors, solid copper, not smaller
than #12 AWG (except shielded control wire) unless otherwise shown on
Drawings. Insulation shall bear manufacturer's trademark, insulation
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-8
designation, voltage rating, and conductor size at regular intervals. Each type of
cable or wire shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
B. Conductors
Conductors for power service, power feeders, power circuits, and lighting
feeders, lighting circuits, and control circuits shall be stranded copper, rated 600
volt, with 75' C THWN insulation, UL approved, for installation underground, in
concrete, in masonry, or in wet locations. Minimum conductor size shall be # 12
AWG.
C. Shielded Cable
Shielded cable shall consist of minimum 3 #16 AWG, stranded, tinned-copper
conductors, individually insulated with 25 mils of polyethylene and 1 00%
aluminum foil tape. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, shielded cable
shall be used for all 4-20 ma signals. Cable shall be manufactured by Belden, or
equal.
D. Color Codinq
System conductors shall be factory color coded by integral pigmentation with a
separate color for each phase and neutral, or by an approved colored marking
tape at all terminations and in all junction boxes, pull-boxes, and manholes.
Each voltage system shall have a color coded system that shall be maintained
throughout the project. Approved colored marking tape is as follows:
Svstem Service - Color
120V, 1 Phase, 2 wire Line Black
Neutral White
208V, 3 Phase, 4 wire
480V, 3 Phase, 4 wire
All
October 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Phase A Black
Phase B Red
Phase C Blue
Neutral White
Phase A Brown
Phase B Orange
Phase C Yellow
Neutral White
Ground Green & Bare
Copper
' Electric
16050-9
2.08 Switches and Relays
A. Toaale Switches
Local single pole switches shall be flush tumbler type AC rated, quiet type, heavy
duty, 20 amp minimum, rated 120/277 volt, back or side wired with binding
screws. Switches shall conform to NEMA WD-1 specifications. Two pole three
way and other switches shall be similar. Switches shall be as manufactured by
Hubbell, Bryant, or equal.
B. Relays
Control relays shall be rated 120VAC with minimum 10A contacts, unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings. All control relays and relay timers shall be DIN
rail mounted, with instantaneous reversible contacts, 8 or 11 pin base type only.
2.09 Receptacles
A. General Purpose
General purpose receptacles shall be duplex, 3-wire grounding type, rated 125
/250 volt, AC, 20 amp minimum, NEMA 5-20R, back or side wired with binding
screws, as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant, G.E, or equal.
B. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
GFI receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20R configured and shall mount in a standard
device box. Units shall trip at 5 milliamperes of ground current and shall comply
with NEMA WD-1-1.10 and UL 943. GFI receptacles shall be capable of
individual protection as well as downstream protection.
2.10 Device Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Fittings
A. Device Boxes (General Purpose - Indoors or Outdoors)
Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, device boxes shall malleable iron
constructed with zinc or cadmium plating and enamel finish, minimum single
gang size, deep box type, with treaded hubs and solid gasketed cover. Device
boxes shall be properly sized for required circuitry or splicing. Surface mounted
boxes shall be furnished with mounting lugs. Where located outdoors, device
boxes shall be waterproof. Device boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds FD, Appleton
FD, or equal.
B. Junction Boxes (General Pumose - Indoors or Outdoors)
Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, junction boxes shall be malleable iron
constructed, rain tight, dust tight, minimum size 4"x4"x3", drilled and tapped or
field installed with slip holes (alternate hub plates are acceptable). Junction
boxes shall be properly sized for the number and sizes of conductors and
conduit entering the box and required splicing. Provide feet where necessary for
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 0
,-
surface mounting. Junction boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds WAB, Appleton RS, or
equal.
C. Device Boxes (Wet or Corrosive Locations)
Where specified on the Drawings, device boxes shall be constructed of 316
stainless steel, minimum single gang size, deep box type, with gasket and 316
stainless steel solid cover. Device boxes shall be properly sized for required
circuitry or splicing. Surface mounted boxes shall be furnished with mounting
lugs or feet. Device boxes shall be NEMA 4X as manufactured by BEL
Products, Inc., Cushing Manufacturing Co., or equal.
D. Junction Boxes (Wet or Corrosive Locations)
Where specified on the Drawings, junction boxes shall be constructed of 316
stainless steel, with gasket and 316 stainless steel solid cover. Junction box
minimum size shall be 4"x4"x3". Junction boxes shall be properly sized for
required circuitry or splicing. Provide feet where necessary for surface mounting.
Junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X as manufactured by BEL Products, Inc.,
Cushing Manufacturing Co., or equal.
E. Fittinqs
Conduit fittings shall be provided where shown on the Drawings or required to
facilitate installation of the electrical conduit and equipment.
1. Metallic fittings shall be constructed of malleable iron with zinc or
cadmium plating and enamel finish, with gasket and cast cover. Fittings
shall be Condulet Type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or
equal.
2. Non-metallic fittings shall be compatible with the non-metallic conduit
used and shall be of the same manufacturer.
3. Fittings shall be of the shapes, sizes, and types required to facilitate
installation or removal or conductors and cables from the conduit, cable
tray, and wireway systems.
Connectors, couplings, locknuts, bushings, and caps used with Rigid
Steel conduit shall be threaded and thoroughly galvanized. Bushings
shall be insulated.
4.
5. Metallic conduit unions shall be "Erickson" couplings, or approved equal.
Running threads are not acceptable.
6. Connectors for liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall be liquid tight with
insulating bushings and provision for ground continuity.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 1
2.1 1 Disconnect Switches
A. Switch Interior
Dead-front construction with hinged arc suppressor and switch blades which are
fully visible in the "OFF" position and with door open. ~ I
B. Switch Mechanism
Switches shall be quick-make and quick-break with arc quenching and ambient
temperature compensated overload devices. Switch operating handle and
mechanism shall be provided with a dual cover interlock to' prevent unauthorized
opening of the switch door in the "ON" position or closing the switch mechanism
while the door is open. Switch operating handle shall be capable of being
padlocked in the "OFF" position. Switches shall be manufactured by General
Electric, Westinghouse, Square D, or equal.
C. Ratinas
Switches shall be horsepower rated for the operating voltage and with fused or
non-fused arrangements as shown on the Drawings.
D. Enclosures
Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, for interior locations enclosures shall
be NEMA 12 panels with hinged covers and padlockablb hasps. Switches in
exterior locations shall be provided with gasketed NEMA 3R enclosures with
hinged covers and padlockable hasps. I
2.1 2 Low-Voltage Cable Splices
Low-voltage cable splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than 600 Volts.
Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with an insulated,
solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL
486A. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be dade with noninsulated,
solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL
486A and UL 4868. Splices shall then be covered with an insulation and jacket material
equivalent to the conductor insulation and jacket. Splices below grade or in wet locations
shall be sealed type conforming to ANSI C119.1 or shall be waterproofed by a sealant-
filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting
resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors. I
2.13 Miscellaneous Equipment and Material
A. Concrete Anchors
Type 304 (or better) stainless steel expansion anchors (wedge or sleeve) shall
be used to for mounting all electrical conduit, boxes, and'equipment. NO type of
explosive anchor will be permitted.
October 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 2
D. Conduit Straps
Where specified on the Drawings, conduit straps shall be malleable iron
constructed, one-hold type strap with cast clam-backs and spacers as required.
E. Channel (Unistrut) Supports
Unless otherwise specified, support channel (Unistrut) shall be single strut type,
1-1/2" x 1-1/2", 12 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel with 17/32" diameter bolt
holes on 1 -1/2" centers.
F. Nameplates
Nameplates shall be provided for all electrical panels, enclosures, stations, and
equipment furnished by the Contractor. Nameplates shall be engraved
laminated plastic, with 1/4" high white lettering on black background.
Nameplates shall indicate equipment and its function. Nameplates shall be
securely fastened with stainless steel drive screws or escutcheon pins.
G. Panelboard Labeling
Panelboard circuits shall be labeled clearly indicating which piece of equipment,
outlet, lighting, receptacle, etc. is powered by the respective circuit. Labeling
shall be arranged in numerical order.
H. Conductor and Terminal Markers
Conductor and terminal markers shall be self-adhering, pre-printed cloth or vinyl.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
A. Prefabricated Material and Euuipment
Installation of all prefabricated items and equipment shall conform to the
requirements of the manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.
When code requirements apply to installation of materials and equipment, the
more stringent requirements, code, or manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions shall govern the work.
B. Power Supplies to Mechanical EuuiDment
1. An electric power supply, including conduit, any necessary junction or
outlet boxes, and conductors and connections shall be furnished and
installed by Contractor for each item of mechanical equipment.
2. Circuit breakers or fused disconnect protection shall be provided for each
separate item of mechanical equipment shown on the Drawings, or
specified in the Basic or Technical Specifications.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 3
3. Power supplies to individual items of equipment shall be terminated in a
suitable outlet or junction box adjacent to the respective item of
equipment, or a junction box provided by the manufacturer of the
equipment. Sufficient lengths of conductor at each location shall be
provided to permit connection to equipment without damaging the
conductors.
3.02 Conduit Installation
A. General
1. Contractor shall install conduit and electrical equipment in locations that
will cause minimal interference with the maintenance and removal of
mechanical equipment. Conduits and connections are shown
schematically on the Drawings. Contractor shall run conduit in a neat
manner parallel or perpendicular to walls and slabs, and wherever
possible, installed together in parallel runs supported with Unistrut type
support system. All conduits shall be installed straight and true with
reference to the adjacent work.
2. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, conduits shall be concealed in
walls or in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Concealed conduits shall be run
in as direct a route as possible and with bends of large radii. Floor
penetrations shall be made only at specific approved locations; other
penetrations are prohibited. Conduits shall be rigidly secured in position
by means of approved clamps.
3. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation
and coordinated with the ductwork, plumbing, ceiling, and wall
construction in the same areas, and shall not unnecessarily cross other
conduits or pipe, nor prevent removal of nor block access to mechanical
or electrical equipment.
4. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, buried conduit shall be installed
with a minimum of 24" cover. All conduit trenches shall be compacted to
a minimum of 90% relative compaction. Compaction in the pipe zone
shall be accomplished by water jetting imported sand, one sack sand
slurry cement, or equal, placed to 6" above top of conduit. Buried conduit
shall be installed using approved spacers and cradles, properly
supported/anchored and at sufficient intervals to prevent movement
during backfill operations (maximum spacing of five feet). Where change
in direction is required, long radius elbows shall be installed. Prior to
installation of conductors in underground conduits, a testing mandrel not
less than six (6) inches long and with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the
conduit diameter shall be drawn through after which a stiff bristle brush of
the proper size for the conduits shall be drawn through until the conduits
are free of all sand and gravel.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric 16050-1 4
5. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, conduits cast in, under, or
through concrete walls, slabs, or masonry walls shall be Rigid Steel.
Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, buried conduit shall be Rigid
Non-Metallic or Rigid Steel. Transition from PVC to Rigid Steel shall be
made at the horizontal leg of the buried conduit bend.
6.
7. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, exposed or above grade
conduit shall be Rigid Steel.
8. Spare conduits shall extend a minimum of 3" above concrete slab or wall,
and be provided with threaded cap and polyethylene pull rope with 100-
pound (minimum) tensile strength.
9. All conduits shall be tightly sealed during construction by use of conduit
plugs or "pennies" set under bushings. All conduit in which moisture or
any foreign matter has collected before pulling conductors shall be
cleaned and dried to the satisfaction of the Owner.
10. Conduits shall be securely fastened to cabinets, boxes, and gutters using
locknuts (one inside and one outside enclosure for rigid conduit, one
inside enclosure for EMT) and an insulating bushing or specified
insulated connectors. Grounding bushings or bonding jumpers shall be
installed on all conduits terminating at concentric knockouts.
B. Riaid Steel Conduit
Rigid Steel conduit installations below grade, and cast in, under, or through walls
or slabs shall be double wrapped with 20-mil PVC tape. Running threads and
threadless couplings will not be acceptable. Where necessary for connecting
conduit, UL listed couplings or unions shall be used. All ends and joints shall be
reamed smooth after cutting.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubina (EMT)
EMT conduit shall only be installed where specifically shown on the Drawings.
EMT conduit, where specified, shall be furnished with weatherproof fittings.
D. Liquid-Tiaht Flexible Metallic Conduit
Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be installed in all locations for connections to
equipment, including, but not limited to: motors, HVAC equipment, automatic
valves, and similar devices.
E. Riaid Non-Metallic Conduit
Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, Schedule 40 PVC conduit may be used
underground. PVC conduits shall not be run exposed.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 5
F. SUPPOrtS
1. All raceway systems shall be secured to building structures using
specified fasteners, clamps, Unistrut, and hangers spaced according to
NEC requirements.
2. Exposed conduit shall be supported with channel supports spaced per
NEC requirements (8'-0" maximum spacing) and within 18" of couplings,
bends, boxes, etc., unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
3. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported using "trapeze" hangers,
consisting of approved channels suspended on steel rods from ceiling
inserts located not more than eight (8) feet apart. Sizes of channels and
rods shall be selected as recommended by the manufacturer for span
and loading conditions.
G. Termination and Joints
1. Raceways shall be joined using specified couplings or transition
couplings where dissimilar raceway systems are joined.
Conduit terminations exposed at weatherproof enclosures and cast outlet
boxes shall be made watertight using approved connectors and hubs.
2.
3. Expansion couplings shall be installed where any conduit crosses a
building separation or expansion joint, including joints in footings and
gradebeams.
4. Approved cable-sealing bushings shall be installed on all conduits
originating from roof and terminating in switchgear, cabinets, or gutters
inside the building.
5. Conduit bodies (Condulets) are not acceptable as enclosures for splices.
6. At all conduit terminations and boxes, conductors shall be protected by a
fitting equipped with a plastic bushing having a smoothly rounded
insulating surface.
3.02 Conductor and Cable Installation
A. General
1. Conductors shall not be installed in conduit runs until all work is
completed for each individual conduit run. Care shall be taken in pulling
conductors such that insulation is not damaged. UL approved pulling
compounds shall be used.
2. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, all conductors or cables shall
be installed in conduit or electrical enclosures.
October 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 6
.-
.-
3. All cables shall be installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's
requirements and warranty.
B. SDlicinq and Terminating
1. All aspects of splicing and terminating shall be in accordance with cable
manufacturers published procedures.
2. All splices in outlet boxes with connectors as specified herein shall be
made up with separate tails of correct color. At least six (6) inches of tails
packed in box after splice is made up shall be provided.
3. All conductor and cable in panels, control centers and equipment
enclosures shall be bundled and clamped.
C. Identification
1. All branch-circuits shall be securely tagged, noting the purpose of each.
2. All conductors and conduit shall be numbered and labeled with vinyl
wrap-around markers. Where more than two conductors run through a
single outlet, each circuit shall be marked with the corresponding circuit
number at the panelboard.
D.
3. Conductors size #6 AWG and larger shall be color coded using specified
phase color markers and identification tags.
4. All terminal strips shall have each individual terminal identified with
specified vinyl markers.
5. Inside of all junction box cover plates shall be identified via felt-tip pen or
decal label, denoting the panel and circuit numbers and voltage
contained in the box.
6. All receptacles and switches shall be decal labeled on the plate, denoting
the panel and circuit number.
Connections to Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Terminal Strips: Stranded
Comer Conductors
1. #12 through 8 AWG: Conductor shall be terminated in locking tongue
style, pressure type, compression lugs, unless clamp type connection for
stranded conductor is provided with device.
2. #6 AWG and larger: Conductor shall be terminated in one-hole flat-
tongue style, compression type lugs, or by connectors supplied by the
manufacturer.
October 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 Electric
16050-1 7
E. Joints in Conductors in Drv Locations, CopDer Conductors
1. #8 AWG and smaller: Conductors shall be twisted and secured with cap
or twist-on, expandable spring type solderless connectors.
2. #6 AWG and larger: Conductor shall be joined with split bolt connectors
or compression sleeves. Joints shall be insulated with rubber tape and
protected with half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape. Insulation
may also be provided by UL listed pre-manufactured components such
as heat-shrink or cold-shrink devices.
F. Joints in Conductors in Moist Locations, Comer Conductors
1.
2.
#8 AWG and smaller: Conductor shall be securely joined as specified
above, then encapsulated in epoxy (Scotchcast or approved equal).
#6 AWG and larger shall be joined as specified above, and suitably water
treated.
G. Groundinq
Enclosures of equipment, raceways and fixtures shall be permanently and
effectively grounded. A code-sized, copper, insulated green equipment ground
shall be provided for all branch circuit and feeder runs. Equipment ground shall
originate at panelboard ground bus and shall be bonded to all switch and
receptacle boxes and electrical equipment enclosures. Ground terminals on
receptacles shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor by an
insulated copper conductor.
H. Sianal Wirinq
Conductor used for alarm and control signal applications shall be identified at
both ends and referenced to appropriate as-built drawings. Control wiring shall
be numerically or otherwise coded in accordance with as-built control diagrams
3.03 Installation of Boxes and Wiring Devices
A General
1. All outlets shall be surface mounted with walls, ceilings, and floors,
except where specified to be finish flush.
2. No unused openings shall be left in any box. Close-up plugs shall be
installed as required to seal openings.
3. Exposed outlet boxes and boxes in damp and wet locations shall be
provided with gasketed cast metal cover plates.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 8
B. Box Lavout
1. Outlet boxes shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on
the drawings or specified herein. Adjustments to locations shall be made
as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements
of other trades.
3.04 Transformer Installation
A. Primary shall be connected to minimum value taps during construction period
and prior to initial building start-up.
B. Voltage readings shall be made and tap connections adjusted to nominal voltage
during final construction review and prior to building occupancy.
C. Transformers shall be installed on vibration pads designed to suppress the
transformer vibrations. Pads shall be selected and arranged in accordance with
the weights of the transformers.
D. Conduit connections that will prevent transmission of the transformer vibrations
to the conduit system shall be installed.
E. Transformers installed against a wall shall have readily accessible primary and
secondary terminals.
3.05 Protection
Conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes, and other openings shall be kept closed to
prevent entry of foreign matter. Fixtures, equipment, and apparatus shall be covered
and protected against dirt, paint, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and
during the construction period. Damaged fixtures, apparatus, or equipment shall be
restored to original condition prior to final acceptance, including restoration of damaged
shop coats of paint. Brightly finished surfaces and similar items shall be protected until
in service. No rust or damage will be permitted.
3.06 Workmanship
A. Preparation, handling, and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or
approved, except as otherwise specified.
B. Work shall be furnished and placed in coordination and cooperation with other
trades.
C. Work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association Standard
of Installation for general installation practice.
October 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Electric
16050-1 9
.- SECTION 16400
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
.-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
The Contractor shall furnish and install the free standing dead front type low voltage
(600 volt) distribution switchboards, motor control centers, and utility service equipment,
as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
1.02 Quality
A. The low-voltage distribution switchboard assembly and all components shall be
designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with standards of NEMA PB-
2 and UL Standard 891.
B. The Motor Control Centers (MCC) and all components shall be designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance with standards of NEMA, ANSI, and UL
845.
C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be IS0 9000, 9001 or
9002 certified.
D. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical
equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the
Owner, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided
demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
Manufacturer shall be Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, Allen-Bradley, Square D,
or equal.
E.
1.03 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-53.
A. Shop Drawinus
Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical data for all
equipment and components, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Drawings showing elevations, floor plan, top view, anchorage and conduit
entrylexit locations.
2. Single line and unit wiring diagrams depicting internal and remote
devices.
3. Nameplate schedule.
4. Starter and component schedule.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Assembly ratings including:
a. Short circuit rating.
b. Voltage.
C. Continuous current.
Major component ratings including:
a. Voltage.
b. Continuous current.
C. Interrupting ratings.
Cable terminal sizes.
Busway connection.
Connection details between close-coupled assemblies.
Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies.
Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
Descriptive bulletins.
Product sheets.
Lateral design and equipment anchorage details, prepared and stamped
by a licensed engineer, registered in the State of California.
Installation information prior to shipment.
B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes prior to project
completion.
1.
2. Certified production test reports.
Final as built drawings and wiring diagrams.
C. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
1. Instruction books andor leaflets.
2.
3.
Drawings and information required by above.
Renewal Parts list showing the important maintenance -items which will
need to be available for proper maintenance and to provide normal
equipment life.
1.04 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at
time of shipment. Where stored out of doors, space heaters and thermostat controls
shall be energized.
1.05 Measurements
Contractor shall verify equipment proposed shall fit into the available space, coordinate
installation and notify the Owner of any interferences or conflicts in the distribution and
MCC system power and control wiring.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -
2.01 Ratings
A. The distribution switchboard(s) and MCC's shall be rated to withstand
mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions when connected
directly to a power source. having minimum available fault current of 65,000
amperes symmetrical at rated voltage unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
Voltage rating shall be 600 volts, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
B. The MCC(s) shall be 600 volt class, suitable for operation on a three-phase, 60-
Hertz system. The system operating voltage and number of conductors shall be
as indicated on the Drawings.
2.02 Distribution Switchboard Construction
A. Refer to Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components;
current ratings of devices, bus bars, and components; voltage ratings of devices,
components and assemblies; interrupting and withstand ratings of devices,
buses, and components; and other required details.
B. Distribution switchboard@) shall be as manufactured by Cutler-
HarnmerNVestinghouse, General Electric, Square D, or equal.
C. Standard Features _-
1. Switchboards shall be fully self-supporting structures with 90 inch tall
vertical sections (excluding lifting eyes and pull boxes) with the required
number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly
arrangement. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-
on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be
formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure.
2. Switchboards shall be NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R non-walk-in deadfront
construction as shown on the Drawings. NEMA 3R construction shall be
as listed below.
3. Switchboard frame shall be die formed, 12 gauge steel with reinforced
corner gussets. Frame shall be rigidly bolted to support cover plates
(code gauge steel), bus bars and installed devices during shipment and
installation.
All sections may be rolled, moved, or lifted into position. Switchboards
shall be capable of being bolted directly to the floor without the use of
All switchboard sections shall have open bottoms and removable top
plates to install conduit.
4.
, floor sills.
5.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-3
6.
7.
a.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, switchboard sections shall be
front-access only. Front-access only switchboard sections shall be front
and rear aligned for placement against a wall. Where specified on the
Drawings as front and rear access, switchboards shall be front and rear
aligned.
Switchboards shall be UL listed.
Switchboards that are series rated to short circuit requirements shall be
appropriately labeled. Tested UL listed cbmbination ratings shall be
included in UL recognized Component Directory (DKSY2).
All covers shall be fastened by hex head bolts.
Provide hinged doors over metering compartments and individually
mounted device compartments. All doors shall have concealed hinges
and be fastened by hex head bolts.
Switchboard protective devices shall be furnished as listed on Drawings
and specified herein, including interconnections, instrumentation, and
control wiring. Switchboards and devices shall be rated for the voltage l
I
and frequency listed on the Drawings.
Switchboard current ratings, including all devices, shall be based on a
maximum ambient temperature of 25°C per, UL Standard 891. With no
derating required, temperature rise of switchboards and devices shall not
exceed 65°C in a 25°C ambient environment!
Switchboard Service Entrance sections shall comply with UL Service
Entrance requirements including a UL servipe entrance label, incoming
line isolation barriers, and a removable neutral bond to switchboard
ground for solidly grounded wye systems.
The group mounted feeder breaker and/or main devices within
switchboards shall be circuit breakers onl$. Mounting for the group
mounted devices shall be by bolted connections. No plug-in type
connections shall be used for current carrying components.
D. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means.
2.03 Distribution Switchboard Bus
A. All bus bars shall be silver plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be
mounted with all three phases arranged in the sarqe vertical plane. Bus sizing
shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over
a 40 degrees C ambient temperature outside the enclosure. Minimum bus rating
shall be as specified on the Drawings.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-4 I
.-
A
B. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to
each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the
switch board.
C. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc plated.
All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring type washers.
2.04 Distribution Switchboard Wirinflerminations
A. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard
shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the
assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be
suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on
manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
B. Mechanical type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations
suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as
indicated on the Drawings.
Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main
grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding
conductors shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.
C.
D. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated
locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except
where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current
transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible
short circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of
control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with
suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring.
2.05 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
A. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with
inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection
shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a
quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically
trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the
handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy, and arc extinction
shall be accomplished by means of DE-ION arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on
the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the
trip mechanism.
C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity
matching the distribution switch board or MCC where installed or as shown on
the Drawings.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-5
D. Circuit breakers, 400 ampere frame and below, shall be provided with thermal-
magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
Circuit breakers, 600 ampere through 2500 ampere frame and circuit breakers
used as main to disconnect utility power, shall be provided with microprocessor-
based RMS sensing trip units.
E.
1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system
shall consist of three current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt
trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide
the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing
circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current
signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip
signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels
and time delay settings are reached.
2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of
each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as
indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not
interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker
cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed.
3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory
capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload
condition until after a preset time delay.
4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall
be provided with an instantaneous override. internal ground fault
protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes.
Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four wire loads.
5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long time delay,
instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker by means of a
120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all
breakers 400 ampere frame and above.
6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-
based time-current curve shaping adjustments:
Adjustable long time pick-up and delay
Adjustable short time pick-up and delay, with
Adjustable instantaneous pick-up
Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay, with
selective curve shaping
selective curve shaping
F. Wherk? shown, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their
continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-6
I
G. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the
Drawings.
2.06 Bolted Pressure Switches
_-
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Where shown on the Drawings, fusible bolted pressure switches protective
devices shall be bolted pressure contact type and shall be UL listed.
Switches shall be furnished with Class L fuse clips. Switch contact interrupting
capacity shall be 12 times the continuous rating of the switch.
Fuse access door shall be mechanically interlocked with the operating handle
and shall have provisions for padlocking the switch in the open position.
The switch shall utilize a stored energy dead front operating mechanism
compressed and released by the operating handle, to provide quick positive
switching action independent of the speed of the operating handle.
Switches shall electrically tripped unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
Electrically tripped switches shall be designed to be closed only after the opening
spring has been charged, ready for electrical opening by solenoid or manual
opening by the mechanical push-button.
Supply electrically tripped switch(es) with the following accessories where
indicated on the Drawings:
1. Ground fault protection including Test Panel.
2. Single phase protection to open the switch(es) upon loss of any phase
from the source.
3. Blown Fuse Protection to open the switch upon blowing of one or more of
the fuses.
Provide Class L fuses as shown on the Drawings.
2.07 Quick-MakdQuick-Break Fusible Switches
A. Protective devices shall be quick-make/quick-break fusible switches as
manufactured by Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, Allen-Bradley, Square D, or
equal. Fusible switches, 100 amperes through 600 amperes frames, shall be
furnished with rejection Class "R" or "T" type fuse clips unless otherwise
specified. Fusible switches, 800 amperes through 1200 amperes, shall be
furnished with Class L fuse clips. Switches shall incorporate safety cover
interlocks to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the "ON" position or
prevent placing the switch in the "ON" position with the cover open. Provide
defeater for authorized personnel. Handles shall have provisions for padlocking
and shall clearly indicate the "ON" or "OFF" position. Front cover doors shall be
padlockable in the closed position.
March 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-7
B. The 400 through 1200 ampere switches shall be designed to accommodate UL
listed shunt trip. Where shown on the Drawings, furnish the following
accessories:
1. UL listed 120 volt AC shunt trip.
2. Zero sequence ground protection system including test panel. Ground
fault relay shall include separate time and current pick-up adjustments.
2.08 MCC Construction
A. MCC(s) shall be as manufactured by Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, Allen-
Bradley, Square D, or equal. Wiring shall be NEMA Class 11 , Type B.
B. Structures shall be totally enclosed deadfront, free-standing assemblies. They
shall be 90k inches high and 21* inches deep. Each structure shall be minimum
20* inches wide and wider where shown on the Drawings, or where required to
house components shown on the Drawings. Structures shall contain a horizontal
wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus and shall be readily
accessible through a hinged cover. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to
enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference.
C. Compartments for mounting control units shall be incrementally arranged such
that not more than twelve Size 1 starters can be mounted within each vertical
structure. Guide rails shall be provided.
D. A vertical wireway with minimum of 35 square inches of cross sectional area
shall be adjacent to each vertical unit and shall be covered by a hinged door.
Wireways shall contain steel rod cable supports.
E. All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 shall be of the drawout type.
Drawout provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to
absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Drawout units shall
have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to
these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. Interior of all units shall be
painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with side-mounted,
positive latch pull-apart type control terminal blocks rated 600 volts. Knockouts
shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. In addition, a master
terminal block, when Type C wiring is specified, shall be drawout and shall be
located in the bottom wireway, readily accessible through a hinged cover. All
internal control wire to be 14 gauge minimum.
F. All drawout units shall be secured by a spring-loaded quarter turn indicating type
fastening device located at the top front of the unit. Each unit compartment shall
be provided with an individual front door.
G. An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each
starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent
access unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. A defeater shall be
provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-8
provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect. A second interlock
shall be provided to prevent removal or re-insertion of the unit while in the ON
position. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect
in the OFF position with from one to three padlocks with the door open or closed.
In addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn
position with the stabs free of the vertical bus.
2.09 MCCBus
A. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal copper tin plated or copper silver
plated bus, with minimum ampacity rating of 600 amperes or as shown on the
Drawings. 1200 amp horizontal bus shall be provided for meter and distribution
panel. The horizontal bus shall be rated at 50 degrees C temperature rise over a
40 degree C ambient temperature in compliance with UL standards. Vertical
busses feeding unit compartments shall be copper and shall be securely bolted
to the horizontal main bus. All joints shall be front accessible for ease of
maintenance. The vertical bus shall have a minimum rating of 300 amperes for
front mounted units. 600 amp vertical bus shall be provided for meter and
distribution panel.
B. Isolation of the vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment shall be by
means of a full height insulating barrier. This barrier shall be a single sheet of
glass reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the
vertical bus. Provide snap-in covers for all unused openings.
C. Busses shall be braced for minimum 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical unless
shown otherwise on the Drawings.
2.1 0 MCC Motor Controllers (Combination Starters)
Motor controllers shall consist of combination starter units with motor circuit protectors,
molded case circuit breakers, or fusible switches and motor starters with thermal
bimetallic overload relays, or current sensor type with microprocessor control.
Specific type of short circuit protection, line starter, and auxiliary equipment shall be as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
Combination starter units shall be of the type shown on the Drawings and shall be full
voltage non-reversing, rated minimum 65,000 amperes RMS, symmetrical at 480 V
unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
A. Motor Circuit Protectors shall be as manufactured by Cutler-
HammerNVestinghouse, Allen Bradley, Square D, or equal.
The motor circuit protection shall provide adjustable magnetic protection and be
provided with pin insert to stop magnetic adjustment at 1300% motor nameplate
full load current to comply with NEC requirements. All combination starter units
shall have a "tripped" position on the unit disconnect and a push-to-test button
on the motor circuit protector. Motor circuit protectors shall include transient
override feature for motor inrush current.
March 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-9
B. Fusible Switches
Fusible switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, with Class R type fuse clips
and dual element time delay fuses.
C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Molded case circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type per Section 2.05
herein, and shall only be provided where specifically specified on the Drawings.
D. Motor starters shall be electrically operated, electrically held, three-pole
assemblies with arc extinguishing characteristics and shall have silver-to-silver
renewable contacts. They shall have provisions for a total of eight NO or eight
NC auxiliary contacts. The overload protection shall consist of the following types
as specified on the Drawings:
1) Motor starter with integral current sensor and overload device
Overload protection shall consist of one current sensor located in each
phase monitored by a microprocessor that yields a time current curve
closely paralleling that of motor heating damage boundary, accurate to
2%. Running overload protection shall be DIP switch selectable for the
specific motor full load amperes within the starter range. Provide DIP
switch selectable overload trip class of 10, 20, and 30. Line starters shall
be Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse "Advantage", Square D "Motor Logic",
Allen Bradley "SMC", or equal, and shall provide the following features:
Motor starters shall monitor current in each phase to provide phase loss
and phase unbalance protection, such that if the unbalance on any of two
phases is greater than 30% of the DIP switch selected trip rating, a phase
losshnbalance trip occurs. Provide phase lossdunbalance protection
which requires no time delay for reset.
Motor starters shall provide Class II ground fault protection. Ground fault
protection shall be set at 20% of maximum continuous ampere rating and
have a start delay of 20 seconds, and a run delay of 1 second to prevent
nuisance trip on starting.
Microprocessor shall measure control circuit voltage and prevent closing
of the coil on low voltage (78 volts AC) and/or high voltage (135 volts AC)
conditions which are outside of the coil ratings.
Microprocessor shall apply voltage to the coil such that a guaranteed
maximum of 2 milliseconds of main contact bounce occurs on contactor
closure.
Microprocessor shall continuously measure coil circuit voltage and
contact closure and minimize coil power consumption.
current so as to maintain constant coil power at a level to maintain main -
March 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 0
Provide a Metering Module for each starter capable of displaying cause
of trip, current at time of trip, and current in each phase.
2) Motor starters with separate electronic current sensor and overload
device.
Overload protection shall consist of a solid state electronic overload relay
suitable to measure current, current versus time, and unbalanced phase
current with current transformers as required. Number of windings and
calculations for setting shall be submitted to Owner by the Contractor.
3) Motor starters with thermal bimetallic overload relay.
Overload protection shall consist of thermal bimetallic ambient
compensated type overloads. Sizes shall be determined by the
Contractor based on characteristics of actual motor furnished.
E. Each starter (unless otherwise shown) shall be equipped with indicating lights,
selector switches, elapsed time meter, and auxiliary contacts, as shown on the
Drawings. Number of auxiliary contacts shall be as required for specific motor
control. In addition, 2N0 and 1 NC spare contacts shall be provided.
2.1 1 Power Meter, Monitor, and Protection Device
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a digital line Meter, Monitor, and Protection (MM&P) device, having the features and functions specified below. The MM&P shall consist of a single microprocessor-based unit capable of monitoring and displaying the functions listed below with the accuracy indicated; the MM&P shall auto range between Units, Kilo-units, and Mega-units. The MM&P shall provide the adjustable protection functions indicated and the capability to communicate data via twisted pair network. The MM&P shall be UL recognized, CSA certified, and also meet ANSI Standard C37.90. The MM&P shall be as manufactured by Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, Allen-Bradley, Square D, or equal.
-
Metered Values
(Accuracy % Displayed Value) Protective Functions
AC Phase Amperes (1 %)
AC Phase Voltage (1%)
Watts (2%)
Vars (2%)
Power Factor (4%)
Frequency (0.5%)
Watt-hours (2%)
Watt Demand (2%) with (5, IO-,
IS-, 30-min. interval)
Voltage Phase Loss (less than 50%
RMS) Current Phase Loss (V16 largest phase) Phase Voltage Unbalance (5 to 40% -
5% steps) Phase Voltage Reversal Overvoltage (1 05 to 140% - 5% steps)
Undervoltage (9560% - 5% steps)
Time Delay for Overvoltage,
Undervoltage, and Phase Unbalance (0
to 8 sec. - 1 sec. steps)
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 1
B. Input ranges of the MM&P shall accommodate external current transformers with ranges from 100/5 through 5000/5 amperes. Provide three (3) external current transformers with rating as indicated on the Drawings or' sized for incoming service. Potential transformers shall be self included and fused up to 600 volts. Above 600 volts, provide fused external potential transformers. Synchronizing pulse input shall be provided and when activated shall override the preset watt demand interval and let the utility control the demand window.
Control power shall be capable of being supplied from the monitored incoming AC line without the need for a separate AC supply control circuit.
I
C.
D. Outputs shall have separate Form C (NO/NC) trip and alarm contacts with
ratings of 10 amperes at 115/240-volt AC or 30-volt DC resistive. In addition,
provide a separate Form C (NO/NC) contact to provide a programmable kilowatt-
hour pulse output.
The display face shall be membrane type and rated suitable for NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 mounting. The MM&P shall have a durable 6-digit LED display screen. The display screen and LEDs shall indicate both cause of trip and alarm conditions. Unit shall be mounted in the switchgear or MCC section door as shown on the Drawings.
E.
F. Provide an addressable communication card capable of transmitting all data,
including trip data over a compatible two-wire local area network to a central
personal computer for storage and/or printout. I
- G. MM&P shall be furnished in a drawout case. Provide test plugs for all circuits.
2.12 Power Condition Monitor
The electrical service power failure protection system consists of an electronic device which provides protection against three-phase electrical motor loss due to power failure conditions. Power failure conditions include: low voltage, phase loss, unbalanced voltage and phase reversal. The power failure protection device shall be SymCom, Inc. Motorsaver Model 101, Timemark Power Monitor D-264, or equal. '
Contractor shall install the power failure protection system as shown on the Drawings or specified in the Technical Specifications and Special Requirements. The protection
system shall monitor electrical line side power of specified equipment or facilities. The
power failure protection system shall automatically stop all electrical motors upon output
relay deactivation (unstable power conditions) and shall transmit a power failure alarm
signal to the local RTU (where specified).
2.13 MCC Incoming Feeder Terminations and Device
Incoming conductors shall terminate within the control center on a main lug, or main
breaker termination point. Main lug terminations shall have adequate dedicated space
for the type and size of cable used and the lugs shall be standard mechanical screw
type with antiturn feature
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 2
- 2.14 Ventilation and Heating
A. Switchboards and MCC sections shall be provided with thermostatically
controlled space heaters to prevent condensation and thermostatically controlled
forced air ventilation for cooling. Heating and ventilation shall be as designed by
the manufacturer, unless shown specifically on the Drawings. Ventilation
openings, including fans shall be provided with washable air filters.
B. Forced air ventilation shall be provided by supply air fans unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
Supply air fans shall be rated 100 CFM (minimum) at 1/8 inch WC static
pressure and shall be provided with louver (grill) inlet, inlet filter, and gasketing
for weather-proof construction.
C. Air exhaust openings shall consist of louver (grill), filter, and gasketing for
weather-proof construction.
D. Filters shall be aluminum mesh, washable, and shall be furnished with two
bottles of spray adhesive.
E. Control power transformers with primary and secondary fuse protection shall be
provided as required -for proper operation of the heating and ventilating
equipment unless Drawings show otherwise. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts,
60 Hz.
2.15 Utility Metering and Main Disconnect
A. Main Service
Where shown on the Drawings, main service shall consist of pull section, service
(metering) section, and main disconnect. Equipment shall include a separate,
barriered-off, utility metering compartment complete with hinged sealable door
as approved by the utility company. Bus work shall include provisions for
mounting utility company current transformers, potential transformers, potential
taps, test devices, and metering as required by the utility company. Provide
Service Entrance Label and provide necessary applicable service entrance
features per NEC, local code requirements, and utility company requirements.
B. Main Disconnect
Main disconnect shall be molded case circuit breaker or bolted pressure switch as shown on the Drawings with ground fault protection system.
C. Ground Fault Indicate and Test Svstem
The 600 volt, 60 Hz ground fault protection system shall consist of a current
sensor enclosing all phase and neutral conductors of the circuit to be monitored,
appropriate relaying equipment to provide for desired ground fault current
sensitivity and time-current response characteristics, and equipment to trip the
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 3
main disconnect. Installation of the equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1) Current Sensor
A sensitive current sensor shall be provided of sufficient size to encircle
the phase and neutral conductors. Current sensor output shall be
coordinated with the required input to the relay. A test winding shall be
included to simulate the flow of ground fault current through the current
sensor in order to test the operation of the ground fault protection system
including sensor pick-up, relay, and circuit protective device (main
disconnect) operation. The frame or the current sensor shall be so
constructed that one leg can be opened to allow removal or installation
around the cable or-bus without disturbing the cable or requiring drop-
links in the bus.
2) Ground Fault Relav
The relay shall be solid state for maximum reliability, except that a coil
operated output relay shall be provided to control 120 volt power to
operate the circuit protective device (main disconnect). The ground fault
relay shall require no external source of power for tripping the associated
protective device, drawing all the energy needed for proper operation of
the ground fault protection system directly from the output of the current
sensor.
Adjustable pickup current sensitivity for ground fault currents from 200
amperes to 1,200 amperes shall be provided. A calibrated dial shall be
provided for setting the current pickup point in the field. Settings for
individual relays shall be coordinated. Time delay provided by the relay
circuitry shall be nominally one second and shall be permanently
calibrated to preclude tampering after installation. A self-contained test
circuit which will test all components including sensor, relay, and trip
mechanism and a test coil in the current sensor shall be incorporated in
the system.
The circuit protective device (main disconnect) shall be provided to open
the circuit for normal switching, overload, short circuit, or ground fault. It
shall include a ground fault trip mechanism for activation by the ground
fault relay which, operating in conjunction with an interposing relay and
auxiliary power source, will release a stored-energy device to open the
switch. The ground fault trip mechanism shall be capable of operating at
55% of rated voltage to provide satisfactory operation under reduced
voltage that might accompany a ground fault condition. In addition, the
trip mechanism shall be equipped to operate by remote tripping such as
by a float switch. The switch interrupting rating shall be coordinated with
the time delay of the relay to insure that the switch is capable of
interrupting any current it may be required to open.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 4
2.1 6 Customer Metering
Where shown on the Drawings, provide a separate customer metering compartment
with front hinged door with microprocessor-based metering system, complete with
current transformers and potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses.
2.17 Enclosures
A. Switchboard and MCC enclosures shall be as specified on the Drawings and
shall be suitable for the proposed location. As a minimum, switchboards shall be
housed in NEMA 1 enclosures and MCC's shall be housed in NEMA 12 or
NEMA 1 gasketed enclosures.
B. Outdoor switchboards and MCC enclosures shall be NEMA 3R as follows:
1. Enclosures shall be non-walk-in and meet applicable NEMA 3R
requirements of UL.
2. Enclosures shall have NEMA 3R wrap roof sloping downward toward
rear.
3. Outer sections shall be the same widths as indoor structures, except
each end of the outdoor assembly shall have an end trim.
4. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt on rear covers for each section.
5. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking and be located as shown on
the Drawings.
2.1 8 Nameplates
Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all
main and feeder circuits, starter compartments, and control compartments as indicated
on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white
background, and secured with stainless steel screws. Characters shall be 3/16 inch
high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation as shown on the Drawings, and
shall be approved by the Owner prior to fabrication. Furnish Master nameplate giving
switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's
name, general order number and item number.
2.19 Finish
.-
The finish shall consist of a coat of thermosetting, polyester powder paint applied
electrostatically to pre-cleaned and phosphatized steel and aluminum for internal and
external parts. The coating shall have minimum thickness of 1.5 mils and corrosion
resistance of 600 hours to 5% salt spray. Color shall match other enclosures (existing
or new). If necessary to match color, manufacturer shall coat complete assemblies with
1.5 mil thick exterior finish spray coat of air drying high-gloss enamel. Color of indoor
enclosures shall be ANSI-49 Light Gray, unless specified otherwise. Exterior of outdoor
enclosures, including all NEMA 3R enclosures shall be white.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
16400-1 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Factory Testing
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment
provided under this section. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the
latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. The switchboards and MCC's shall be completely assembled, wired,
adjusted and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete
switchboard@) shall be tested for operation under simulated service
conditions to assure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all
equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts
for one minute between live parts and ground and between opposite
polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of
1500 volts for one minute between live parts and ground.
B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports to
Owner for approval prior to shipment.
3.02 Installation
A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's written recommendations and the Drawings. '
B. Each assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be
capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to a conkrete
foundation.
3.03 Field Quality Control
A. Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's
representative to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the
equipment specified under this section. The manufacturer's representative shall
provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly
of the equipment, connections and adjhstments, and testing of the assembly' and
components contained therein.
B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the
technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative.
1. Rig the assembly into final location and install on level surface.
2. Check all removable cells and starter units for easy removal and
insertion. I
3. Perform insulation tests on each phase and verify low resistance ground
connection on ground bus. '
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
1 6400-1 6
.-
4. Connect all power wiring and control wiring and verify basic operation of
each starter from control power source.
5. Torque all bolted connections made in the field and verify all factory
bolted connections.
6. Calibrate any solid-state metering or control relays for their intended
purpose and make written notations of adjustments on record drawings.
Perform startup of any solid-state starters and adjustable frequency
drives.
3.04 Field Adjustments and Testing
A. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and the Contract Documents concerning
any short circuit device settings, heater selection, timing relays, or startup of
components.
B. Contractor shall coordinate and set circuit breaker tripping sequence from main
service circuit breaker to individual motors.
C. Follow the minimum requirements as stipulated in the NETA testing procedure
for motor control center assemblies.
D. Generate a field report on tests performed, test values recorded, adjustments,
etc., and provide same to Owner for review and approval.
3.05 Manufacturer's Certification
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing
that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment shall be inspected prior to the
generation of any reports.
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's
representative's certification to Owner.
3.06 Instruction
After the equipment has been installed, tested, and adjusted, and placed in satisfactory
operating condition, the equipment manufacturer shall provide classroom instruction to
Owner's operating personnel in the use and maintenance of the equipment. Two (2)
hours of instruction shall be provided unless otherwise specified. Contractor shall give
the Owner formal written notice of the proposed instruction period at least two weeks
prior to commencement of the instruction period. Scheduled training shall be at a time
acceptable to the Owner and the manufacturer. During this instruction period, the
manufacturer shall answer any questions from the operating personnel. The
manufacturer's obligation shall be considered ended when he and the Owner agree that
no further instruction is needed.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Distribution Switchboard
1 6400-1 7
c
SECTION 16500
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Specific Project Description
The work included in this Section shall consist of furnishing and installing variable speed
drives of the variable frequency drive type (VFD) as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein, including all accessories and controls necessary for a complete and
operable system.
The equipment furnished under this Section shall be required to operate electric
motor(s) driving equipment specified by Section 1 131 0. Contractor shall be responsible
to coordinate the work under this Section, with all other electrical equipment and the
work specified and shown on the Drawings. Load requirements, torque, horsepower,
and speed range of VFDs shall be coordinated with and meet or exceed that of the
driven equipment.
All equipment specified herein shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer as a complete
assembly .
-_ 1.02 Specific Project VFD Requirements
A. General
Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) VFD units to drive the 75 hp vertical
turbine pumping units as shown on the Drawings, and specified herein and per
Section 1131 0. Pumping units shall be new pumps driven by squirrel cage,
induction type, premium efficiency, inverter duty hollow shaft vertical electric
motors.
B. Temperature Ratinq
Each VFD unit shall have a minimum rated 75 hp, 96 full load amp output at
40°C ambient temperature.
C. Tvpe
VFD units shall be provided with 6-pulse (or greater) rectifiers with line reactors
and passive filters or 18-pulse rectifiers as necessary to comply with the
harmonic distortion requirements specified herein. VFD units with 6-pulse or 12-
pulse rectifiers and broad band filters or active filters, are not acceptable.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives 16500-1
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Enclosure and Coolinq
Each VFD unit, including harmonic suppression equipment, shall be housed in a
gasketed, NEMA 1, floor mounted, 90" high enclosure as shown on the
Drawings.
Each VFD unit shall be cooled by forced air ventilation. A supply air fan shall be
mounted in each enclosure to provide forced air ventilation and to maintain a
positive air pressure in the enclosure. Fans and louvers shall be sized by the
VFD manufacturer based on: heat generated from the VFD operating at full rated
capacity, heat generated from auxiliary components (e.g. transformers, filters,
and line reactors), and equipment operating under maximum ambient conditions.
A 10°F differential air temperature shall be utilized. Each supply and exhaust air
louver shall be furnished with a reusable air filter. Each VFD enclosure shall be
isolated from adjacent enclosure to prevent short circuiting of cooling air. Each
enclosure shall be furnished with a thermostat for cooling and heating.
No Bvpass Contactors Required
VFD units shall not be provided with bypass contactors as specified in Section
2.01 .E.14 herein.
Door Mounted Devices
Each VFD shall be provided with door mounted selector switches, lights,
controls, and relays as follows:
1. Padlockable circuit breaker.
2. Power on indicator lamp (light).
3. VFD on-line indicator lamp.
4. Operator Interface (Digital Display/Keypad Unit). Unit shall control,
monitor and display VFD functions, operating conditions and faults.
5. Selector switches, indicator lights, and various devices as shown on
Drawings (ControVLadder Diagrams).
Harmonic Distortion
A harmonic study is required and line reactors and filters are to be provided per
2.01 J.
Warranty
Each VFD unit shall be provided with a minimum two-year warranty to be free
from defects in material or workmanship. Warranty shall commence upon date
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-2
of project acceptance. During the warranty period, all parts and labor required to
repair or replace defective VFD units shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. .-
I .03 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. Shop Drawinas
Contractor shall submit complete information, drawings, and technical data for all
equipment and components, including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Design capabilities and operating parameters, including a detailed list of
all user selectable features and setpoints. Harmonic distortion study
demonstrating compliance with specified requirements herein. If
specified in the. Specific VFD Requirements herein, a preliminary
harmonic analysis shall be submitted at bid time.
2) VFD operating efficiency (including control power and cooling power) and
output horsepower versus speed for the specific equipment being driven.
3) Motor manufacturer's guarantee that motor insulation and cooling is
suitable for continuous operation over specified frequency range and
VFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time, and pulse rate.
4) Guarantee that proposed carrier frequency of VFD will not produce a
motor audible noise level when operating throughout the VFD speed
range of more than 5 dba above that designated in NEMA MG-1 for the
same motor operated at constant speed with a 60 Hz sine wave supply
voltage.
5) Catalog cut sheets and data for all control devices.
6) Drawing of enclosure, including overall dimensions, anchor hole sizes
and locations, and exterior door elevations showing location of all door
mounted components, including lights, switches, meters, controllers, and
corresponding nameplates. General arrangement drawings of enclosure
interior, including location and identification of all internal components.
7) Enclosure space heating and cooling system and design calculations
covering entire speed range of variable frequency drive. Where building
or panel cooling systems are shown on the Drawings, provide
calculations for maximum heat output of VFD and associated
components.
8) System schematic diagrams, block diagrams, interconnection diagrams
and ladder diagrams.
9) Detailed specifications and data covering all necessary components,
including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers, switches, bypass
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-3
contactors, line reactors, filters, cooling equipment, status lights, and -
push buttons.
10) Manufacturer's warranty guaranteeing the operation of the VFD against
failure due to defects for two (2) years from date of project acceptance.
During this period, parts and labor shall be supplied at no cost to the
Owner.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the Special Construction Provisions. As a minimum, operation
and maintenance manuals shall include: design capabilities, operating
parameters, recommended ranges, system schematic diagrams, block diagrams,
interconnection diagrams, ladder diagrams, complete wiring diagrams, enclosure
drawings, safety provisions and precautions, standard publications on all major
items furnished, parts list with specification packets on the entire unit, list of
recommended spare parts, and installation diagrams. Manuals shall be
completely indexed and include step-by-step procedures for the operation and
maintenance of the VFD as installed. The maintenance portion of the manual
shall include preventive maintenance and troubleshooting for the entire system.
Contractor shall provide approved operations and maintenance manuals to
Owner at least 30 days prior to VFD startup and testing.
1.04 Quality
Contractor shall provide a complete, reliable, fully tested, adjustable speed drive system
suitable for manned or unmanned operation. The VFDs shall be as manufactured by
Toshiba, A.B.B., Eaton/Cutler/Hammer, Allen Bradley, or equal.
Third party distributor or packager modifications to a standard product will only be
permitted with written approval from the VFD manufacturer, and statement confirming
that the installed VFD equipment will be fully covered by manufacturer's warranty. In
addition, VFD manufacturer (factory) shall review and approve all shop drawings
prepared by third party distributors prior to submittal of said shop drawings to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
A. General
The VFD units shall be integrated, solid state systems, designed to control the
speed of electric motor drivers for the driven equipment specified. VFD units
shall be as specified herein, including all requirements and modifications listed in
Section 1.02, Specific Project VFD Requirements.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-4
_- B. Environmental Conditions
Unless otherwise specified, the VFD units shall be capable of operation under
any combination of the following conditions without mechanical or electrical
damage.
Ambient Temperature:
Altitude:
4 to 40 degrees C (40" to 100" degrees F)
500 ft above sea level
Relative Humidity: 100%
C. Ratinq
VFD shall be sized based on the maximum motor horsepower and required
starting and operating torque of the selected equipment to be driven or the
minimum output as shown on the Drawings or specified herein, whichever is
greater.
Unless otherwise specified, VFD shall be capable of continuous operation at any
speed between 20% (minimum) and 100% (maximum) of the driven equipment
full rated speed.
D. Basic DescriDtion
The VFD units shall convert 460 volt (-5% to +1 O%), three-phase, 60 hertz (*3%)
utility power to adjustable voltage (0 - 460V) and frequency (0 - 60 hz) three-
phase, AC power for stepless motor speed control with a capability of 1O:l speed
range.
The VFD shall be of the pulse-width modulated (PWM) type and shall consist of
a full-wave diode bridge converter to convert incoming fixed voltage/frequency to
a fixed DC voltage. The PWM strategy shall be of the space vector type
implemented in a microprocessor which generates a sine-coded output voltage.
The inverter output shall be generated by power transistors which shall be
controlled by a minimum of six identical base driver circuits. The VFD shall not
induce excessive power losses in the motor. The RMS motor line current
measured at rated speed, torque and voltage shall not exceed 105% of the rated
RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation.
The VFD shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. The VFD
shall have an output voltage regulator to maintain correct voltage to frequency
ratio despite incoming voltage variations.
The VFD units shall be suitable for use with standard NEMA Design B squirrel-
cage induction motors having a 1.15 service factor, without derating and without
requiring any motor modifications.
The variable frequency control shall operate satisfactorily when connected to a
bus supplying other solid state power conversion equipment which may be
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives 16500-5
causing up to 10% total harmonic voltage distortion and commutation notches up
to 36,500 volt microseconds, or when other VFDs are operated from the same
bus.
-
All equipment and work shall comply with the latest applicable standards of
ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC.
E. Features and ComDonents
Unless otherwise specified, the VFD units shall be provided with the following
minimum features and components:
1) Main circuit breaker and in-line fuses or fused disconnect switch shall be
supplied to provide NEC required branch circuit protection. The fused
disconnect switch shall provide a short circuit interrupting capacity of
50,000 RMS symmetrical amps (minimum), and shall be mechanically
interlocked with the VFD unit enclosure door.
2) The minimum VFD efficiency shall be 96 percent at 100 percent speed
and 90 percent at 50 percent speed. The power factor of VFD unit shall
be 95 percent minimum at all speeds.
3) Each VFD shall be provided with current overload protection for operation
in bypass mode (if specified).
4) Line reactors and filters as specified herein shall be provided for each
VFD.
5) The VFD shall have a programmable controller to provide automatic
restart after any individual trip condition resulting from either overcurrent,
overvoltage, undervoltage, or overtemperature. For safety, the drive shall
shut down and require manual reset and restart if the automatic
resethestart function is not successful within a maximum of three
attempts within a short time period.
6) A speed droop feature shall be included which reduces the speed of the
drive on transient overloads. The drive is to return to set speed after
transient is removed. If the acceleration or deceleration rates are too
rapid for the moment of inertia of the load, the drive is to automatically
compensate to prevent drive trip.
7) Automatic restart after drive trip or utility failure. Software selectable if
not desired.
8) Speed Profile. Individual adjustable settings for start, stop, entry, slope,
and minimum and maximum speed points.
9) Process signal inverter. Software selectable to allow speed of drive to
vary inversely with input signal.
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 Variable Frequency Drives 16500-6
A critical speed avoidance circuit shall be provided for selection of two
critical speeds with a rejection band centered on that speed. The drive
shall ignore any speed signals requiring drive operation within the
rejection band.
Proportional and integral setpoint process controller with menu driven
selection and programming via door-mounted keypad.
Pick up a spinning load. The VFD shall be able to determine the motor
speed and resume control of a motor which is spinning in either direction
without tripping.
ODerator Interface. A door-mounted membrane keypad with integral 2-
line, 24-character (minimum) LCD display shall be furnished, capable of
controlling the VFD and setting drive parameters, and shall include the
following features:
a.
b.
C.
d.
Digital display shall present all diagnostic message and parameter
values in English engineering units when accessed, without the
use of codes.
The keypad module shall contain a "self-test" software program
which can be activated to verify proper keypad operations.
The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact
numerical settings in English engineering units. A plain English
user menu shall be provided in software as a guide to parameter
setting, (rather than codes). Drive parameters shall be factory set
in EEPROM and resettable in the field through the keypad.
Password security shall be available to protect drive parameters
from unauthorized personnel.
Normally the digital display shall simultaneously display:
i. Speed demand in percent
ii. Output current in amperes
iii. Frequency in hertz or RPM
iv. Control Mode: manuaVautomatic
v. Total three-phase KW or output volts
VFD BvDass. Unless otherwise specified, interlocked bypass contactors,
main circuit breakers, and controls shall be provided for automatic bypass
of the VFD to across the line (constant speed) operation in case of VFD
failure, except for condition of motor high temperature, motor over load,
or motor moisture. When selector switch is in AUTO VFD mode, upon
VFD failure the equipment shall stop and automatically restart in constant
speed mode via bypass contactors with start/stop functioning as if operating on VFD. Time delay for restart in bypass mode shall be
provided. Manual reset to return to VFD mode shall be required. The
VFD shall be isolated during bypass operation.
April 2004 Variable Frequency Drives Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 16500-7
Indicating lights for operation in VFD mode and bypass mode shall be
provided. Selector switch shall be provided with bypass position to allow
operation in bypass mode without VFD failure.
Dry contacts shall be provided for operation in bypass mode for
connection to telemetry system.
15) Controls. Each VFD programmable controller shall be programmed to
accept a 4-20 ma signal for automatic speed adjustment, and energized
and dry contact closures from the facility control system for automatic
start and stop of the driven equipment.
Each VFD shall be provided with reduced voltage transformer(s).
Transformer(s) shall be properly sized for controls, lights, ventilation, and
heating.
VFD shall be equipped to function as specified herein and as shown on
the drawing. Each VFD shall be equipped with the controls shown on the
drawings unless otherwise specified in Section 1.02 Specific Project VFD
Requirements.
Door Mounted Devices:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
g-
h.
.. 1.
j-
Padlockable handle for fused disconnect switch.
Power on indicator lamp (light).
VFD on-line indicator lamp.
Bypass on-line indicator lamp (if bypass contactors are specified).
VFD malfunction indicator lamp.
VFD fault reset push button.
Motor thermal and motor overload reset push buttons.
Operator Interface (Digital Display/Keypad Unit). Unit shall
control, monitor and display VFD functions, operating conditions
and faults. Operating conditions shall include, but not be limited
to: output frequency, output voltage, motor current, running
speed (rpm), input and output power.
VFD Manual, VFD Auto, Off, Bypass (if bypass contactors are
specified) selector switch as specified. Selector switch shall be
provided with auxiliary contacts for position signal to remote
control panel.
Elapsed time meter (eight (8) digit, minimum).
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives 16500-8
k. Motor high temperature indicator lamp.
April 2004 Variable Frequency Drives Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 16500-9
1. Motor over load indicator lamp.
m. Other functions and devices shown on the Drawings or otherwise
specified.
Motor "high temperature" control module shall be mounted within the VFD
enclosure. VFD manufacturer shall coordinate control module installation with
the motor manufacturer. VFD shall shut down on motor "high temperature" and
"overload" conditions. External dry contacts shall be provided for each motor
alarm condition and common VFD fault condition.
F. Protective Features
The VFD unit shall be provided with capabilities and features to protect drive
components and the driven motor from damage. Protective features with user
adjustable setpoints shall be accessed through the operator interface for
enabling or disabling. As a minimum, the VFD unit shall be provided with the
following protective features:
Single phase fault or 3-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals
without damage to any power component or clearing any fuses (40,000
AIC minimum).
Static instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip with inverse
overcurrent protection.
Static overspeed (overfrequency) protection.
Phase loss and undervoltage protection.
Power unit overtemperature protection.
Electronic motor inverse time overload protection.
Responsive action to motor winding temperature detectors or
thermostatic switches. Provide dry contact (NC) input to the VFD.
Isolated operator controls.
Input line fuses.
Be insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.
Desaturation circuit to drive inverter section transistor base current to
zero in event of controller fault.
DC bus discharge circuit with an indicator lamp for protection of operator.
13)
14) Individual transistor overcurrent protection.
Input line noise suppression with line reactor.
G. Parameter Settinqs
The following system configuration settings shall be provided and shall be field
adjustable through the keypad/display unit or via the serial communication port.
Except for motor nameplate data, all parameters shall be adjustable while the
processor is on-line and the drive is running.
1) Motor Nameplate Data
a. Motor frequency
b. Number of poles
C. Full load speed
d. Motor volts
e. Motor full load amps
f. Motor KW
9. Current minimum
h. Current maximum
2) VFD Limits
a.
b.
d.
e.
f.
g. h.
j.
C.
1.
Independent acceleration/deceleration rates
No load boost
Vmin, Vmax, V/Hz
Full load boost
Overload trip curve select (inverse or constant)
Min/Max speed (frequency)
Auto reset for load or voltage trip select
Slip compensation
Catch-A Spinning-Load select
Overload trip time set
3) VFD Parameters
a. Voltage loop gain
b. Voltage loop stability
c. Current loop stability
4) Controller Adjustments
a. PID control enable/disable
b. Setpoint select
C. Proportional band select
d. Reset time select
e. Rate time select
f. Input signal scaling
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-10
.-
g. h.
1.
j. Min, Max Speed Select
k. Inverse profile select (allows VFD speed to vary directly or
Input signal select (4-20 mNO-5 volts)
Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off, Level Select On/Off
Speed Profile: Entry, Exit, Point Select
inversely with input signal)
H. Diaanostic Features and Fault Handling
1) The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital
diagnostic system which monitors its own control functions and displays
faults and operating conditions. Microprocessor systems shall be
products of the same manufacturer as the VFD (to assure single source
responsibility, availability of service and access to spare parts).
2) A "Fault Log" shall record, store, and display upon demand, the 16
(minimum) most recent faults. The fault log shall be accessible via the
keypad display.
I. Enclosures and Cooling
VFD units shall be housed in wall mounted or floor mounted enclosures
equipped with door locking devices as shown on the Drawings and specified
herein. Floor mounted enclosures shall be mounted on concrete bases,
extending 3 inches above the surrounding ground or floor. Enclosures shall be
of sufficient size to afford access to all parts and components, and installed with clearance in front of the enclosure to satisfy all code requirements. Sufficient
internal lighting to perform maintenance work shall be provided. Lighting shall
be controlled with an internal light switch.
Where shown on Drawings or specified herein that the VFD shall be installed in
MCC line-up, the enclosure shall match MCC construction including height and
depth.
Unless otherwise specified, the sheet metal surfaces of all enclosures shall be
phosphetized and coated with a rust resisting primer. Over the primer a
corrosion resistant baked enamel finish shall be applied on interior and exterior
metal surfaces. Exterior color shall be medium light gray (unless otherwise
specified) and interior color shall be white. All hardware shall have a corrosion
resistant finish.
Unless otherwise specified, outdoor electrical equipment shall be housed in
weatherproof, gasketed, NEMA Type 3R enclosures, and indoor electrical
equipment shall be housed in gasketed NEMA Type 1 enclosures.
Enclosures shall be provided with heating system for condensation protection
and shall be ventilated, or air conditioned, as specified or required for trouble-
free operation, and shall be equipped with air filters to eliminate dust. All cooling
devices shall be constructed to enable regular maintenance or removal without
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 Variable Frequency Drives 16500-1 1
dismantling of the VFD unit. Refer to ambient conditions as specified herein and
requirement to submit cooling calculations.
I
J. Harmonic Distortion
Individual or simultaneous operation of the VFDs without operation of any linear
loads shall not add more than 5% total harmonic voltage distortion to the normal
bus, nor more than 10% while operating from standby generator (if applicable)
per IEEE 519, 1992. Maximum allowable total and individual harmonic current
distortion limits for each odd harmonic shall not exceed limits as set forth by
IEEE 51 9, 1992.
A comprehensive harmonic study of the system, including all variable frequency
drive units, existing and proposed shall be prepared by the Contractor. The
results of this study shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the shop drawing
submittals. Should this study indicate the need for tuned filters, line reactors, or
isolation equipment for the proposed VFDs, said components and equipment
shall be supplied at no extra cost to the Owner. Shop drawings shall indicate the
location of the harmonic suppression equipment. Harmonic suppression
equipment location is subject to acceptance by the Owner.
If harmonic filters and/or line reactors are required to meet IEEE 519
requirements or where specified to be provided, the VFD manufacturer shall
furnish same and be responsible for their design and manufacturing. If specified
in the Specific VFD Requirements herein, a preliminary harmonic analysis, which
includes all harmonics to the 99th, shall be submitted at bid time. Compliance
shall be verified by the VFD manufacturer with onsite field measurements of the
harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling with and without VFDs
operating.
Specific Site Conditions for Pumping Units VFDs:
The proposed VFDs will be provided with electrical power from new San Diego
Gas and Electric Company transformer and service. The utility connection shall
be the PCC for voltage and current distortion. The utility short circuit at the utility
interface is 14,000 amps. Harmonic calculations shall be based on data
provided on the Drawings ("Single Line Diagram"), except that no linear loads
shall be included in the analysis. Harmonic analyses shall be prepared for
pumping units operating simultaneously.
K. Line Reactors
Unless otherwise specified, each VFD shall be.provided with a line reactor as
manufactured by Trans-Coil, Inc., Mirus International, Inc., or equal. Unless
shown otherwise on the Drawings, line reactor shall be factory mounted and
wired within the VFD enclosure.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives ,.
1 6500-1 2
Line reactor shall be provided in the incoming power lines to the VFD to:
1) Minimize the effects of "line notching" due to the switching of power
semiconductor devices for controlled rectifier type drives.
2) Prevent overvoltage trips and/or damage to the drive itself due to
transients (Le. utility power capacitor switching, etc.) on the VFD
incoming power lines.
3) Reduce input harmonic currents thereby improving the total power factor
of the drive system.
The line reactor shall provide a minimum of 2-1/2% line impedance and be
designed for harmonic filtering service and for slowing the rate of rapid current
changes. The line reactors shall be UL component-recognized and shall be built
to comply with UL 508A standard.
Construction shall be of copper wire wound on steel cores. Reactors shall be
designed and rated for 150% of normal, three-phase, 60 Hz current. Reactors
shall be sized appropriately for the total connected load. The design maximum
temperature rise for reactors shall be 115" C. The core shall be made of
laminated, grain-oriented electrical steel (grade M6 or better). Windings shall
consist of copper wire or of copper foil. Terminations shall be copper alloy ring
lugs, UL-recognized terminal blocks, or solid copper bus. Line reactors shall be
air-gapped to avoid control point saturation. Line reactors shall be double
impregnated with 100% solid epoxy resin. All insulation varnish systems shall be
rated Class H (180°C) or better, 600V. Inductance shall remain above 50% of
nominal for any overload up to 200% of rated current. Line reactors shall not
sustain any thermal damage for levels up to 150% of RMS current for a minimum
period of five minutes.
L. Harmonic Filters
Harmonic filters shall be provided as required to attenuate system harmonics to
below IEEE 519 distortion limits. Unless otherwise specified in the Specific
Project VFD Requirements herein or shown on the Drawings, harmonic filters
shall be passive or active type as determined by the manufacturer's harmonic
distortion study. Passivehuned filters shall attenuate specific harmonic
frequencies. Active filters shall constantly monitor the current on the line and
inject equal and opposite harmonics as necessary.
1) Passive Filters
Passive filters, if selected, shall be provided for each VFD unit. Passive
(trap) filters shall contain tuned circuits designed to remove harmonics
generated within the power distribution 'system while improving the
system power factor. Passive filters shall consist of inductive and
capacitive elements arranged in a series configuration and tuned to
resonate just below the harmonic frequency for which they are designed
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-1 3
to filter. Passive filters shall be UL-listed. Passive filters shall be as
manufactured by Trans-Coil, Inc., Mirus International, Inc., or equal.
High endurance capacitors shall be rated to operate continuously at
225% of nominal fundamental current. High endurance capacitor cells
shall have a voltage rating capable of handling continuously the nominal
system voltage plus 10% of the over voltage tolerance. High endurance
capacitor cells shall be rated to operate at an air temperature of 65°C.
Liquid-filled capacitor cells shall be contained in hermetically sealed metal
cans filled with a biodegradable, non-PCB impregnate. Liquid-filled
capacitor cells shall have a UL-listed, pressure-sensitive interrupter
which, in case of a hazardous internal pressure increase, shall disconnect
all three phases simultaneously. Individual high endurance capacitor
cells, or groups of cells, shall be provided with a 3-phase1 delta- connected discharge resistor network. The resistors shall be sized to
reduce residual voltage to less than 50V within one minute of de-
energization.
Tuning inductors, if provided separate from line reactors, shall comply
with all line reactor requirements specified herein.
Contactors shall be rated for capacitor switching at 660V and at 60 Hz.
Contactors shall be de-rated to compensate for extra switching loads
imposed by harmonic frequencies. Internal wiring, including that for the
linehuning reactors, shall be protected by three fuses, one for each
phase. Fuses shall be current-limiting at 200,000 symmetrical amperes,
interrupting at 600V AC, 60Hz. Fuses shall be UL-listed, Class T. Fuses
shall be sized to a minimum of 150 % of nominal capacitor rating. Fuses
internal to the capacitor cell shall not be acceptable as the primary means
of protection.
Passive filters larger than 20kVAR shall be protected by a 3-phase
protection circuit, which shall continuously monitor operating parameters.
Protection shall be provided against reactor or capacitor overload, phase imbalance, and continued operation with blown fuses. An independent
form C relay contact, rated at 5 amperes, 120V AC, shall be provided for
remote signaling.
Passive filters shall be factory mounted and wired within the VFD
enclosure, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
2) Active Filters
Active filters, if selected, shall be connected to the distribution panel or
bus supplying power to the VFD(s). Single or multiple active filters may
be utilized to provide compliance with IEEE 51 9 harmonic distortion
requirements. As a minimum, one additional active filter (size equal to
largest active filter selected for IEEE 519 compliance) shall be provided
for redundancy. Active filter units shall be AccuSine Power Correction
System, as manufactured by Schneider Electric, or equal.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-1 4
P
Active filter units shall be designed in accordance with the applicable
sections of ANSI IEEE Std C62.41-1991 [Surge Withstand Capacity],
ANSI IEEE Std 519-1992 [Harmonic Limits], and UL 508C [UL
Requirements for Power Conversion Equipment]. Active filter units shall
be UL and CSA approved.
Active filter units shall be designed to electronically inject harmonic
current to cancel the load produced harmonic current such that the
upstream power harmonic current and voltage are reduced to below 5%
total demand distortion TDD and below 5% total harmonic voltage
distortion [THD(V)]. Performance of the active harmonic filter shall be
independent of the impedance of the power source. All performance
levels shall be attained whether on the normal electrical service, standby
power generator, or output of uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
Reactive current compensation shall be provided for up to 0.95 lagging
displacement power factor. Leading power factor is not permitted.
Reactive current compensation (i.e. displacement power factor
correction) shall be activated via a digital keypaddisplay mounted on the
door of the enclosure. When reactive current compensation is activated,
the filter unit shall first perform harmonic current correction and then use
the remaining capacity to inject reactive current compensation to the
attain the specified level herein defined.
Two current transformers mounted on phases A and B shall be provided
per active filter location. Current transformers shall be split core type and
shall be rated for the total rated rms current of the total load at each
installed location. Each current transformer shall be rated for 400 Hertz.
a. Enclosure
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, each active filter unit
shall be provided in floor mounted, 90" high, NEMA 1 gasketed
enclosure. Where active filter units are to be installed in a MCC or
VFD line up, panel height, depth, and color shall match adjacent
panel(s). Enclosure ventilation shall comply with paragraph 2.01 .I
herein. Each unit shall include a door-interlocked disconnect that
provides power interruption when the door is opened. Disconnect
device shall be lockable in the power "OFF" position. Each unit
shall in shall be provided with Class T input fuses rated at 200,000
AIC (amps interrupting capacity).
b. Operator Controls and Interface
Each active filter unit shall be provided with a digital interface that
includes an alphanumeric display consisting of 2-lines with 20
characters per line. Operator pushbuttons shall include run, stop,
setup, enter, and up/down scroll. The display shall provide operating data while the unit is functioning. Display parameters
shall include AC line voltage, total rms load current, load harmonic
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-1 5
current, load reactive current, and filter output harmonic and -
reactive current. When the output of the active filter unit is at full
rated capacity, the display shall indicate at-maximum capacity and
actuate an at-maximum capacity relay. All fault conditions shall
be displayed as they occur. Output contacts shall be provided for
power-on, run, fault and at-maximum capacity. Each contact shall
be rated for 1 Ampere at 120/240 volts. One form C contact shall
be provided for each relay.
C. Design
Filter units shall be defined as a power electronic device
consisting of power semiconductors that switch into the AC lines
to modulate its output to cancel detrimental harmonic and/or
reactive currents. A DC bus shall store power for power
semiconductor switching. A microprocessor shall control the
operation of the power converter. Each unit shall be designed
with a current limiting function to protect the semiconductors.
Operation shall continue indefinitely at maximum current level
without tripping off or damage to filter unit components. Each unit
shall incorporate an over-temperature output roll back that
reduces the total output current in order to maintain maximum
current correction within the electrical system. Two distinct levels
of faults shall be employed. Non-critical level faults will provide
automatic restart and a return to normal operation upon automatic
fault clearance. Critical level faults stop the function of the unit
and await operator action.
Where multiple active filter units are provided to attenuate system
harmonics, units shall be installed in parallel to inject current
according to the information received from the CTs. Each unit
shall function independently. If one unit is off or faulted, the
remaining units shall adjust accordingly to maintain optimum
harmonic cancellation levels up to the capacity of the remaining
units.
M. EMVRFI Filters
An electromagnetic interference and radio frequency interference (EMVRFI) filter
shall be provided in the incoming power lines of the VFD if required as a result of
system startup and testing to:
1) Prevent conducted radio frequency noise generated by the VFD from
interfering with other sensitive electronic equipment (such as lighting
systems, telecommunications equipment, instrumentation, etc.).
2) Enable the VFD to meet RFI limits as specified by FCC Docket 20780
(Part 15, Subpart J) for conducted emissions.
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-1 6
The EMI/RFI filter shall be capable of handling a 150% current overload for at
least 1 minute.
N. Motor Protection Output Filter
Where the conductor length between the VFD and motor exceeds 100 feet, or
where specified on the Drawings or in the specific project VFD requirements, a
motor protection output filter shall be provided within the VFD enclosure. The
motor protection output filter shall be a low pass filter which removes the steep
edges from the PWM voltage wave form and protects the motor from voltage
spiking. The output filter shall be sized for the motor load and shall be located
immediately adjacent to the output terminals of the drive. The motor protection
output filter shall be Model KLC as manufactured by Trans-Coil, Inc., or equal.
2.03 Spare Parts
Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts for each type and size of VFD:
A.
B.
Two (2) spare lamp lenses of each color.
One (1) dozen pilot lamps.
C. One (1) complete set of fuses.
D. One (1) complete set of air filters for each VFD enclosure.
Spare parts shall be undamaged and packaged and labeled in original containers and
supplied to the Owner at time of final acceptance of the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. All equipment furnished hereunder shall be installed and aligned under the
supervision of a factory-trained service engineer, other than a sales
representative.
B. Conduit stub-ups for interconnected cables and remote cables shall be located
and terminated in accordance with the drive manufacturer's written
recommendations which shall be subject to Owner's review and approval.
C. The Contractor shall have the manufacturer examine the Contract Documents as
to the operating environment that the VFD unit will be subjected to, and advise
the Engineer prior to bidding of any potential problems, which could prevent the
drive from functioning as intended, and its recommendations for preventing
expected problems.
D. Under no circumstances are any portions of the VFD unit to be energized without
authorization from the manufacturer's representative.
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
1 6500-1 7
3.02 Testing, Manufacturer's Services, and Instruction
A. Upon completion of manufacturing, each VFD unit shall be factory inspected and
load tested. Certification that the factory inspections and load tests have been
successfully performed shall be submitted to the Owner prior to shipment.
B. Manufacturer or supplier of the equipment furnished under this Section shall
furnish the services of competent factoty-trained personnel to provide technical
assistance during installation and start-up of the VFD equipment. Prior to start-
up, manufacturer shall provide Owner with written certification stating that the
VFD equipment, including controls, have been properly installed and are ready
for operation.
After the equipment has been installed, tested, and adjusted, and placed in
satisfactory operating condition, the equipment manufacturer shall provide
classroom instruction to Owner's operating personnel in the use and
maintenance of the equipment. Four (4) hours of instruction shall be provided
unless otherwise specified. Contractor shall give the Owner formal written notice
of the proposed instruction period at least two weeks prior to commencement of
the instruction period. Scheduled training shall be at a time acceptable to the
Owner and the manufacturer. During this instruction period, the manufacturer
shall answer any questions from the operating personnel. The manufacturer's
obligation shall be considered ended when he and the Owner agree that no
further instruction is needed.
Field testing shall be witnessed by the Owner. Prior to the commencement of
field testing service engineer shall set and/or adjust all operating parameters
according to the manufacturer's written instructions and Owner's preference for
VFD features which may be enabled or disabled through the operator interface.
-
C.
VFD field testing shall be conducted concurrently with field testing of the driven
equipment. Field testing shall demonstrate satisfactory operation of all
interlocks, alarms, and normal operational sequences. The drive manufacturer
shall use suitable test equipment to locate and correct all malfunctions.
Repeated failure of any component will cause the test to be terminated and
restarted when equipment has been fixed. VFD performance shall be
documented by obtaining concurrent readings showing input and output:
voltage, amperage, power factor, and power over the full speed range of driven
equipment.
Harmonic distortion tests shall be run on the VFDs and the bus to determine the
voltage distortion and current distortion and compliance with IEEE 51 9-1992
standards. Measurements shall be made utilizing a Dranetz analyzer or a BMI
analyzer capable of recording snapshots of the current and voltage distortions.
Measurements shall include phase to phase, phase to neutral, and neutral to
ground. The test shall be run over the full range of VFD operation. Graphs of
the test results shall be submitted for speed values of 60%, 80%, and 100%.
Also, testing shall be performed with no VFD units operating, and for 3 pumping
units operating simultaneously (no concurrent linear loads).
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives 16500-1 8
A written report covering the service engineer's inspection findings, field test
readings, field test results and installation certification shall be submitted to the
Owner. The report shall include a comparison of readings from the VFD and
Contractor furnished meters and an evaluation of field measured efficiencies
versus manufacturer's guaranteed efficiencies.
.-
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Variable Frequency Drives
16500-1 9
SECTION 1661 5
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. Contractor shall furnish and install a modular, high-energy transient voltage
surge suppression (NSS) system as specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings. The specified system shall divert surge current, clamp transient
voltage, and attenuate high-frequency electrical line noise. The TVSS system
shall be suitable in ANSIAEEE C62.41 Category A, B, and C3 environments, as
tested according to ANSIAEEE C62.11 and C62.45.
B. TVSS systems shall be provided in the following applications:
1. Mounted inside or adjacent to the service entrance switchboard.
2. Mounted inside or adjacent to distribution panel enclosures.
TVSS systems mounted inside service entrance and distribution panel
enclosures shall be approved for said application by the service entrance and
distribution panel manufacturers.
1.02 Applicable Specifications and Standards -
A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in
compliance with the following standards:
1. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and
' Electronic Engineers (ANSIAEEE) C62.41, Recommended Practice for
Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits, Category B and C.
2. ANSIAEEE C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to
Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
2. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94).
3. Federal Specification (w-P-115b and W-C-375a, b).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA LS-1, AB-1, PB-1,
PB-1.1 and PB-1.2).
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-70 [NEC], NFPA-75 and
NFPA-78).
6. Military Standard 220A.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Contract 38891 1661 5-1
7. Underwriters Laboratories:
a. ANSVUL-50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
b. ANSI/lJL-67, Panelboards.
C. ANSI/UL-489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures.
d. ANSI/UL-891, Dead-Front Switchboards.
e. ANSVUL-943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
f. ANSI/UL-1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
g- ANSI/UL-1449 Second Edition, Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors.
B. Individual TVSS system units shall be UL listed and labeled under ANSVUL-1449
and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the unit. The units shall
also be listed and labeled under ANSVUL-1283.
1.03 Definitions
A. Clampinu Voltaae: The applied surge shall be induced at the 90-degree phase
angle of the
applied system frequency voltage. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inch
(maximum) long output leads of the WSS and from the zero voltage reference to
the peak of the surge.
B. Let-Throuuh Voltaue: The applied surge shall be induced at the 90-degree phase
angle of the applied system frequency voltage. The voltage measured at the end
of the 6 inch (maximum) long output leads of the TVSS and from the system
peak voltage to the peak of the surge.
C. Maximum Continuous ODeratinu Voltaqe (MCOV): The maximum steady state
voltage at which the TVSS system can operate and meet its specification within
its rated temperature.
D. Maximum Surue Current: The maximum 8x20 microsecond surge current pulse
the TVS$ system is capable of surviving on a single-impulse basis without
suffering either performance degradation or more than 10 percent deviation of
clamping voltage at a specified surge current. Listed by mode, since number and
type of components in any TVSS may vary by mode.
E. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the TVSS
system has directly connected protection elements, Le., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-
to-line (L-L), line-to ground (L-G), neutral-to-ground (N-G).
September 2003 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor Contract 38891 1661 5-2
F. Surqe Current per Phase: The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity
connected to a given phase conductor. For example, a wye system surge current
per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a delta system surge current per phase
would equal L-L plus L-G. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase
calculation.
1.04 Submittals
A.
B.
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Standard manufacturer catalog data sheets, including UL product listing
data.
2. Electrical and mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights,
component and connection locations, mounting provisions, connection
details, and wiring diagram.
3. Certified test data from a third party laboratory, verifying clamping voltage
rating, surge current rating, repetitive surge current rating, and noise
attenuation compliance. Testing shall be in accordance with ANSM EEE
C.45 and MILSTD-220A.
4. Written approval from service entrance and distribution panel
manufacturers for WSS systems mounted internally within panel
enclosures.
5. Instructions for installation and connection (external units only).
C. Operation and maintenance manuals covering all TVSS system equipment and
components. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in
accordance with the Special Construction Provisions.
1.05 Quality Assurance
TVSS systems shall be as manufactured by Current Technology, LEA International lnc.,
Liebert, or equal.
1.06 Warranty
Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than five (5) years
from date of acceptance by Owner. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of
TVSS modules during the warranty period and shall include all parts and labor at no cost
to the Owner.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Contract 38891 1661 5-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TVSS System
A. Operatinu Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frequency: 47 to 63 hertz.
Ambient temperature: -40 OF to +140 OF.
Relative humidity: 5 % to 95 % (non-condensing).
Altitude: 0 to 12,000 feet above sea level.
Noise: less than 45 dBA at 5 feet.
6. Seismic: UBC Seismic Zone 4
7. No appreciable magnetic fields. System shall be capable of use directly in
computer rooms or in any other location without danger to data storage
systems or devices.
B. Electrical Reuuirements and Performance
1. The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration shall be as indicated
on the Drawings.
2. Each TVSS unit shall include a safety interlocked disconnect switch in the
unit enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch
shall be rated 600 VAC. Each TVSS unit mode shall be fused with a 200
kAlC surge rated fuse. Systems using fuses that open below the
maximum surge current level are unacceptable. Disconnect switch and
fusing system shall be included in the surge current testing of the TVSS
unit.
3. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all suppression
components utilized in the unit shall be greater than 115 percent of the
nominal system operating voltage.
4. Tested and suitable for ANSIAEEE C62.41 Category C3 environments.
5. Protection modes:
a. For a wye configured system, device must have directly
connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-
ground (L-G), neutral-ground (N-G), and line-line (L-L).
September 2003 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1661 5-4
6. Maximum surge current rating:
a. Service entrance applications:
1) Maximum surge current rating per phase shall be minimum
250kA.
2) Maximum surge current rating per mode shall be minimum
125kA.
b. Branch circuit applications:
1) Maximum surge current rating per phase shall be minimum
120kA.
2) Maximum surge current rating per mode shall be minimum
60kA.
The maximum surge current rating shall be based on testing of a
complete TVSS unit, including integral disconnect, fuses, and all
components that make up the TVSS system. Units that derive a
maximum surge current rating by adding test results of individual
components are not acceptable.
7. Suppression voltage rating (SVR) shall be tested with the integral
disconnect in accordance with ANSVUL-1449. The SVR values shall not
exceed the following:
a. 277/480V system: 800 volt (L-N, L-G, N-G), 1500 volt (L-L)
b. 480 delta system: 1500 volt (L-G, L-L)
8. Maximum ANSMEEE Category C3 let through voltage based on IEEE
C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges
(20 kV, 10 kA):
a. 277/480V: 1225 volt (L-N), including integral disconnect.
9. Each TVSS unit shall be capable of surviving repetitive ANSVIEEE
C62.41 Category C3 transients without failure or more than 10 percent
degradation of UL 1449 clamping voltage. The minimum number of
surges per phase the unit shall be able to protect against are as follows:
a. Service entrance applications: 7,500.
b. Branch circuit applications: 2,500.
10. EMI/RFI filter shall provide minimum 40 dB noise attenuation at 100 kHz
with an insertion ratio of 50:l using MIL-STD-220A.
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Contract 38891 1661 5-5
11. Surge current shall be equally distributed to all components to ensure __
equal stressing and maximum performance.
12. Multiple TVSS units shall not be connected in series to achieve the
specified performance.
13. As a minimum, safety and diagnostic monitoring shall include the
following:
a. Solid-state monitoring of each mode and power loss in any phase.
Monitoring of fuse status only is unacceptable.
b. Audible alarm and surge counter. Surge counter shall utilize self-
contained batteries with a nominal life of ten (IO) years. An alarm
on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm
push-to-test switch shall be provided to test the alarm function.
C. Form C dry contacts (NO/NC) for remote status monitoring. Alarm
contact shall change state if any fault condition occurs.
d. Externally visible greedred solid-state indicator lights. Absence of
a green light and presence of red light shall indicate which
mode(s) or phase(s) have been damaged. Fault detection shall
activate a flashing trouble light.
C. Externally mounted TVSS units.
1. Indoors: TVSS units shall be provided with general purpose NEMA 1
enclosures.
Outdoors: TVSS units shall be provided with weatherproof NEMA 3R
enclosures.
2. Diagnostics shall be mounted on the cover of the enclosure and shall be
visible with the cover closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. Where the TVSS system is specified for installation as part of a new service
entrance section, main service switchboard, or distribution panel, all TVSS
system units shall be factory installed and connected within the service or
distribution panel enclosures.
6. Where the TVSS system is specified for installation as part of an existing
electrical system, Contractor shall install TVSS system equipment external to existing panels. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
printed instructions and in accordance with the applicable portions of the NEC,
state, and local codes.
September 2003 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1661 5-6
c Externally mounted TVSS equipment:
1. Mount where indicated on the Drawings and/or as close as practical to
the panel bus.
2. Conductors shall be as short and straight as possible between bus and
TVSS unit.
3. Conductors size shall be minimum #lo. Provide larger conductors as
recommended by the manufacturer.
4. Contractor shall twist input conductors together to minimize conductor
impedance.
5. TVSS system shall be connected to a ground system having measured
DC resistance of 25 ohms or less.
3.02 Start-up and Training
Manufacture's representative shall verify installation, provide start-up assistance and
training of Owner's operations personnel, and provide written certification that the TVSS
system has been properly installed and is ready for operation, and manufacturer's
warranties are in full effect.
END OF SECTION
September 2003
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
..
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
Contract 38891 1661 5-7
SECTION 17000
GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
The Contractor shall furnish, install, coordinate, design, fabricate, start-up, and place
into service instrumentation and controls for the project to provide complete and
operable systems as specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
provide and designate Electrical and Instrumentation Subcontractors to perform said
work. The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall be responsible to perform engineering
and design of control panels and components, select equipment and controls to
interface with various instrumentation and control equipment, package systems,
furnished and manufactured motor control centers, and instrumentation centers.
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall design and prepare or coordinate, preparation of
control and interconnect diagrams.
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall coordinate services of manufacturer's
engineering representatives for services during installation, start-up, operation, and
instruction of Owner for instrumentation and control equipment.
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall coordinate work so that all components of the
instrumentation system, including primary measuring, indicating, transmitting,
receiving, recording, totalizing, controlling, alarming devices, and all appurtenances
are completely compatible and shall function as specified, and shall furnish and install
such additional equipment and accessories to meet this requirement at no cost to the
Owner.
Electrical Subcontractor shall subcontract the work specified herein to a qualified
Instrumentation Subcontractor. All work performed is the responsibility of the
Contractor even though references are made herein to work requirements and
responsibilities of the Electrical and instrumentation Subcontractors.
1.02 Performance Specifications and Drawings
Equipment controllmonitoring systems shall be furnished and installed to provide
equipment performance, operation control, and/or monitoring functions as specified
on Drawings in specific Equipment Technical Specifications, or in the System
Operation Description Technical Specifications. Control Schematic drawings, where
provided, show control loops and control panels with component locations.
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall prepare all wiring and control diagrams, and
computer programs, and furnish and install all instrumentation and control
components to provide said specified performance and operation.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Instrumentation and Control
17000-1
1.03
1.04
Instrumentation and Control Components
Instrumentation and control components shall be as specified herein, per Technical
Specifications, Basic Electrical Specifications, and as shown on the Drawings or
manufacturer shop drawings where included in these Contract Documents. Not all
products specified herein are necessarily required for this project.
Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall prepare and submit, through the Contractor,
complete and organized shop drawings as specified herein. Interface between
instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed drives, chemical analyzers,
flow meters, chemical feeders, Owner furnished equipment, and other equipment
related to the instrumentation and control system, shall be included in the shop
drawing submittals.
Shop drawings prepared by the MCC, VFD, and other electrical equipment suppliers
shall be reviewed and approved by the Instrumentation Subcontractor. Said
subcontractor shall date and sign shop drawings prior to submittal to the Owner for
review.
Shop drawings shall be submitted in complete bound sets indexed by specification
and description of the items being submitted. Manufacturer's specification or data
sheets shall be clearly marked to delineate the options or styles to be furnished. Only
complete systems, not pieces of equipment from various systems shall be submitted.
Submittals shall show dimensions, physical configurations, methods of connecting
instruments and control equipment together, mounting details, single loop system
drawings, and wiring schematics in conventional ladder diagram form. Control
program for programmable controllers (if specified) shall be submitted in conventional
ladder diagram form with complete labeling and comments. Fabrication data,
nameplate, legends, and control panel internal wiring, including material
specifications, shall be submitted.
Submit data for each item of equipment which summarizes the specified features and
include such other necessary data as would provide a complete specification for
reordering an exact duplicate of the original item from the manufacturer.
Submit, for approval, a written pian for demonstrating that each system of equipment
meets the specified operational requirements. Submit a written pian for procedures to
be used in final operation testing of entire systems. As-built drawings and operation
and maintenance manuals shall be submitted.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres)
instrumentation and Control
Contract 38891 17000-2
1.05 Quality Assurance
A. Qualification and Manufacturers
--
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall have been regularly engaged in providing
similar equipment on a single system responsibility basis for municipal water
and wastewater projects of similar or larger magnitude. Personnel employed
for system engineering, supervision, start-up, operational testing, and training
shall be regularly employed and trained by the Instrumentation Subcontractor.
The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall be responsible for the technical
supervision of the installation to ensure that it is proper in all respects.
B. Standard of Qualitv
Equipment of the types and sizes specified which has been demonstrated to
operate successfully shall be furnished. Substitution of equivalent equipment
will be permitted as specified per Contractor Submittals Technical
Specifications.
C. Coordination with Electrical Subcontractors and Sumliers
Prior to installation of any conduit the Instrumentation Subcontractor shall
verify conduit size and conduit runs with the Electrical Subcontractor, and
equipment suppliers for specific equipment to be furnished, and notify the
Owner of any conflicts or deviations prior to installation.
D. Instrumentation Subcontractor’s Certifications
Prior to start-up and initial operation of instrumentation and control equipment,
the Instrumentation Subcontractor shall submit a written report stating that
equipment has been coordinated, calibrated, properly installed, and is ready
for start-up. After start-up and when equipment is ready to be operated, the
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall submit a written report for the
instrumentation and control equipment and associated field instruments
certifying that the equipment is ready to be operated, is safe to operate and
has been checked, inspected, calibrated, and adjusted as necessary; has
been operated under maximum power variation conditions and operated
satisfactorily; and is fully covered under the terms of the guarantee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 General
A. Where shown on the Drawings, specified by Special Requirements or
Technical Specifications, or required by the specified equipment operation per
System Operation Description Technical Specifications, the instrumentation
and control components shall be as specified herein. Products not necessary
for this project are identified herein as “Not Required”.
March 2004 Instrumentation and Control
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 17000-3
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
All meters, instruments, and other components shall be the most recent field
proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the
shop drawings.
All panel mounted instruments shall have matching. style and general
appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same
type, model, or class, and shall be of one manufacturer.
All outdoor instrumentation shall be suitable for operation in the ambient
conditions at the equipment installation locations. Heating, cooling, and
dehumidifying devices shall be incorporated with the outdoor instrumentation
in order to maintain it within its rated environmental operating ranges. The
Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring for these devices (e.g.,
heaters, fans, etc.). NEMA rated outdoor enclosures suitable for the
environment shall be furnished.
All instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be intrinsically safe and shall be
approved for use in the particular hazardous (classified) location in which it is
to be installed.
Analog measurements and control signals shall be electrical as indicated
herein, and shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable,
except as noted. Electrical signals outside control board@) shall be 4 to 20
milliamperes DC except as otherwise noted.
2.02 Control Panels
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, indoor control panels shall be
NEMA Type 12 enclosures and outdoor control panels shall be NEMA Type 12
enclosures with drip shields for rain tight construction. Enclosures shall be single or
double door, single or dual access as shown on the Drawings. As a minimum, each
enclosure shall be furnished with interior back panels, and padlockable door handles.
Free standing control panel enclosures shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Robroy
Industries, Inc., or equal and shall be securely anchored to the floor with a minimum
of four stainless steel anchor bolts in each section. Free standing control panel
enclosures 72" and less in height shall be provided with floor stand kits (12" height,
minimum).
Surface or wall mounted enclosures shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Robroy
Industries, Inc., or equal and shall be anchored to the wall with a minimum of four 3/8
inch diameter stainless steel anchor bolts.
Where control panels are part of the MCC line up, they shall match the MCC
equipment in height, depth, and color.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
instrumentation and Control
17000-4
2.03 General Instrumentation Enclosure Components and Requirements
A. General
General electrical components shall be as shown on the Drawings and
specified in the Basic Electrical Specification, Equipment Technical
Specifications, System Operation Description Technical Specifications, and
herein.
B. Sianal Isolators, Converters. and Power Supplies
Signal isolators shall be furnished and installed in each measurement and
control loop, wherever required to ensure adjacent component impedance
match, or where feedback paths may be generated. Signal converters shall
be included where required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities. Signal
power supplies shall be included, as required by the manufacturer's
instrument load characteristics, to ensure sufficient power to each loop
component.
C. Nameplates
Nameplates shall be provided for instruments, function titles for each group of
instruments, and other components mounted on the panel fronts as shown on
the drawings. A nameplate shall be provided for each signal transducer,
signal converter, signal isolator, electronic trip, and the like, mounted inside
the panel@). These shall be descriptive, to define the function and system of
such element. These nameplates shall be of the same material as those on
the panel fronts. Nameplates shall be fabricated from laminated engraving
plastic. Nameplates shall be fabricated from VI-LAM, Catalog No. 200,
manufactured by N/P Company, 'or equivalent by Formica, or equal. Colors,
lettering, styles, and sizes shall be as shown on the drawings or as selected
by the Owner. Adhesives are not acceptable for attaching nameplates.
Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel fasteners.
D. Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals,
and shall be rated 15 amperes at 600-Volts. White marking strips, fastened
securely to the molded sections, shall be provided, and wire numbers or circuit
identifications shall be marked thereon with permanent marking fluid.
E. Sianal and Control Circuit Wirinq
1. Wire Tvpe and Sizes
Where conductors are within the control panel, they shall be flexible
stranded copper machine tool wire; these shall be UL listed Type MTW
and shall be rated 600-Volts minimum 14 AWG. Shielded cables shall
be No. 16 AWG minimum as manufactured by Belden, Carol Cable
Co., or equal. Where conductors are run to MCC sections or to field
March 2004 instrumentation and Control Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 17000-5
locations, they shall be minimum 12 AWG of the UL type specified on
the Drawings or by the Basic Electrical Specifications.
2. Wire Insulation Colors
Conductors supplying 120-Volts AC power on the line side of a
disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the ungrounded
conductor. Grounded circuit conductors shall have white insulation.
Insulation for ungrounded 120-Volt AC control circuit conductors shall
be red. All wires energized by a voltage source external to the Control
Board@) shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for all DC conductors
shall be blue.
3. Wire Termination
Conductors from field componenets or from MCC sections shall
terminate in the control panels at terminal blocks. Control circuit wiring
shall connect from terminal blocks to relays, controls, and
programmable controllers.
4. Wire Markinq
Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected
to a given electrical terminal point shall be designated by a single
unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings. These
numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal using
white numbered wire markers which shall be plastic-coated cloth,
Brady Type 8-500, Thomas and Betts "E-Z Code,' or equal, or shall be
permanently marked heat-shrink plastic.
F. Forced Air Ventilation Svstem
Forced air ventilation system, thermostat controlled, shall include the
following:
1. Intake Louvers
Design air louver plate kits with design air filters to fit and one can of
spray adhesive, or equal. Intake louvers shall be sized to provide
maximum air velocity of 500 feet per minute.
2. Air Exhauster
Air exhauster shall be Dayton centrifugal type suitable for 11 0 volt
power with discharge duct and screen, or equal. Locate exhauster at
top or top side of panel. Exhauster shall be sized to provide minimum
of 15 air changes per hour at static pressure of 0.25 inches or that
created by system, which ever is greater.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Instrumentation and Control
17000-6
2.04
2.05
2.06
3. Thermostat
Thermostat shall be line voltage Dayton attic fan type, or equal with
15°F differential to turn on at 105°F and off at 90°F.
Manufacturer/supplier 'shall submit data to support ventilation equipment
selection.
Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves shall be packless construction, two-way, three-way, or four-way as
required, and shall be correctly sized for the application, unless specifically sized on
the Drawings. They shall be for normally energized or de-energized operation as
shown on the Drawings. Valve bodies shall be forged brass unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer for a particular application. The solenoids shall
be rated for continuous operation at 11 5% of rated voltage. They shall be AC or DC
current operated as specified or required. AC current coils shall have a shading ring.
DC current operated coils shall be provided with a spark suppression device. If this
device polarizes the coil, a reverse polarity protection diode shall be provided to
prevent damage in the event of accidental reverse voltage application. Polarity of the
coil shall be clearly marked on the terminals. All coils shall be housed in NEMA 4
cases with provision for 1/2" electrical conduit connection.
Thermostats
Thermostats shall be single stage or two stage (as required) cooling, line voltage
type, 120 V with contacts rated minimum 16 amps and minimum 3°F differential and
setting range 30°F to 100°F. Thermostats shall be heavy duty, rated for minimum 3/4
horsepower motor starting, and shall be as manufactured by Dayton, Honeywell, or
equal.
Conductance Liquid Level Measurement System
Each conductance liquid level measurement system shall consist of level sensors,
connection fitting, and relays as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
Contractor shall furnish and install all material and appurtenances as necessary to
provide a complete liquid level measurement system.
Level sensors shall be conductance type, utilizing electrodes and the conductivity of
the process fluid itself to measure level. The system shall be equipped with multiple
level sensing electrodes and one ground electrode. The number and lengths of level
sensing electrodes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless specified otherwise,
the electrodes shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall be provided with
PVC heat shrink sheathings.
Each connection fitting shall be pressure-tight, and suitable for connection to the
flanged top outlet of a pressure vessel. Connection fitting shall be provided with an
integral epoxy coated aluminum terminal housing and 31 6 stainless steel electrode
couplings. The number of electrode couplings shall accommodate the number of
March 2004 Instrumentation and Control
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 17000-7
level-sensing electrodes shown on the Drawings and required grounding electrode.
Connection fitting flange shall be constructed of 1018 steel, and shall be rated for a
minimum working pressure of 275 psig at 100°F. Contractor shall coordinate the size
of the pressure vessel top outlet flange with the connection fitting flange provided by
the level measurement system manufacturer.
Liquid level measurement system relays shall be solid-state, plug-in modules suitable
for 1 l-pin octal sockets. Relays shall be general purpose, single level or differential
service, with DPDT dry contacts rated for 5A (minimum) at 120 VAC. Relays shall be
suitable for operation on 120 VAC primary voltage with 12 VAC secondary voltage.
Conductance liquid level measurement system shall be as manufactured by Warrick
Controls' Inc., Gems Sensors Inc., or equal.
2.07 Timers
Timers for ventilation equipment shall be 0 to 24 hour type with tabs permitting 15
minute interval settings. Timers shall be 120 VI 60 Hz, single phase, with contacts
rated at a minimum of 5 amps when operating control circuit for 3 phase equipment or
rated to start minimum 1 horsepower motor when starting equipment motor directly.
2.08 Pressure Gauges
Unless otherwise shown or specified, pressure gauges shall be weatherproof and
provided with 4-1/2" dials, 1/4" threaded connections, epoxy coated aluminum cases
with safety glass windows, 31 6 stainless steel shut-off valves, 31 6 stainless steel
pulsation dampeners (except where diaphragm seals are required), and 31 6 stainless
steel close nipples. Bourdon tubes, bellows or diaphragm, and socket and tip shall be
316 stainless steel. Gauges subject to shock or vibration shall be wall mounted or
attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected to equipment by flexible
connectors.
Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an accuracy of +1%, to
150% of working pressure or vacuum of the monitored medium.
Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Marsh, US. Gauge, or equal.
2.09 Diaphragm Seals
Where shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere, diaphragm seals shall be
provided between the process medium and the pressure sensing element (e.g.
gauge, transmitter, or switch). Unless otherwise specified, diaphragm seals shall
have 316 stainless steel diaphragms and bottom housings. Bottom housings shall be
provided with 1/4" flushing connection, 31 6 stainless steel shut-off valve, and 316
stainless steel close nipples.
Diaphragm seals shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Marsh, or equal.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
instrumentation and Control
17000-8
2.1 0 Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches
Pressure and differential pressure switches shall utilize bourdon tubes, diaphragms,
or bellows as the sensinglactuating element. Unless otherwise specified, the
sensing/actuating element material shall be 31 6 stainless steel. The set point shall
be readily field adjustable over the range specified. Switches shall have deadband
adjustable up to a maximum of 100% of switch range. Switches shall be SPDT, rated
for 15A at 120 VAC. Switch enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X. Process
connections shall be 1/4" or 1/2" NPT, and shall be provided with 316 stainless steel
shut-off valves, 31 6 stainless steel pulsation dampeners (except where diaphragm
seals are required), and 31 6 stainless steel close nipples.
Pressure switches and differential pressure switches shall be as manufactured by
Ashcroft, Allen-Bradley, or equal.
2.1 1 Pressure Transmitters
Pressure transmitters shall be electronic two wire devices with the following features:
adjustable span, zero and damping adjustments, integral indicator scaled in
engineering units, solid state circuitry and 4-20 mA output. Accuracy shall be &25%
of span. Overrange capacity, without affecting calibration, shall not be less than
150% of maximum range. Process wetted materials shall be 316 stainless steel.
Body material shall be 316 stainless steel. Process connections shall be 1/4" or 1/2"
NPT, and shall be provided with 316 stainless steel shut-off valves, 316 stainless
steel pulsation dampeners (except where diaphragm seals are required), and 31 6
stainless steel close nipples. Fill fluid, unless otherwise specified, shall be silicone oil.
Transmitter housing shall be epoxy coated low copper aluminum alloy and rated
NEMA 4X.
Pressure transmitters shall be as manufactured by Rosemount, Foxboro, or equal.
2.1 2 Differential Pressure Transmitters
Differential pressure transmitters shall be electronic two wire devices with the
following features: adjustable span, zero and damping adjustments, integral indicator
scaled in engineering units, solid state circuitry and 4-20 mA output. Accuracy shall
be rt0.25% of span. Overrange capacity, without affecting calibration, shall not be
less than 150% of maximum range. Span shall be field adjustable over at least a 4 to
1 range. Process wetted materials shall be 316 stainless steel. Body material shall
be 316 stainless steel. Process connections shall be 1/4" or 1/2" NPT. Fill fluid,
unless otherwise specified, shall be silicone oil. Transmitter housing shall be epoxy
coated low copper aluminum alloy and rated NEMA 4X. A three (3) valve manifold
shall be provided with the transmitter. Manifold wetted surface materials shall be 316
stainless steel.
Pressure transmitters shall be as manufactured by Rosemount, Foxboro, or equal.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Instrumentation and Control
17000-9
2.1 3
2.1 4
Control Valve Limit Switches
Control valve limit switch assemblies shall provide remote indication of valve opening
and closing. Limit switches shall be single pole, double throw type, with weatherproof
enclosures. Limit switches shall be rated 15A at 120/240 VAC. Contractor shall
review each control valve installation and shall determine the necessary limit switch
accessories. Contractor shall furnish and install all limit switches, and accessories
necessary for a complete and operable system.
Control valve limit switch assemblies shall be as manufactured by CLA-VAL
Company.
Electrical Service Power Failure Protection System
The electrical service power failure protection system consists of an electronic device
which provides protection against three-phase electrical motor loss due to power
failure conditions. Power failure conditions include: low voltage, phase loss,
unbalanced voltage and phase reversal. The power failure protection device shall be
Model EAC-800 as manufactured by Watsco Components Inc., MotorSaver Model
250A as manufactured by SymCom, Inc., or equal.
Contractor shall install the power failure protection system as shown on the Drawings
or specified in the Technical Specifications. The protection system shall monitor
electrical line side power of specified equipment or facilities. The power failure
protection system shall automatically stop all electrical motors upon output relay
deactivation (unstable power conditions) and shall transmit a power failure alarm
signal to the local RTU (where specified).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall perform work and provide services as
specified herein and per Basic Electrical Specifications. It is the general intent of this
Contract that furnishing all equipment instrumentation and controls; all field wiring,
conduit installation, and wiring external to the MCC, control panels and electrical
equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. It is
intended that the design or the coordination of design of controls within motor control
center(s) and control panels and compatibility of design with equipment and
equipment systems and programming of programmable controllers and control
system start-up shall be the responsibility of the Electrical and Instrumentation
Subcontractors.
The Instrumentation Subcontractor's attention is directed to the electrical and
mechanical details of this project. Referral to these portions of the Contract
Documents shall be required in order to understand the full intent and scope of work
required.
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Instrumentation and Control
17000-1 0
3.02 Control Panel Signal And Control Circuit Wiring
A. Wirina Installation
All wires within control panels shall be run in plastic wireways. Wiring run from
components on a swing-out panel to other components on a fixed panel shall
be made up in tied bundles. These bundles shall be tied with nylon wire ties,
and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that
conductors are not strained at the terminals.
Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short
intervals with nylon wire ties and secured to the inside face of the panel using
epoxy adhesive, T & B or Panduit. Standard adhesive mounts are not
acceptable.
Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be run in plastic
wireways secured to horizontal brackets run above or below the instruments in
about the same plane as the rear of the instruments.
Conformance to the above wiring installation requirements shall be reflected
by details shown on the shop drawings for the Owner's review.
8. Wire Markinq
Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a
given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which
shall be shown on all shop drawings. These numbers shall be marked on all
conductors at every terminal using white numbered wire markers which shall
be plastic-coated cloth, or permanently marked heat-shrink plastic.
3.03 Installation, Calibration, Testing, Start-up, And Instruction
A. General
Under the supervision of the Instrumentation Subcontractor, all systems
specified herein shall be installed, connected, calibrated, tested, and started in
coordination with the equipment manufacturer and the Owner. This shall
include final calibration in concert with equipment specified elsewhere in these
Contract Documents.
B. Factorv Testinq of Control Panels
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall verify wiring continuity and panel
operation by simulated inputs and outputs to assure controls are operable and
meet the requirements of these Specifications.
March 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Instrumentation and Control
1 7000-1 1
C. Manufacturer's Enaineerina Representative
The services of manufacturer's engineering representative especially trained
and experienced in the installation of the equipment shall be provided to
supervise the installation, be present when the instruments and equipment are
first put into operation, and inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and calibrate
the instruments. All costs for representative's services shall be included in the
Contract Price.
D. Certifv Proper Installation
After all installation and connection work has been completed, the
Instrumentation Subcontractor shall check it all for correctness, verifying
polarity of electric power and signal connections, making sure all process
connections are free of leaks, and all other similar details. The manufacturer's
representative shall certify in writing to the Instrumentation Subcontractor that
for each loop or system checked out, that equipment is installed properly and
ready for start-up. See item 1.05D herein for Instrumentation Subcontractor's
Certification.
E. Calibration
All instruments and systems shall be calibrated after installation, in
conformance with the component manufacturer's instructions by the
Instrumentation Subcontractor and manufacturer's representative. Those
components having adjustable features shall be set for the specific conditions
and applications of the project, and shall be within the specified limits of
accuracy. Elements and equipment which cannot achieve proper calibration
or accuracy, either individually or within a system, shall be replaced.
F. Start-up and Instruction
When all systems have been assessed by the Contractor to have been
successfully carried through complete operational tests with not less than a
minimum of simulation, and the Owner concurs in this assessment, plant start-
up can follow. Fifteen days (minimum) prior to start-up, Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel shall be instructed in the functions and operation
of each system and shall be shown the various adjustable and set point
features which may require readjustment, resetting or checking, recalibration,
or maintenance by them from time to time. Instruction shall include
interactions of the systems, operations, shutdowns, alarms, failure, and
controls. This instruction shall be scheduled at a time arranged with the
Owner at least two weeks in advance. Instruction shall be classroom type for
minimum of four hours or as required by the Special Requirements or Special
Construction Provisions for instrumentation and controls. Instruction shall be
given by the Instrumentation Subcontractor and other qualified persons who
have been made familiar in advance with the systems in this plant.
4
March 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
instrumentation and Control
17000-1 2
SECTION 1721 0
MAGNETIC FLOW METER
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General Requirements
Contractor shall furnish and install magnetic flow meters and all appurtenant materials,
equipment, and work suitable for the services listed, complete and operable in
accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and in conformance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Upon completion of installation, the work shall be
tested to demonstrate compliance with the specifications.
1.02 Submittals
All submittals shall be in accordance with the General Provisions, Section 2-5.3.
A. ShoD Drawinas
Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with the Contractor
Submittals Technical Specification and shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Details of all components of all meters including detailed installation
instructions.
2. Electrical schematics and instrumentation specifications.
3. Meter cable.
4. Manufacturer's application performance guarantee for each meter
location, and recommendations for installation at each location.
B. ODeration and Maintenance Manual
Contractor shall submit a detailed operation and maintenance manual for the
flow metering system(s) specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Magnetic Flow Meter
A. Desian and Construction
The magnetic flow meter shall use characterized electromagnetic introduction to
produce a voltage linearly proportional to the average flow rate. Each magnetic
flow meter shall be microprocessor based, and utilize D.C. bipolar pulsed coil
excitation, automatically re-zeroing after every cycle. The sensor shall be carbon
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Magnetic Flow Meter
1721 0-1
steel tube, carbon steel flanged, and polyurethane lined, with a nominal diameter
as listed herein.
External surfaces shall be factory finished with a high build epoxy paint or better
for corrosion prevention. The flow meter electrodes and built in grounding
electrodes shall be Type 316 stainless steel. If built in grounding is not provided
Type 316 stainless steel grounding rings shall be mounted in each end of the
meter.
The preamplifier input impedance shall not be less than 1Ol1 ohms and shall be
capable of operating with a power supply of 120 volts *IO%, 60 hz *5% and
power consumption shall not exceed 11 VA. The sensor shall be NEMA 4X,
accidental submergence proof (30 W48 hours) and certified for use in Class 1,
Division 1, Groups B, C, and D.
..
Accuracy of the flow meter system shall be *I% of rate above 1 fps and &.I%
of full scale below 1 fps. Accuracy shall be verified by calibration in a flow
laboratory traceable to the U.S. National Bureau of Standards. The meter shall
incorporate an empty pipe detection feature which shall cause the meter to
register zero flow when the sensor is not full. Where shown on the Drawings,
the meter shall include a positive zero circuit to register zero flow when pumping
units are not operating.
B. Schedule of Maanetic Flow Meters -
Magnetic flow meters shall be provided as follows:
Minimum
Nominal Pressure Flow
Dia. Rating Range
Location Service (inches) (psi) (gpm)
Discharge Header Recycled 12" 300 0 to 3000
Water
Discharge Header Potable 12" 300 0 to 3000
Water
Magnetic flow meter shall be provided with ANSI Class 300 flanges.
2.02 Signal Converterfiransmitter
Signal converter shall be provided for each meter for meter mounting or remote
mounting as shown on the Drawings. Interconnecting cable of adequate length shall be
provided by the meter manufacturer. The converter shall be NEMA 4X, accidental
submergence proof (30 W48 hours) and certified for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups
B, C, and D (unless specified for panel mounting). Signal converter shall be designed
for out-of-door use and exposed to the sun light. If the display must be protected from
the sun the converter shall be furnished with an enclosure or sun shield.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Magnetic Flow Meter
1721 0-2
Signal converter shall provide a 16 character alphanumeric display indicating flow units
as specified herein and total flow in Cubic Feet X100.
Features allowing menu selection, calibration, and program changes to be made from
outside the housing shall be incorporated.
It shall produce a 4-20 mA DC output signal into a minimum load of 800 ohms, linear to
flow, and scaled pulsed output to permit operation of a flow recorder.
The signal converter shall be suitable for out-of-doors installation, wall mounting, or
flush mounting within panel door as shown on the Drawings.
Where specified or shown on the Drawings, a remote flow indicator shall be panel
mounted in the main control panel.
2.03 Manufacturer
Magnetic flow meters shall be the product of Sparling Instrument Co. Inc., ABB, or
equal. Manufacturers shall modify or supplement standard equipment to provide
features as specified he rein.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
Installation of magnetic flow meters and signal converterdtransmitters shall be in accordance
- with manufacturer’s written instructions. Manufacturers shall guarantee equipment against
defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of project acceptance.
The instrumentation subcontractor shall coordinate with the manufacture to provide suitable sun
shield or enclosure to protect the meter and signal converter in the location (environment)
shown on the drawings.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Magnetic Flow Meter
1721 0-3
I SECTION 1731 0
SECURITY AND SMOKE DETECTION EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
Contractor shall furnish and install security and smoke detection equipment as specified
herein and as shown on the Drawings to sense a security violation or the presence of
smoke or heat and cause an alarm and signal for remote telemetry. System shall be
complete with sensors and control modules.
1.02 Specific Project Requirements
Smoke detector sensors shall be installed in the Recycled Water Pump Station (RWPS)
and Potable Water Pump Station (PWPS) Equipment Buildings as shown on the
Drawings. Security detection shall be provided with magnetic sensors (door switches) at
each Equipment Building access door and a wall mounted motion detector sensor as
shown on the Drawings.
One control module shall be provided to indicate security breach. Alarm detection shall
activate individual alarm light on the module for smoke and for each door or motion
detector for security. One common alarm light shall be mounted in the main control
panel. One dry alarm contact for smoke and one dry contact for security on the control
module shall provide signals to the telemetry system.
1.03 Submittals
Contractor shall submit shop drawings and catalog cut sheets in accordance with the
General Provisions to show complete details, components, description; and wiring.
1.04 Quality
All equipment furnished shall be of current design and manufacture that has been
utilized in similar applications and environments. Manufacturers shall be as specified for
various components. Equipment shall be U.L. listed, components shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 72A, B, and C, and be approved by the State of California Fire
Marshall (CFM) whether or not the system is only security and not smoke (fire).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Detector Control Module
Detector control module(s) shall be an expandable type furnished suitable to operate the
number of sensors per zone or sensors per location specified or shown on the Drawings
and display alarm signal for each zone or location. Modules shall be powered by 120
VAC single phase 60 Hz input power, be provided with alarm light and reset for each
zone or each location, reduced voltage transformer for 12 or 24 VDC power to sensors,
April 2004 Security and Smoke Detection Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891 1731 0-1
standby batteries, and battery charger. Voltage of module(s) and sensors shall be
compatible
LED indicators and associated sensors for AC power on, system trouble, zone alarm,
zone trouble, location alarm, low battery, ground fault, and alarm circuit trouble shall be
provided. Switches for system reset, sound silence, and zone or location walk test shall
be provided.
Remote contacts for remote alarm indication suitable for 120 VAC, 10 AMP; contacts
with output power (12 or 24 VDC) to activate an alarm bell; contacts for operation of
remote sprinkler system, and dry contacts to operate remote exterior light shall be
provided.
The control module(s) shall be lntelliguard Model 5505 as manufactured by Honeywell
or equivalent equipment manufactured by Electro Signal Lab, Inc., Alarm Industry
Products, or equal.
2.02 Smoke Detector Sensors
Photoelectric type ceiling mount smoke detector sensors suitable for operation on 12 or
24 volt D.C. power from the control module shall be furnished and installed as shown on
the Drawings. Sensors shall be furnished with 30 mesh insect screen, shielded
electronics, indicators for power on and alarm and a test switch. Detectors shall be
Honeywell Model 200, Alarm Industry Products, or equal.
Smoke detector sensors shall be activated by smoke activating an alarm signal
calibrated for 2% to 3% gray smoke obscuration. In addition, sensors shall be equipped
with an integrated heat detector, such that an alarm signal is activated at 135°F.
2.03 Security Sensors
Security sensors shall be magnetic type contacts provided at doors and windows or
infrared motion type as specified herein and shown on the Drawings and shall operate
on power provided from the control module.
Magnetic sensors shall be suitable for type of door or window being secured. Hinged
door types shall be recessed into the door and door jamb at top. If being installed on
existing metal frame that has been grouted in place, a surface mount type may be
provided if approved by Owner. Detector shall be 1075 Series for wood door and jamb,
or 1078 Series for metal door and jamb as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc., or equal
biased type. Roll up type doors and windows shall be provided with surface mount 2500
series or equal biased type.
Motion detector sensors shall be U.L. approved dual passive infrared Model 7741 as
manufactured by Honeywell, or equal. Unit shall be furnished complete with swivel
mounting hardware. Features shall include four sensing elements where
thermaljdetection change can be verified by an adjacent motion detector to activate an
alarm. The range shall be based on specified location of the detector.
April 2004 Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Security and Smoke Detection
1731 0-2
2.04 Alarm Bell or Light
An alarm bell or red alarm light as shown on Drawings suitable for mounting on exterior
of building and compatible with operation by the control module shall be provided to
signal an audible or visible alarm. Where shown on the Drawings, separate alarm bell
or lights.
2.05 Spare Parts
Spare parts shall include two of each size fuse and one extra smoke detector sensor
and motion detector sensor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
The security and smoke detection system shall be installed and tested as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein:
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have the manufacturer or supplier, of the
equipment furnished under this Section, furnish the services of competent
factory-trained personnel to supervise the installation and start up on all
equipment. Allowance for this service shall be included by the manufacturer in
the price of his equipment. Installation and erection of all assemblies and
components shall be in accordance with the details indicated on the Drawings,
approved shop drawings, and the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
B. After installation, the systems shall be put through all operations.
3.02. Instruction
After the equipment has been installed, tested, and adjusted, and placed in satisfactory
operating condition, the equipment manufacturer shall provide class room instruction to
Owner's operating personnel in the use and maintenance of the equipment. One (1)
hour of instruction shall be provided unless otherwise specified. Contractor shall give
the Owner formal written notice of the proposed instruction period at least two weeks
prior to commencement of the instruction period. Scheduled training shall be at a time
acceptable to the Owner and the manufacturer. During this instruction period, the
manufacturer shall answer any questions from the operating personnel. The instruction
period shall be as long as necessary to address details of operation, routine
maintenance, repair, and special equipment features.
April 2004
Bressi Pump Station (860-3-Bres) Contract 38891
Security and Smoke Detection
1731 0-3
APPENDIX A
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION EXAMPLE
_-
APPENDIX “A”
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION EXAMPLE
le
CITY OF CARLSBAD
CONSTRUCTION WORK
ABC CONTRACTORS
OFFICE # (76O)XXX-XXXX
FIELD # (76O)XXX-XXXX
r resident:
Is a part of the City of Carlsbad’s and Carlsbad Municipal
Vater District’s ongoing program to maintain its water and
lewer facilities, your street will be closed to allow for pipeline
:onstruction. This construction will require the closing of your
,treet to through traffic for X days. Your street, from XYZ St.
3 XYZAwe. will be closed to through traffic on:
MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI.
UAIt:
’om 7:OOA.M. to 5:OO P.M.
If you don’t plan to leave your home by 7:OO A.M. on the
bove date(s) please park your car on an adjacent street in
our neighborhood that will not be impacted.
ABC is the Contractor that will be performing the
onstruction work for the city and you may call them at
76U)XXX-XXXX if you have any questions regarding the
roject. Mail delivery may be delayed if the postman cannot
3ach the mailbox that day. If you have a moving company
cheduled for that day please call and inform the Contractor of
ie date. If you have any concerns which cannot be
ddressed by the Contractor, you may call the City’s
hgineering Inspection Department at 438-1 161 x4323.
etter City of Carlsbad.
Thank you for your cooperation as we work to make a
.-
APPENDIX B
CARLSBAD CONDITIONAL USWSPECIAL USE PERMIT
<-
APPENDIX C
SDG&E DRAWINGS
SCOPE THIS STANDARD SHOWS TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF BASE, SHADTNG, AND IMPORTED OR MTIVE BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR SDG&E FACILITIES IN SAN DlEGO.COUNTY. IMPORTED OR NATM BACKFILL IS WE ALTERNATE BACKFILL MATERIAL, ONE SACK SLURRY IS THE PREF-ERRED BACKFILL MATERIAL.
-
SERVlCE WIDE
3365.1
FIG.
I Indicotac Loteat Revision I I Completely Revised I I New Poge I I Information Removed lcA5 SID. G7408
RMSION
DATE 1-1-2000
APPD W//d
SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
IMPORTED OR NATIVE BACKFILL
1 JOINT TRENCH FtG. 2 ELErnlC ONLY
r I . ..- - .I
BACKFILL -1
SLURRY E
ENCASEMEN
SINGLE GAS FIG. 3 ONLY
SDGdcE urcTR,c yL
1" EARTH 1 -SACK SLURRY SDG%E
~~ 1 4; MIN. FORUGN unm
ELECTRIC ELECTRIC ONLY ne. 4
SHADING
SERVICE N,T!ZLCO
ELECTRIC
c
- - SCOPE THIS STANDARD SHOWS TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF BASE, SHADING, AND SLURRY BACKFILL FOR SDGdcE
FACILITIES IN SAN DIEGO COUNTY.
... .. ELECTRIC 1"mRTHJ.
FIG. 1 TRENCH '0 FIG. 2 ELECTRIC ONLY
..
F)G 3 SINGLE GAS ONLY
a 1
1 -SACK SLURRY BACKFILL
SOGdcE ELECTRIC
1" EARTH
ELECTRIC ONLY
FIG. 4
INSTALLATION:
FIG. 5 JOINT TRENCH
4" MIN. SHADING
N,TELCO
SDG&E ELECTRIC
SERVICE
1" MTH ELECTRIC 3" BASE GAS
4" MIN. 1 5 SHADING In MATERIAL
N,TELCO
SDG&E ELECTRIC
SERVICE
1" MTH ELECTRIC 3" BASE GAS
SERVICE TRENCH ON PRIVATE PROPERTY FIG. 6
@ ALL TRENCH RESURFACING SHALL BE DONE ACCORDING TO GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES REQUIRWENTS.
B. SHADfNG MATERIAL SHALL MEET GAS !STANDARD 7405 OR UNDERGROUND 3370/3371 SPECIFICATIONS AND
MUST BE APPROVED BY SDGdcE AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR.
STANDARDS. AGENCIES, MUST MEET THE CONCRETE SAND SPEClFICATION LISTED IN THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION (GREEN BOOK) AND CONTAIN N_O GRAVEL SLURRY MUST BE FIRM BEFORE
A PAVEMENT CONCRETE CAP IS INSTALLED. SLURRY IS TYPICALLY USED FOR BACKFILLING AROUND SUBSTRUCTURES, UNDER EQOIPMENT PADS, FOR TRENCHES IN EXISTING PAVED AREAS, AND UNDER '
CONCRETE OR PAVED DRIVEWAYS.
IT MAY KT BE APPROPRIATE TO USE ONE SACK SLURRY UNDER WE ME FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:
@BACKFILL MATERIAL SHALL MEET THE GOVERNMENTAL (PERMITTING) AGENCIES REQUIREMENTS AND SDG%E THE SAND USED FOR ME ONE SACK SLURRY OR TWO SACK, IF REQUIRED BY GOVERNMENTAL
- GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES DO NOT ALLOW ONE SACK OR MAY REQUIRE TWO SACK SLURRY BACKFILL - INACCESSABIUTY OF CONCRETE TRUCKS DELIVERING SLURRY. - WHEN SLURRY IS NOT COST EFFECTIVE. - NEW RESIDENTIAL SUBDMSIONS, SINGLE FAMILY RESIDENCE SERVICE TRENCH - SHALLOW WELD HOLES, POT HOLES, ETC.
Informotion Removed SERVICE GUIC GAS 5~0. 0410.1 * *J Indicates Lotest Revision I 1 Cmpletdy Revised I I NW Page I 1
SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS REVISION f
INSTALLATION CONT
SONlCE GUOE
D. IF FOREIGN UTILITIES REQUIRE ENCASEMENT, MAINTAIN CLEARANCES AND PROVlDE BASE FOR CAS MAIN.
@ ONE OR MORE 5 INCH PRIMARY CONDUITS SHALL BE SWRRY ENCASED.
@ MINIMUM COMPACTED SWING MAffRlAL OVER THE UPPERMOST GAS PIPE OR CONDUIT SHALL BE: 4 INCHES. THE GAS MAN OR GAS SERVICE SHALL NMR BE CONCRETE OR SLURRY ENCASED AND SHALL HAVE THE PROPER BASE, SHADING, BACKFlU AND COMPACTION.
INSTALLATIONS. @ MAINTAIN MIN. 30” COVER OVER PRIMARY, SECONDARIES AND SERVICES ON DIRECT BURIAL CONDUIT
@ USE APPROVED SDG&E CONDUIT AND SPACERS.
0 ON SERVICES IN PRIVATE YARDS, ALLOW FOR 6” OF TOP SOIL FOR LANDSCAPING PURPOSES.
New Page I I inditotes Latest Revislm I I Completdy Rsviied I I I Information Removed 1- STD. 0’14102 I REVISION SDG&E UCTRIC STANDARDS
REFERENCE
3365.3
J. SEE UNDERGROUND STANDARD 3370, 3371 (GAS STANDARD 7403).~0~ UTILITY P~CEMEM, CLEARANCES, MINIMUM SHADING, COVER, AND COMPACTION.
DATE 1-1-2000
APPD #&/id S.LU RRY BACKFILL
K. SEE UNDERGROUND STANDARD 3376.1 FOR 1 SACK CONCRETE SLURRY MIX AND 2 SACK 3/8” GRAVEL CONCRETE MIX OR REQUIRED BY GOmNMENTAL AGENCY.
1. SEE UNDERGROUND STNDARD 3365.1 OR GAS STANDARD 7409 FOR ALTERNATE IMPORTED OR NATIVE BACKFILL.
SCOPE:- THIS STANDARD SHOWS TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF BASE, SHADING AND ONE SACK SLURRY BACKFILL - AS A PREFERRED METHOD OF BACKFILL FOR' SDGkE FACILITIES.
CAS STO. 7410.5
RNtSlON
INSTALLATION:
A. ONE SACK SLURRY IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR BACKFILL.
3. IMPORTED OR NATM BACKFILL IS THE ALTERNATE MFTHOD FOR BACKFILL.
C. SLURRY IS MPICALLY USED FOR BACKRLLINC AROUND SUBSTRUCTURES, UNDER EOUIPMENT .. PADS, FOR TRENCHES IN EXISTING PAVED AREAS AND UNDER CONCRETE OR PAVED DRIVEWAYS.
'' Indicates Latest Revision 1 ,I Complctdy Revbed I I ~e*r pope I { Information Removed SEfWVX Wmf
' . SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS I -
E. IT MAY NOT BE APPROPRIATE TO USE ONE SACK SLURRY UNDER THE FOLLOWlNG CIRCUMSTANCES: - GOVERNMENTAL (PERMITTING) AGENCIES W NOT ALLOW ONE SACK SLURRY OR MAY RfQUlRE
TWO SACK SLURRV BACKR~L. - INACCESSABILIW OF CONCRETE TRUCKS DELIVERING SLURRY.
.- WHEN SLURRY IS NOT COST EFFECTIVE. - - SWOW WELD HOLES, POT HOLES, ETC.
NMI RESIDENTIAL SUBDMSIONS, SINGLE FAMILY RESIDENT SERVICES.
TYPICAL SLURRY I NSTALIATI 0 NS
371 3 INSTALUTION
OPEN DELTA BANK THREE-PHASE' a
3325/3326 MANHOLES'
331 S/3316 HANDHOLE
3314 HANDHOLE
3426/3427 TRANSFORMER PAD
-\.- ' WITH 3314 SECTIONS
A
STACKED
SERVICE CONDUITSS
SLURRY' BACKFILL I 3362.
DATE 1-1-98
APPD @/m SLURRY BACKFILL 3365.5
L
I TYPICAL SLURRY IN STALLATIONS
.. . ..
ONE
SH~INC MATERIAL NOTE: 7
GAS PIPE SHALL NOT BE SLURRY ENCASED. SEE NOTE F
REFERENCE
A SEE UNDERGROUND STANDARD PG. 3365.1 (GAS STANDARD G7409) FOR ALTERNATE IMPORTED OR
NATM BACKFILL
I SERVICE GUIDE I lndicoter Lotest Revision I I Completely Revised I 1 New Page 1 I Informotion Removed I W m. G~w. 1 I SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS REVISION
._ .... .. . ,
-_
r'..,. . ,; _.. ivd !
-P T
ScOpE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS MPlCAL PLACEMENT OF UTlUTiES WTHlN TRENCHES FOR DlSTRlBUnON AND SERVldE IN DEDICATED R/W (STREET) AND PRIVATE PROPERM, AND PROVIDES THE MINIMUM DEPTH AND CLEARANCE THAT MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN VARIOUS UTILITIES OCCUPYING THE SAME TRENCH IN SAM DIEGO COUNTY.
-
"
1
SDC&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES
AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY 3370. I
- t2*,.
T u. @--
12'
REVISION
DATE 1-1-98
*PPD @lCIp(r
PROPERTY SIDE 1
1"
PRoPERlY SIM
1-1 SEE STANDARD 3376 FOR FIG 3 LwER CONDUIT/TRENCH
CONFIGURATIONS)
I
LEGEND
,--- GMI GAS MAIN
NMES: - - DfWWINGS ARE NOT TO SCALE. - SPACE ALLOTMENTS (OTHER THAN FOREIGN UTILITY) ARE 1/2 INC LARGER THAN THE NOMINAL SIZE OF GAS MAIN, GAS SERVICE OR ELECTRIC CONDUIT. SEE INSTAUATION NOTE ($ FOR FOREIGN UTILITY SPACE ALLOTMENT. - NPICAL TRENCH SECTIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR INSTALLATIONS WHERE EACH OCCUPANT IS UTILIZING HIS ENTIRE SPACE ALLOTMENT. PROVIDING MINIMUM COVER AND CLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED A5 LISTED ON PAGE 3370.2. ONLY ONE FOREIGN UTlLlM SPACE ALLOTMENT FOR TELCO AND/OR CAN IS ALLOWED PER TRENCH. TRENCH MUST BE ADJUSTED ACCORDING TO SPACE ALLOTMENTS. MINIMUM CLEARANCES AND MINIMUM COVER,
SIZE OF SPACE ALLOTMENTS MAY BE REDUCED OR ADDITIONAL ALLOTMENTS MAY BE ADDED
WIDTH AND DEPTH OF THE
- GAS PIPE REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES RADIAL SEPARATION FROM ALL UTILITIES.
THE FOLLOWING CHARTS SHOW THE MINIMUM COVER FOR EACH UTILIM, THE MINIMUM SEPARATION BETWEEN SPACE ALLOTMENTS AND THE MAXIMUM SIZE fOR EACH SPACE ALLOTMENT. TO READ THE CHARTS. RW) ACROSS AND DOWN UNTIL THE TWO JOIN IN A SOUARE, AND THAT IS THE DISTANCE REOUIRED BEWEEN THE TWO UTILITIES.
EXAMPLE .
UNDER VERTICAL, 'Ef' k 'ES" JOIN AT @WHICH REFERS TO INSTALLATION NOTE 0.
UNDER HORIZONTAL, 'ES' & 'GS' JOIN AT 12 INCHES WHICH WOULD BE THE. DISTANCE REQUIRED FROM THE OUTER EDGE of THE ELECTRIC SERVICE (SPACE ALLOTMENT) TO THE OUTER EDGE OF GAS SERVICE (SPACE ALLOTMENT).
I * Au MINIMUM COVER DEPTHS MEASURED FROM FINAL GRADE. DEPTHS THAN WHAT IS SHOWN UNDER "MINIMUM COVER'. REDUCED DEPTHS IN NOTE @ ARE LESSER
I--) NOT ALLOW€D.
SERVICE TRENCH PRIVATE PROPERTY (MINIMUM SEPARATION FROM)
lNSTJUJAnON2
A AN mRT SHOULD BE MADE TO KEEP ME TRENCH DEPTH LESS THAN 60 INCHES. IF A PERSON IS REOUIRED TO ENTER A TRENCH 60 INCHES OR DEEPER, IT SWU BE SHORED, BENCHED, OR SLOpM 70 PREVENT MOVEMENT OF E3RTI-l THAT MAY ENDANGER UFE OR PROPER". THE TRENCH CONFIGURATION, UnLm POmONlNC AND ALL OTHER RWTED. CONSTRUCTION MUST CONFORM TO THIS STANDARD AND WE STATE OF CALIFORNIA PUBUC UTILITIES COMMISSION GENERAL ORDERS 128 AND lIZD, AND ANY OTHER APPROPRIATE GOVERNMENTAL AGENm HAVING JURISDICTION OVER CONSTRUCTION.
NOM: BENCHING THE TRENCH is FOR SWETY REASONS ONLY AND NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES.
B THE TRENCH DEPTH IN THIS STANDARD SHALL BE FOLUWED FOR ALL NORMAL INSTALLATIONS. IN INSTAUATONS WHERE THE TRENCH DEPTH CANNOT BE MET, G.O. 128 REQUIRES ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) STEEL, OR (2) SCHEDULE 40 PVC OR SCHEDULE 80 PVC CONDUIT WITH A MlNlMUM WALL THICKNESS OF 0.15 INCHES, OR (3) A 3 INCH LAYfR OF CONCRETE (2 SACK 3/8' DEPTHS MUST BE APPROVED BY BOTH TH INSPECTOR.
PERMTIED WITHOUT SEPARATION WHEN INSTALLED IN A HORVONTAt CONFIGURATION. SPACE ALLOTMENT E PERMITTED NEXT TO THE ELECTRIC SPACE ALLOTMENTS Wrm0l.I" SpmnON. MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH, 24 INCH MAXIMUM TRENCH WIDTH) ('SEE STANDARD 3376 FOR CONDUIT/TRENCH
-
OF WE CONDUIT. REDUCED
C CONDUIT COMBlNATlON SMALLER THAN 5 INCH, (NOT MULTIPLE ELECTRIC-ME OR SERVICE CONDUITS) ARE SDGdrE IN COMMUNICATIONS (6 INCH
CONFIGURATION).
3370.3
@ BASE AND SWNG MATERIAL FOR CAS TRENCH ONLY:
IMPORTED MATERIAL COt&!SnNG OF NATURAL SAND OR UANUFACTURED SAND, EXISTING HADING MATERIAL PROVIDED IT COMPLIES MATERIAL, OR GAS STANDARD WITH COMPACTION REOUIREMENTS OF GOVERNMENTAL E MATERIAL MUST HAVE A MIXTURE Of PARTICLE SIZES MATERIAL AND IMPORTED MATERN PROVIDED BY A DMLOPER NT PROrrSSlONAL TESTING flRM IF, IN THE OPINION OF ME
RMSION SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
UNDERGROUND DISTFWUTION (UD) TRENCHES DATE 3-1-
SHADING MATERIAL FOR ELECTRIC TRENCH ONLY: ELECTRIC SHADING MATERIAL (ESM) SPECIFICATION.
ACCEPTABLE MATERW FOR (D8) DIRECT BURIED CONDUITS. NATURAL SAND, MANUFACNRM) SAND, DECOMPOSED GRANe. ROCK FREE SANDY LOAM, EXISTING NATIVE MATERIAL OR COMBINATION THEREOF. AOGREDATE COMPOSITION SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PASSING THROUGH A 1/2 INCH SIM. SLIlT'Lf MEANS MAY BE REQUIRED AT THE DISCRETION OF THE SDGdrE INSPECTOR TO MEET THIS (ESM) SHADING MATERM SPECIFICATION. NOT ACCEPTME ARE SOILS OF HIGHLY ORGANIC CONTENT IDENTlflED BY ODOR OR SPONGY FEEL AND HIGHLY PLASFIC (SOCGY) CLAYS, SILTS OR METAulC SLAG.
GRAVELS SHALL NOT AMWM TO MORE THAN 5oX OF THE MIXTURE. SCREENING OR OTHER
BASE AND SHADING MATERIAL FOR JOINT CAS AND ELECTRIC TRENCH: WHEN BOTH GAS AND E COMPLlES WlTH GAS STAN USED FOR THE GAS PIPE. ELECTRIC SWNG MATERIAL (ESM) MAY BE USED FOR
N THE SAME TRENCH, THE BASE AND SHADING MATERW WHICH
ELECTRIC CONDUIT.
BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR GAS AND/OR ELECTRIC:
THE MATERW USED FOR BACKFILLING THE TRENCH ABOVE THE SHADING MATERIAL AND WNDINC UPWARD TO THE SUBGRADE SHALL BE FREE OF ROCKS OR CLODS LARGER THAN 6 INCHES IN ANY DIMENSION.
MAERIAL SHW. BE WELL DISTRIBUTED THROUGHOUT THE flNER MATERIAL THE AMOUNT OF ROCKS OR CLODS SMAU BE LIMITED, IN THE OPINMN OF THE INSPECTOR, TO ALLOW FOR BAR TESTING FOR CAS LEAKS. BACKFILL MATERIAL SHALL MEET THE REOUIREMENTS OF A.L APPLlGABLE CODES, ~NA"ANEs AND SDGdrE
STANDARDS AND BE FREE OF DEBRlS AND ORGANIC MATER. 3-SACK FOR BACKFILL MATERIAL IF THE PIPE GAS IS SHADED WITH A MINIMUM. MATERN.. 1-WK CONCRETE SLURRY MIX IS PREFERRED FOR BACKFI N SHALL MEET MEET THE REOUIREMENTS OF GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES AND SDCdrE STANDARDS.
THE COARSE
THE
E USED FOR SHADlNG
BASE INSTAUATION FOR GAS:
FOR CAS. 5 INCHES OF BASE MATERN IS REOUIRED Off THE BOllOM OF THE TRENCH TO PREVENT DAMACE FROM ROCKS, SAGS, OR POGKETS.
EARTH TRENCH BOTTOM INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRIC (EB & DB CONOUQ.
THE 1 INCH EARTH TRENCH BOTI'OM SHAU BE STABLE WITH A UNIFORM GRADE CONTAINING NO HARD CLODS, ROCKS, ETC. THAT MAY DAMAGE THE CONDUIT. BE *DAMAGED, TAMPING, WrmNC OR A 3 INCH BASE UScTRlC SHAMNG MATERIAL (ESM) MAY BE REOUIRED. IF, IN THE OPINDN OF THE SDGdrE INSPECTOR, THE CONDUIT MAY
SHADING INSTUTION
A MINIMUM COV!ZR 0 COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL COMPACTION) SHALI. BE REOUiRED ABOVE THE D ELECTRIC CONDUIT. A MINIMU NCHU OF COMPACTED SHADlNfi MA"AL WILL BE REOUIRED if, IN THE OPINION OF WE INSPECTOR, THERE IS AN EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF ROCK AND CLODS IN THE EACKFIL THE SHADlNG MATER= MUST BE INSTALLED MID COMPACTED AT EACH LEVEL BEFORE INSTALLING THE NEXT UTIUM. THE SWNG MATERM MUST BE INSTALLED BEFORE THE TRENCH IS RACKFILED TO PRMNT DAMAGE FROM ROCKS, CLODS, ETC. GAS PIPE SHAU NMR RE CONCRETE OR SLURm ENCASED, AND SHALL HAVE THE PROPER ME, SHADING, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION.
COMPrnN: . EXTREME CARE SHAU BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT SHAOING MATERIAL IS ADEQUATELY COMPACTED BOTH UNDERNUTH AND AROUND GAS PIPE AND FIlTlNCS TO PRMm EXCESSIVE SfRESs AND SHEARING FORCES, HAND TEMP AROUND FIlTINGS WHERE MECHANICAL COMPACTION CANNOT BE USED. COMPACTING WITH A HYDRAHAMMER OR SlMllAR EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED ON TRENCHES WHERE POLYETHYLENE PIPE HAS BEEN INSTALLED. WHEN THE SHEEP'S FOOT METHOD OF COMPACTION IS USED, A-MINIMUM OF 18' OF
COVER IS REQUIRED BEFORE COMPACTING. WHEEL ROLLING WITH A HEAVY VEHICLE, COMBINED WITH ADEQUATE PACTION, IF NEEDED, IS ALLOWED FOR COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL PROVIDED A MINIMUM MECHANICALLY COMPACTED SHADE MATERIAL AND A MINIMUM OF 12" OF BACKFILL MATERIAL GAS PIPE OR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. WHEN FLOODING OF THE TRENCH IS DONE TO CONSOLIDATE BACKFIU, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT GAS PIPE OR ELECTRIC CONDUIT HAS NOT FLOATED FROM ITS POSITION IN THE Tf?ENCH. COMPACTION BY THE WATER JETTING MmoD IS NO1 ALLOWED. ALLOWED. SHADING AND BACKFILL SHALL BE COMPACTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES AND SHALL HAM A MINIMUM OF 90 PERCENT RELATIVE COMPACTION.
ALL BASE, SHADING, AND BACKFILL MATERIAL MUST BE APPROVED BY AN SDGkE INSPECTOR.
ONE OR' MORE 5 INCH PRIMARY CONDUITS SHAU BE SLURRY ENCASED.
~
SINGLE ELECT. 2 INCH CONDUIT 6 INCHES
SINGLE ELECTRIC 6 FOREIGN UTILITIES (EXCLUDING GAS) 2 INCH CONDUIT 6 INCHES
ELECT' ELECTRIC ALL SIZES 9 INCHES
SINGLE ELECTRIC & FOREIGN
12 INCHES UTILITIES (EXCLUDING GAS)
JOINT UTILITIES ALL PERMITTED SIZES 12 tNCHES
MULTIPLE ELECTRIC SPACERS AND 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY 9 INCHES
SERVICE
LARGER THAN 2 INCH
FOR A CAS OR ELECTRIC SERVICE. IF ANY OBSTRUCTION IS ENCOUNTERED (WATER PIPES, ETC.), A 2 FOOT WIDE X 3 FOOT LONG HOLE MAY BE REOUIRED FOR WORKING ROOM IN THE AREA OF THE OBSTRUCTION. THIS IS TO BE DETERMINED BY AN SDGkE INSPECTOR
12 INCH RADIAL SEPARATION FROM ALL OTHER UTILITIES MUST BE MAINTAINED (SEE FIGURES 1 AND 5). IF
(U) SPACE ALLOTMENT EXCEEDS A 9 INCH HORIZONTAL MEASUREMENT, IT MUST BE PLACED DIRECTLY ABOVE THE ELECTRiC SPACE ALLOTMENTS AND SHALL NOT EXTEND PAST THE OUTER SIDES OF ELECTRIC SPACE
IS 9" X 9' OR SMALLER. IT IS ALLOWED AT THE SAME LEVEL AS THE
@ THE FOREIGN UTILITY (U) SPACE ALLOTMENT MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES BELOW THE GAS MAIN AND
PURPOSES, BENCHING THE TRENCH IS NOT ALLOWED), SEE FIGURES 2.
FOREIGN UTILITIES MUST NOT BE LOCATED UNDER ANY SDGkE FACILITIES, SUCH AS WDHOLES. TRANSFORMER PADS, RC.
SINGLE GAS - SERVICE 1 INCH AND LESS 6 INCHES
SINGLE GAS 1 INCH 9 INCHES
SINGLE GAS 3 AND 4 INCHES 12 INCHES
SINGLE GAS 6 AND 8 INCHES 18 INCHES
GAS
ELECT. MAIN TRENCH
ALL CONDUIT SIZES INCLUDING 2 - 5 INCHES .....-...--- 6 INCHES ELECTRIC ALL SIZES ..... ...... .... .KZ.I 2 INCHES?. ~"~-"~-~~~::~.~~~~~+~~ ALL PERMITED. SIZES-
MULTIPLE ELECTRIC . SPACERS AND 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY 9 INCHES
..
2s3. ..... g.346 .AND 8 INCH GG)@@$$-+-..zs+?g18 ....... ....................... ............... _...-...." INCHES% ....... u JOINT' UTILITIES
I.,.,, I
REVISION ' SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
DATE 1-1-2000
APPD
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES
AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S-D. COUNV
3370.4 ' 1
I'
SERVICE WIDE
0. MINIMUM SEPARATION WN TRENCH
.. '1 lndicotcs Latest Revision I 1 Completely Revised I IN- Page .I I1nfarmotiDn RW~ I w 7435 m.
SOCdcE ELECTRIC STANDARDS
UTlUM -
TELCO MuLnPLE CONCRETE DUCT (CONDEX), TRAN~, WATER, SEWER, FUEL, OIL DIESEL, PROPANE GAS, SPRINKLER, DRAIN. LEACH LINES, =EL GAS MAIN LARGER THAN 2", PRIVATELY OWNED UTluTlES i.e. PRIVATE TELCO, WDEO, AUDIO, SECURITY WIRES, flRE ALARM, STREET LIGHTING, ETC..
.3 370.5
HORIZONTAL SEPARATION
NOT PERMITTED IN JOINT TRENCH WITH GAS AND/OR ELECTRiC
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES DATE 1-14
AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNTY APPD @.o/qy
WATER, SEWER, EXISTING GAS OR ELECTRIC, STORM DRAINS, STEAM. IRRIGATION PIPE, SPRINKLER PIPE LARGER THAN 4", UNDISTURBED SOIL PRIVATE TELCO TRANSITE, PROPANE GAS
*5 FEET WTfi 3 FEET OF
SEWAGE LEACH UNES OR SEEPAGE PITS 5 FEET FROM MAIN TRENCH FOR EACH 1' DEPTH OF MAIN TRENCH
IRRIGATION, SPRINKLER PIPE 4" AND LESS 3 FEET PROVIDED DEPTH OF PIPE DOES *NOT EXCEED DEPTH OF GAS OR ELECTRIC
FUEL OIL, GASOLINE, DIESEL FROM GAS-15 FEET, FROM ELECT.-5 FEET WITH 3 FEn OF UNDISTURBED SOL
IN CONSIDERATION FOR THE SAFE'W W THE GENERAL PUBLIC, PERSONS ENGAGED IN CON-RUCTION, PROPERM, AND FOR THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF SDG&E SYSTEM, PROPANE GAS LINES ARE NOT PERMWED IN A JOIN TRENCH WITH SDGkE FACILITIES.
* IF FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT ANY OF THESE SEPARATIONS, THEN APPROVAL OF REDUCED SEPARATIONS MUST COME FROM BOTH THE CUSTOMER PROJECT PLANNER AEID SOGkE INSPECTOR. ON FIELD CONDITIONS THAT WILL NOT PERMIT STANDARD PARALLEL SEPARATIONS, A 12 INCH MINIMUM SEPARATION 1s REQUIRED. PROPANE GAS SHALL ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION.
VERTICAL (CROSSING)
UTlm SEPARATION M1N. -
ALL WET UTILITIES, TELCO, TV. GAS, ELECT. .
FUEL OIL, GASOLINE, DIESEL ..
ARC-WELDAkE PlPEUNES 3" AND LARGER
STEAM (SEE NOTE)
6 INCHES
FROM GAS, 12 INCHES FROM ELECT. 6 INCHES
1 E lNCHES
FROM GAS, POLY PIPE 5 FEET FROM ELECT., 5 FEET
MINIMUM SEPARATION SERVICE TFXNCH
IN A SERVICE TRENCH, WATER, SEWER, PROPANE GAS, SPRINKLER, DRAIN, LEACH LINES, PRIVATELY OWNED UTILITIES i.e.. PRIVATE TELCO, VIDEO, AUDIO, SECURITY WtRES. FIRE AIARM, SFRM LIGHTING. EX.. ARE NOT PERMITTED IN THE SAME TRENCH WITH c;As OR ELECTRIC. 12 INCHES SPARATtON BETWEEN SEPARATE TRENCHES SHALL BE MAINTAINED BEWEEN THE UTILITIES WITH AT LEAST 12 INCHES OF UNDISTURBED NAM SOIL BETWEEN TRENCHES. PROPANE GAS SHALL ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION. WHEN CROSSING, A 6 INCH VERTICAL SEPARATION !$ REQUIRED.
(mC€FTlON) WHEN THERE IS NO SDG&E GAS IN THE SERVICE TRENCH, A SINGE NATURAL GAS LINE MAY BE INSTALLED IN -THE TRENCH, PROVIDED A 12 INCH RADW SEPARATION IS MAINTAINED. INDMDUAL HOUSE ON A CASE BY CASE BASIS, NOT A GROUP OF HOUSES/BUILDINGS).
FUEL OIL, GASOLINE, AND DIESEL LINES MUST MAINTAIN A 15 FOOT SEPARATION FROM GAS PIPELINES AND A FIVE FOOT SEPARATION WITH THREE FEET OF UNDISTURBED SOIL SEPARATION FROM ELECTRIC CONDUE.
IF FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT THESE SEPARATIONS, THEN APPROVAL OF REDUCED SEPARATIONS MUST
COME FROM BOTH THE CUSTOMER PROJECT PLANNER AND SDGdrE INSPECTOR.
WHEN FIELD CONDITIONS WILL NOT PERMIT STANDARD PARALLEL SEPARATIONS, A 12 JNCH MINIMUM SEPARATION IS REQUIRED. PROPANE CAS SW ALWAYS HAVE A 5 FOOT SEPARATION.
WHEN THESE FACILITES PARALLEL GAS OR ELECTRIC,
(THIS IS FOR AN
@ THE GAS MAIN.SHALL BE THE LAST INSTALLED. SHAU BE ON THE PROPERTY SIDE OF THE TRENCH. AND
CAS m. 7405.6
REVISION
(3
S.
T.
0 0 0
0
X.
2.
1 I tnfmotion Removed IfERVlCE GUIDE 1 Indicates Latest Reviston I I Completely Revised I I New Pogo
SDG%E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 4 INCH PAD (HR COMPACTION) OF SHADING MATERIAL THE WIDTH -of. THE TRENCH ABOVE ANY FORflGN UTILllY. ANY CROSSING INVOLVING GAS SHALL A MINIMUM VERTICAL SEPARATION OF 6 INCHES. A GAS SERVICE INSTALLED IN A MAIN TRENCH OR A SERVICE TRENCH ON PUBLIC PROPERTY SHALL REQUIRE THE SAME COVER AND CLEARANCES AS A GAS A GAS SERVICE IN A TRENCH DN PRIVATE PROPERTY MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL AS FORUCN UTlLllY OR ELECTRIC, BUT SHALL NOT BE DEEPER THAN THE ELECTRIC SERVICE. SDGdcE INSPECTOR IS TO DEERMINE AT WHICH LNEL THE CAS SEWCE IS INSTALLED ON PRIVATE PROPERTY.
SDG&E INSTALLED mEEI UGHT CIRCUITS, WHEN INSTALLED ALONE IN A TRENCH, SHALL BE AT A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 24 INCHES MWHERE EXCEPT ON PRIVATE PROPERPI, WHERE THE MINIMUM MAY BE 18 INCHES BELOW FINAL GRADE
THE ELECTRIC PRIMARY WILL BE ON THE STRm SIDE OF WE TRENCH. THE SDG%E SIRE!T LIGHT CIRCUITS WILL BE ON THE PROPERM SIDE OF THE TRENCH WHENEVER POSSIBLE. FOREIGN UTILITY STREf3 LIGHTS (NOT SERIES) SHALL BE ON ME PROPER7Y SIDE OF THE TRENCH AT THE SAME LEVEL AS SDG%E CONDUITS AND SHALL MAlNTAlN A 12 INCH RADIAL SEPARATION. ALL uT(LfllES SHALL MAINTAIN A 6 INCH SEPARATION WHEN CROSSING ALL.SDG%E ELECTRIC. FOR SEPARATION ON THE SERVICE TRENCH, SEE CHART ON PAGE 7403.2 (3370.2).
MINIMUM HORIZONTAL SEPARATION FROM CAS PIPE TO ANY FOREIGN SUBSTRUCTURE (VAULTS, HANDHOLES, EC.) SHU BE 12 INCHES.
GAS LINES MUST NOT BE LOCATED UNDER ANY SRUCTURE, SUCH AS BUILDINGS, CARPORTS, PATIOS, BREEZEWAYS. EQUIPMENT PADS, AND FACILITIES, SUCH AS SPLICE BOXES FOR ELECTRIC, CATV, TELCO, €E. TREES OR SHRUBBERY MUST NOT BE PMD OVER AlrM GAS PIPELINE. A THREE FOOT SEPAf?AllON MUST BE MAINTAINED BRWEEN THE TREE ROOT BALL AND THE GAS PIPELINE.
IF AN AGENCY OR URUM SUCH AS THE U.S. GOVERNMENT, SAN DIEGO UNIFIED PORT DI'STRICT, TELCO, CATV, ETC. REQUIRES CONCRETE ENCASEMENT, CONCRETE MAY BE SUBSTITWED FOR I3-E BACKFILL BASE & SHADING SW BE PER SDGdcE STANDARDS. ON SDGkE CONDUITS, EITHER DIRECT BURIED OR CONCRETE ENCASED, A MINIMUM 4 INCH COMPACTED SHADING MATERIAL SHALL BE INSTALLED OVERTHE UPPERMOST DB CONDUITS BEFORE THE CONCRETE BACKFILL IS INSTALLED. ALL OTHER INSTALIATIONS SHALL PROVIDE THE REQURED MATERWS AS SPECIFIED IN THIS STANDARD AND STANDARDS 3365 k 3376. HAVE THE PROPER BASE. SHADING, BACKnLL, AND COMPACTION. NOTE: THE GAS MAIN. GAS SERVICE SHALL NEVER BE CONCRETE OR SLURRY ENCASED AND SHALL
MlNlMUM SEPARATION OF ANY FOREIGN UTIW INCWDING WATER PIPES, SMER, ne., FROM SDG%E SUBSTRUCTURES SHALL BE 12 INCHES. PROPANE GAS SHAU. BE 5 FEET.
REFERENCE:
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.1 FOR CmuM LOCATIONS IN LOCAL AND COLLECTOR STREETS.
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.2 FOR UTluTy LOCATIONS IN MAJOR STREETS, PRIME ARTERIALS AND EXPRESSWAYS.
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3364.3 FOR JOINT TRENCH WPlCAL LOCATION FOR UNDERGROUND CONVERSIONS.
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3365 FOR IMPORTED OR NATIVE BACKFIU MATERIAL
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3365 FOR SLURRY BACKRLL MATERIAL
CONCREE OR CONCRETE SLURRY ENCASEMENT OF ELECTRIC CONDUITS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD 3376.
SEE STANDARD PAGE 3376, 3421, 3425, 3426, AND 3427 FOR CONDUIT CONFIGURATIONS ALLOWED IN THE SERVICE TRENCH.
SEE STANDARD 4620 TELECOMMUNICATIDNS INSTALLATION.
FOR TRENCHING AND SHORING QUESTIONS, SEE SDG&E TRENCHING AND SHORING MANUAL.
)ATE 1-1-2000 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION (UD) TRENCHES AND UTILITY POSITIONING - S.D. COUNM I 3370.6
scoe~: THIS STANDARD SHOWS CEMENT AND SLURRY MIXTURE.' ALSO SHOWN ARE CONCRETE SLURRY
ENCASED CONDUIT :INSTALLATIONS. -
6
I DATA FOR CONDUITS WHICH ARE NORMALLY INSTLED 2 CONDUITS WIDE AND 1 THRU 4 ROWS HIGH
12.4 11.8
1 CONCRETE. PER 100 FT I NUMBER OF I OF TRENCH, CUBIC YARDS
.E 16.1
CONDUITS IN TRENCH
CONDUITS CONDUITS
5.5 5.2
8.5
15.1
CEMENT AIR
x FOR ENTWNMENT
ENCASEMENT 0-2
-7 -~
INGREDIENTS FOR 1-SACK CONCRETE SLURRY MIX (PER 'YARQ)
GRAVEL CEMENT ' SLUMP
MAX., TOTAL WATER SAND
(LBS) MIN. MAX.
(IN) (IN) SIZE LBS SACKS'. LBS
3000*50 - - 1 94 60 WS PER YARD 6 6
CEMENT AIR ENTRAINMENT 5: FOR
ENCASEMENT 0-2
SLUMP SAND GRAVEL CEMENT MAX., 70T& WATER
(BS) PER SACK Of CEMENT (GALS.) . MAX- (IN) (IN) SIZE LBS SACKS L8S
1600f20 3/8 1600f20 2 188 50 GALS PER YARD 6 8
INSTALLATION WHERE CONCRETE SLURRY ENCASEMENT (1 -SACK MIX) AND SPACERS ARE REQUIRED:
;. WHEN CONDUITS ARE IN A STACKED CONFlGURATlON WITH SPACERS, !3JCASED BURIED (EB) CONDUITS MUST BE ENCASED WITH 1-SACK SLURRY.
WHEN EXTENDED FROM A DIRECT BURIED TRENCH INTO THE STACKED CONFIGURATION.
DIRECT BURED (De) CONDUI'E ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE
INSTALLATION FOR CONCRETE SLURRY ENCASEMENT (1 -SACK MIX) OR IMPORTED/NATIM MATERIAL
WITHOUT SPACERS:
1. WHEN CONDUITS ARE SIDE BY SIDE ON THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH (4 CONDUITS MAX.). IN THE TRANSITION AREA WHERE THE CONDUITS FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH ~~ TOWARD THE SURFACE (THE STRAIGHT PORTlON BY THE 9r BEND), SPACERS MAY BE REOUIRED TO ALLOW THE 9U BENDS TO ENTER STRAIGHT INTO THE PAD OPENING.
MATERIAL. DIRECT BURIED (DB) CONDUITS ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
USE DIRECT BURIED (DB) CONDUIT WITH IMPORTED NATIVE USE ENCASED BURIED (EB) CONDUITS WITH CONCRETE SLURRY ENCASEMENT (1-SACK MIX).
2. IF THE SERVICE CONDUIT EXTENDS INTO THE MAIN TENCH WHERE STACKING IS REWIRED, ALL CONDUITS SHALL RE INSTALLED IN ONE PACKAGE WITH SPACERS AND 1-SACK SLURRY.
7 SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SHOWS'REOUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLING A 3426 THREE-PHASE PAD FOR DEAO FRONT TRANSFORMER APPLICATION THROUGH 1000 KVA.
342680
342663
PAD ONLY
W/3 HH
~~ ~ ~ ~~
1
MIMUM PRIMARY CONDUITS ALLOWED
RIMARY CONDUITS
RUNS OF 4" (EB OR De)
1' 1'
CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT WIT'HOUT HANDHOLE FOR ONE CUSTOMER ULTIMATELY (SEE NOTES @ 0)
information Removed ;ERVICE GUIDE Indicates Latest Rsvision I I Completely Revised I I NW Pope I I
SDG%E ELECTRIC STANDARDS REVISION
3426. I THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3426 E 1-1-98
CAL INSTALIATION FOR ., " OR, 9-41 SECONDARY
, CONDUITS
SEfnnCE CUtDE
3426.2
MAXJMUM PRIMARY CONDUITS ALLOWED
2 RUNS OF 4" (E6 .OR DE) ,
tndicotcs btwt R*on I 1 Completely Revised I I New Page Informotion Removud
REVlSION - SDG%E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3426 DATE 1--1-b,
APQD @/04v.
14- 1 /2"7 P* I
MplCAL INSTALLATION FOR 6-5' SECONDARY CONDUITS
NOTES: - TRANSFORMER COOLlNG FINS MAY OVERHANG REAR OF PAD By 6 INCHES.
12"
T
1.
f
12"
- .IF THE NUMBER OF SECONDARY CONDUITS !S GREATER THAN THE MAXIMUM SHOWN, USE A PAD PER STANDARD 3427. - TRANSFORMER PAD MAY NOT BE POURED IN PLACE. USE PRECW PADS ONLY.
/--
I--
-
@ 1 INCH MTH IN THE BOTTOM OF TRENCH IS REQUIRED TO PREVENT DAMAGE moM ROCKS, SAGS AND
@ PUCE ALL SECONDARY CONDUITS WITHIN THE PAD OR HANDHOLE OPENING .AS SHOWN ON PAGES 3426.1
POCKETS.
OR 3426.2. TERMINATE PRIMARY OR SECONDARY CONDUITS FLUSH WITH THE TOP OF THE PAD. WHEN A HANDHOLE IS REQUIRED FOR SECONDARY CONDUITS, TERMINATE THEM NOT LESS T" 3 INCHES ABOVE
TURE IS 36 INCHES MINIMUM FOR 3 INCH, 4 tNCH AND 5 INCH CONDUITS. BOllOM OF HANDHOLE. DO NOT CUT INTO THE CURVED PORTION OF THE ELBOWS. RADIUS OF CURVA-
THE CONDUIT CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT BETWEEN TERMINATING POINTS UMn5 THE SECONDARY CONDUIT CONFIGURATION TO 2 WIDE X 5 DEEP OR 5 WlDE X 2 DEEP (NO ONE CONDUIT IS TO BE COMPLETELY SURROUNDED ON ALL FOUR SIDES BY OTHER CONDUM), USING SPACERS AND ONE SACK CONCRETE SLURRY BACKFILL CONDUITS MAY ALSO 3fi INSTALLED SIDE BY SIDE ON THE BOnOM OF THE TRENCH WITHOUT SPACERS OR CONCRETE SLURRY (4 CONDUITS MAX.). IN THE TRANSITION AREA WHERE THE CONDUllS FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE TRENCH START TOWARD THE SURFACE (THE Sf'RAIGHT PORTION BY
PAD OPENING. AT THE SURFACE POINT, THE CONDUITS MAY BE BUNDLED TOGETHER. USE SDGLE APPROVED BASE, SHADING AND BACKFILL
THE 9tr BEND), SPACERS MAY BE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE 90 BENDS TO ENTER STRAIGHT INTO THE
,/
1 -SACK SLURRY CONCRETE BACKFILL. \
\'
MAXIMUM OF
4 COND,UITS Wk'MQtJT SPACERS OR CONCRETE SLURRY , ' /SHADING
@ THE TOP AND INTEkMEDIATE 3314 HANDHOLE SECTIONS MAY BE ELlMlNATED WHEN INSTALLATION SERVES
IF MORE THAN FIVE 5 INCH CONDUITS ARE USED (RECARDLESS OF THE NUM- ONLY ON€ CUSTOMER ULTIMATELY AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS DO NOT EXCEED PAGE 3426.1 OR AS SPECIFIED IN NOTE OF". BER OF CUSTOMERS), ONE TOP SECTION WD TWO INTERMEDIATE SECTIONS ARE REWIRED.
TlON OF 3 INCH, 4 INCH OR 5 INCH SECONDARY CON b UrrS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THEY DO NOT EXCEED A TOTAL OF SIX OR THE TOTAL OF EACH SIZE CONDUIT SHOWN ON PAGE 3426.1. TWO EXTRA 1 INCH OR TWO EXTRA 2 INCH CONDUITS MAY BE ADDED TO SERVE STREET LIGHT, RECREATION BUILDINGS, ETC .
@ FOR SECONDARY irmunoN WITHOUT A HANDHOLE utnwmy ONE CUSTOMER ONLY), ANY COMB~NA-
@ FOR SECONDARY IN iNslAwTloNs wmi A HANDHOLE, ANY COMBINATION OF 5 INCH, 4 INCH, OR 5 INCH SECONDARY CONDUITS MAY BE USED, PROVIDED THEY DO NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL OF 9 OR THf
CONDUITS MAY BE ADDED TO SERVE STREET LIGHT, RECREATION BUILDINGS, ETC.
THE CONDUITS IN NUMBERED SEQUENCE AS SHOWN.
MAXIMUM OF EACH SIZE CONDUIT (9-3". 9-4' OR 6-57. TWO EXTRA 1 INCH OR TWO EXTRA 2 INCH
@ WHEN THE NUMBER OF REQUIRED CONDUITS IS LESS THAN THE TOTAL SHOWN ON THE SKETCHES, INSTALL
SERVICE GUIDE Indieotes Lotest Revision 1 1 Complctdy Revised I I New Pope I 1 Informotion Removed
SDC&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS RMSION
TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION 3426
@ IF WE INSTALLAnON IS FOR A 12KV TO 4KV TRANSFORM€R (HPR WE), DO NOT USE HANOHOLE AM0 TERMINATE CONDUITS FLUSH Wmr TOP OF PAD. .
.HANDHOLE 36" X 72" (STANDARD 3314), ONE TOP SECTION (STOCK NUMBER 336210), RMEDIAT'E SECTiONS. (STOCK NUMBER 336212) AND ONE PARKWAY COVER (WH LIP MBER 286843).
@ IN SOFT SOILS .A CONCRETE BACKFILL (1-SACK MIX.) IS REQUIRED UNDER THE PAD, 12 INCHES 3EYOND THE SIDE EDGES OF PAD AND 12 INCHES DEEP.
REFERENCE:
P. SEE STANDARD 32t 1 FOR PAD IDENTIFICATION.
0. SEE STANUARD 3370 OR 3371 FOR TRENCH, kILi'lY POSITIONING, SHADING AND BACKFILL REQUIREMENTS.
R. SEE STANDARD 3376 FOR CONCREfE SLURRY, SHADING AND MPE OF CONDUIT.
S. SEE STANDARD 3481 FOR TRANSFORMER BARRIER PROTECTION.
T. SEE STANDARD 3483 FOR MINIMUM OPERATING AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (PAD PMCEMENT).
U. SEE STANDARD 3484 FOR PAD INSTALIATION OF PAD-MOUNTED EOUIPMENT.
V. SEE STANDARD 3486 FOR RETAINING WALL REQUIREMENTS AND CLEARANCES FROM REVERSE
W. SEE STANDARD 3487 FOR RETAINING WALLS.
/
SUBGRADE RETAINING WALLS.
X. SEE SYDARD 3751 FOR TRANSFORMER INSALLATION.
Y. SEE STANDARD 451 2 FOR .EQUIPMENT GROUNDING.
Z. SEE STANDARD 4514 FOR GROUNDING ELCO CONDUCTOR IN PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT.
~- ~ SERVICE CUlDE 1-M Indicates Latest Revimii I I CcxnpIetdy Revised I I ~ew Page 1 I Informotion Removad I
THIS STANDARD SHOWS THE MINIMUM RETAINING WALL AND OPERATING CLEARANCES REWIRED FOR PADS AND SUBSURFACE STRUCTURES. -
PA0 OR STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS AND CONST MINIMUM STD. OPERATING WlDM PAD USAGE
'A' 1 'E' .
- PAD OR. SUBSTRUCTURE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE DIMENSIONS @@@
'd' *I @a' I 'b' CI
&*A*" .
THREE-PHASE CABLE TERMlNAflNG CABINET 600A TO 200A
THREE-PHASE CAPACITOR
- street or 'sidewalk side -
. 7-39 4'4" 18" 18" 18" 8'
3414 5'-4' 5-0" 4'* 8' 18" 1 a-
, 3410 (2290) (1461) (457) (457) (457) (2438)
71626) (1524) (1219) (2438) (457) (457)
..
New Poge I I lnfwmotbn Removed SERWCE WIDE i-' Indimtar Meat R4mm I Completely Rsvbad 1 1 I SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS RMSION
DATE 3-1-02 CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS. FOR PAD-MOUNT AND SUBSURFACE EQUIPMENT FROM ABOVE GROUND OBJECTS
PAD USAGE (CONTINED1
PAD USAGE
THREE-PHASE 'TRANSFORMER
THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER ..
PAD OR STRUCTURE MIMMUM CLEARANCE DIMENSONS @@a
'd'
6'-6" 4*-11" 18" 18" 2' 8'
. 6'4' 6'- 3" 18" 18" 2' a'
CONST. DIMENSIONS AND MINIMUM SID. OPERATING MDTH
*I 'A' '5' '0' 'b' C
3425 (1981) (1499) (457) (457) (610) . (2438)
(1981) (1 905) (457) _(457) (610) (2438) 3426 --- 89-2- 7'- 8'
(2489) . (2337) THREE-PHASE UMFRONT TRANSFORMER ' 3427
SUBSTRUCTURE CLEARANCES FROM MOVE GROUND OBJECTS.
18' 18' --- 2' 8'
(457) (457) (610) (2438)
STRUCTURE USAGE
PRIMARY
NOTES: - THIS 'STANDARD DOES NOT APPLY TO EXISTING COMMUNICATION PEDESTALS PROWING THEY ARE NO CLOSER THAN 4 INCHES TO THE PAD AND THEY DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE DOORS OR THE 8.FOOT WORK SPACE. - THIS PAGE DOES NOT APPLY TO PREFORMED RETAINING WALLS IN STANDARD 3484.3.
MINIMUM CLEARANCE PAD OR STRUCTURE
C~ST DIMENSIONS AND MINIMUM DIMENSIONS a@@
'd'
sm. OPERATING MOTH
I, 'A' B' a 'b' C I.
4'- 1 0" 2'-6" 18" 18" 18" 8'
3523A . (1473) (76 2) (S) (S) (;E) (2438)
- WALL MOUNTED OPERATION.
SLJBSTRUCTURE USAGE
SECONDARY
SECOND ARY/PRIMARY
SECOND ARY/PRIMARY
SECONDARY/PRIMARY '
~
SECOND ARY/PRIMARY
PRIMARY SWITCH ENCLOSURE
NECK SECTION, SECONOARY/PRIMARY
(3325, 3326 MANHOLE)
FUSE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE PAD OR STRUCTURE
DIMENSIONS AND MINIMUM DlMWSlONS &@ CONST. OPERATING WlDM
'd' ,I *A' '8' a 'b' C I,
STD. .
331 2 1'-10" - 2'-11" 18" 18" 18" 5'
331 3 2'-8' . 3'- 8' 18" 18" 18" 5'
331 4 6'4" s-a* 5' 5' 18" 5'
331 S 7'-6" 5'-0' 5' 5' SI** 5'
(457) (457) (457) (1524)
(813) (1118) (457) (457) (457) (1524)
(2032) (1118) (1524) (1524) (457) (1524)
(2286) (1524) (1524) (1524) (1524) (1524)
3316 (2896) (1829) (1524) (1524) (1524) (1524)
5' 5' 18" 18" 331 7
3332 10'-0" 8'-0" 5' 5' 1 E" 18'
(559) (889)
9'-6" 6'-0" 5' 5' 5'** 5' '
1 0'- 0" 8'- 0" (1524) (1524) (457) (457) (3048) (2438)
(1 930) (1676) , (1524) (457) (457) (1524)
CABINETS
SERVICE GUIDE
REVISION
REQUIRE
:<,] lndlcateo Latest Revision' I x I Completdy Revised 1 I New Page I Information Removed
r SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
8'
4TE 7-26-02 CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR PAD-MOUNT AND
SUBSURFACE EQUIPMENT FROM ABOVE GROUND OBJECTS )PD if&rL//d
MINIMUM
3483.2
CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF 'ME CABINET FOR HOT STICK
- THE OPERATING CLEARANCES DESCRIBED IN THIS STANDARD SHALL APPLY TO BUSHES, HEDGES AND OTHER LANDSCAPING' MATERIALS. LOW GROUND COVER IS EXCLUDED. - * PAD SIDE OPPOSITE WlNDOW OPENING (SEE STANDARD 3414) - ** 5 FOOT OPERATING CLEARANCE IS REQUIRED ONLY FOR HOT STICK OPERATION OF .LOADBREAK EQUIPMENT (CABLE TAP(S) WITH LOADBREAK ELBOWS LOCATED ON WE STREET SIDE OF HANDHOE), IF THIS LOADBREAK EQUIPMENT IS NOT PRESENT OR NO FUTURE CABLE TAPS ARE ANTICIPATED IN THIS .AREA, MAINTAIN 18' MINIMUM CLEARANCE.
*** RETAINING WAUS ARE NOT REQUIRED WHEN THE SLOPE REMAINS 6" BELOW AND PARALLEL TO THE JOINT BETWEEN THE BASE AND COVER OF TERMINATOR, SEE STD. 3523.4
REFERENCE:
A SEE STANDARDS 3486.2 FOR RETAlNlNC WALL REQUIREMENTS AND ONE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD LOCATIONS SHOWING CATV AND/OR fELC0 LOCATIONS.
..
..
SEfnnCE GUIDE
3483.2A
..
:*$] Indicotco Latest Rwision I )(I Cwnpletcly Revised I I New Page I Lnformatim Removed
SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS RMSION
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR PAD-MOUNT AND DATE 3-1-02 SUBSURFACE EQUIPMENT FROM ABOVE GROUND OBJECTS APPD m/L/ci&
1 I
SCOPE: THIS STANDARD SflOWS THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTAUTION USED TO PROVIDE EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING. CONDUIT AND PAD INSTALLATION. STANDARD 4510 WHEN THE SAME PARM IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUIT AND PAD INSTALLATION.
THIS METHOD SHALL BE USED WHEN DIFFERENT PARTIES ARE RESPONStBLE FOR THE -
USE PREFERRED OR ALTERNATE TRENCH GROUND WIRE IN
TOP VIEW
STOCK NUMBER ITEM DESCRIPTION OUANTrrY
6' MIN. I
ASSEMBLY UNITS
P------
I I ! 1 PAD (TYPICAL) 1 1 REFER TO WORK ORDER -
,-
2 WIRE, BARE COPPER, 82, 7 STR. SOFT DRAWN AS REQ'D. 812816 (E)
3 GROUND ROD, 5/8" X 8'-0', COPPERWELD 2 603072
4 GROUND ROD. CLAMP 2 23001 6 -~ CD-T/R
GROUND ..ROD CLAMP
RMSION
iTE 7-1-98
'PO @/g
I 6" APPROX. I
'7
RUN WIRE 6 INCHES BELOW FINAL GRADE I\--
SDGBrE ELECTRIC STANDARDS
EQUIPMENT' GROUNDING INSTALLATION . 4512.1
(PREFERRED II)
I 1
5 I COMPRESSION CONNECTOR 1' 1 I 257760 @ 1 J
(ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE IS INSTUD, STANDARD 4510. SHOWN ON STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR TRENCH GROUND 'WIRE IF (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) INSTALLATIONS DO NOT APPLY.
SUBSTITUTE GROUND RODS -
TOP VIEW 0
SDGdcE ELECTRIC STANDARDS REWSION
.
24. EXPOSED
TOP VIEW
(WPICAL PAD WITHOUT HANDHOLE)
24" EXPOSED TAILOUT
4512.2 1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION
SERVICE GUIDE " Indicates Lotest Revision
REVISION
IT€ 1-1-96
Completely Revised I IN- Pope I I Informotion Removed
/ SECTION VIEW
(PAD WITH 3312 HANDHOLE(S)
TRENCH I GROUND WIRE'
SECTION VIEW
(341 6 PAD WITH 331 1 HANDHOLE)
SDG&E ELECTRIC STANDARDS
451 2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION
I I 81U OF WERIAL
I I I I I 1
DESCRIPTION
2
3
I '1 1 PAD
I 1
AS REQ'D 812516 CDWiRE (D) WJRE, BARE COPPER, #2, 7 STR. SOFT DRAWN
CONNECTOR, COMPRESSION As REQ'D 257760 -
WORK ,ORDER I- I
SERVICE.CUlDE . ,I Lndicotes Lotest Revision I , I CMpietaly Revised .I I New Pope I I Infmotion Removed
SDGdtE ELECTRIC STANDARDS REVISION
~~
A IN CASES WHERE THERE ARE TWO GROUND WIRES, SQUEEZE THE GROUND WIRES TOGETHER WITH A
24" TALOUT.WIRE. SECOND 24" TWLOUT WIRE.
'COMPRESSION. CONNECTOR. WHERE THERE IS ONLY ONE TRENCH GROUND WIRE, ADD THE SECOND SDG&E SHAU. FURNISH AND INSTALL THE COMPRESSION CONNECTOR AND THE
B (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WiRE IS REQUIRED WHEN PREFERRED 1 EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING INSTAUATION IS NOT INSTALLED.
REFERENCE:
@SEE STANDARD 3484.1 FOR PAD INSTALIATION USED FOR MOUNTING PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT.
@ SEE STANDARD 4002.2' FOR WIRE INFORMATION.
@SEE STANDARD 4510 FOR (PREFERRED r AND (ALTERNATE) TRENCH CROWD WIRE INSTALMION.
F SEE STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR (PREFERRED IC) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION WHEN
'DIFFERENT PARTIES ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONDUIT AND PAD INSTUAnON.
G. SEE STANDARD 4514 FOR GROUNDING TELCO CONDUCTOR IN PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT.
DATE 1-1-96
APPD g!$I/qj EQU I PM E NT GR OU N D IN G I N STAUATI ON 45 1 2.4
SCOPE THIS STANDARD SHOWS EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION USED WHEN (PREFERRED I ) AND
SHOW ON STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR TRENCH GROUND WIRE IF (PREFERRED I ) OR (ALTERNATE) INSTALLATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUNDlNG FOR TRANSFORMERS INSTALLED ON 3426 & 3427 PADS INSTALLED OVER 3314 HANDHOLES.
(ALTERNATE) TRENCH GROUND WIRE IS INSTALLED, STANDARD 4510. sumTuE GROUND RODS -
COMPRESSION CONNECTOR
-
SECTION MEW
ITEM
1
2
5
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY STOCK NUMBER ASSEMBLY UNITS
PAD 1 REFER TO WORK ORDER -
WRE, BARE COPPER, #2, 7 STR. SOFT DRAWN AS RELO’D. 812816 @ COWIRE
CONNECTOR, COMPRESSION AS REO’D. 257760 (8) -
D SEE STANDARD PAGES 3426.4 L 3427.4 FOR THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER PAD INSTALLATION.
E SEE STANDARD. 4510 FOR PREFERRED AND ALTERNATE TRENCH GROUND WIRE INSTALLATION.
F SEE STANDARD PAGE 4512.1 FOR (PREFERRED II: ) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING INSTALLATION. 8 @ SEE STANDARD 4002.2 FOR WlRE INFORMATION.
SERVICE GUIDE .
REVISION
lndicotes Latest Rsvision I Compietety ~evired I I Nw Pop I I Informotion Removed
SDCdcE ELECTRIC STANDARDS - I 451 2.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDWC; INSTALLATION ITE 1-1-96
APPENDIX D
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DRAWINGS
CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
STANDARD DRAWINGS
ALlG"TAND FNIS.IED WITH SMocmrSW..
SECTION C-C
NOTES:
AUI CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE SHAU BE TYPE 564-0-m.
ALL PIPE IN ACCESSifOLE SHALL BE W.C. OR VITRIFIED WXY PIPE AND SHALL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF ACCESSHOLE.
ACCESSHOLE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN Ac(x3RDANCE WITH ASlMC-478.
STUB OUTS SHALL WE A MlNlMUM LE" OF 2 FEET.
MANHOLE FRAME AND JOINTS n> BESET IN CtAssc'hACRlAR.
/-
HALF PLAN FRAME&COVER
INNER CWER TOP SIDE.
i2"cAsT IRON GATE CAP PER DETAIL HEREON.
.. 1 .. *
SCREW IN PUJG.
SEWER MAIN CEANOUT
NOES
2. CLEANOUTS MAY BE USED WITH, W.C. SEWER MAIN.
3. RISER SHU BE SAME DIAMETER AS SEWER MAIN.
x CARLSBAD MUNlCiPAL WATER DISTRICT RevisionIW IkmEdj .STANDARD DRAWINGS FOR SEWER ~&w&+!/4&
District Engineer I SEWER MAIN .WWT
I J
1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR 8 SOLDERING REQUIREMENTS.
OR 2. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SHALL BE SAME SIZE AS PAINTING REQUIREMENTS. AIR VENT INLET. @ 3. MPRoVEMENT PLANS 5. POSITON ANODE MIDWAY BETWEEN
FOR ASSEMBLY SIZE.
4. AU, VALES AND nmNGS
PIPELINE AND VALVE BOX.
I I BELOW SURFACE I & 2' AIR-VACUUM
1 1 VALVE ASSEMBLY & APPURTENANCE
STD. DWG. NO,
MAY 2003 w7
D.I. MAIN
ITEM DESCRIPTION
DOUBLE BAND BRASS SERVlCE SADDLE. 1 CORP. STOP 1” WATER SERVICE. 2 CORP. STOP 2” WATER SERVICE. 3 4 CORP. STOP 1” AIR VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLY. CORP. STOP 2’ AIR VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLY. 5 6 2 BLOW-OFF MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY. 7
0 2“ BLOW-OFF / AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY.
ASE ASSFMBLY. 1 1 MANUAL AIR RELE
STEEL MAIN
SPEC /DWG
3 4 7 7 5 6&7
’ 6&7
FOR WATER SERVICE
CONNECTION ( TYP. )
10 11
3000 PSI FORGED STEEL COUPLING WELDED TO MAIN.
INSULATING BUSHING. ( LE XAN OR DELRIN 1. 10
10
APPR DATF , OUTLETS ON D.I. OR STEEL MAIN FOR
I INCH THRU 2 INCH ASSEMBLIES I I I 1
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 w9
SECTION A-A
EM 1 DESCRlPllON
1 CL 3000 STEEL COUPLING - STEEL WELDED. 2 SEE DRAWING NO W9
3 INSULATING BUSHING - NPT LEXAN OR DERLIN. 4 9" DIA. 10 GA. SADDLE.
6 1" dc 2" COPPER SERVICE PlPF TYPE " K" SOFT 1.
~~ I
SIZING TABLE I VALVE OR I STEEL IlNSULATlNGl
SPEC/DWG
NOTES:
1. DIELECTRIC CONNECTlONS SHALL BE REQUIRED ON ALL AIR AND VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLIES, MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLIES, BLOW-Off ASSEMBLIES AND WATER SERVICE ASSEMBLIES WHERE COPPER TUBING OR BRASSS PIPE CONNECTIONS ARE MADE TO STEEL MAINS.
ON APPR IDATE
I TO STEEL MAIN
DIELECTRIC CONNECTION STD. DWG. NO.
MAY WIO 2003
II dJ II
ON APPR DATF VALVE BOX
ASSEMBLY
SECTION A-A SECTION B-€3
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 W I3
DOMESTIC WATER RECLAIMED WATER
NOTES
1. IN NON-ROAD AREAS PLACE MARKER POST NEXT TO VALVE BOX ASSE BLY AS DIRECTED BY ME ENGINEER. DRAWING NO. 23 ).
2 SEE DRAWING NO. 23 FOR GATE VALVE EXTENSION. 3. UPPER SIDE OF UD TO RECIEVE 2 COATS OF PAINT. SEE SPECIFICA ONS FOR PAINTING REQUIREMENTS, ‘1 PAGE 4 ).
SEE Y
REINFORCING
STEEL DETAIL.
END CAP BLOCK.
EM DESCRIPTION 1 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK. (560-C-3250) 2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP. 3 NO. 4 REINFORCING STEEL 4 VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY. 5 FL X RT OR FL X MJ GATE VALE.
VERTICAL BEND.
SPEC/DWG
NOTES:
APPR pATF CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS
FOR NON-RESTRAINED JOINTS
1.FllTNGS SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON FOR D.I.P. & P.V.C.; CAST IRON FOR A.C.P. (CEMENT UNED SHORT BODY).
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 W15
TEE (SIDE VIEW).
2. FOR kc. PIPE A MIN. 3'-3" TO A 6'-6" MAX LENGTH INTO AND OUT OF ALL FITTINGS.
3. CONCRETE SHALL BE 6 SACK, 3250 P.S.I.). A MIN. 3 DAY CURING TIME B Ei ORE HYDROSTATIC 'TEST. 4. SEE DWG'S. NO. 17 & 18 FOR REDUCER, PLUG, & BUIKRFLY VALVE MRUST BLOCKS.
-.
TEM DESCRlPTlON
1 GATE VALE 2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP.
3 4 5 VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY.
NO. 4 REINFORCING STEEL CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK. (3250 P.S.I.) 560-C-3250
REINFORCING TRENCH ELEVATION STEEL DETAIL. P.V.C, & D.I.P. PIPE TRENCH 'ELEVATION PVC PIPE
SPFC/D WG
19 13
TRENCH SECTION
(TYPICAL)
N APPR DE GATE VALVE INSTALLATION
P.V.C., D.I.P., A.C.P. & STEEL PIPE.
TRENCH ELEVATION
STEEL PIPE
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 W16
NOTES~ 6 8 10 12 Pioe Diameter in inches 14 16
1. BASED ON 225 PSI TEST PRESSURE AND BEARING VALUES OF DRY SOILS,
2. VALUES FROM CURVES ARE FOR TEES AND DEADENDS, LE. ; STRAIGHT UNE THRUST.
3. FB Cf)&IaS NOT COVERED BY CURVES, SPECIAL MRUST BLOCKS MUST BE COMPUTED
FOR w m. 1.4 VALUE FROM CURE 0.8 VAWE FRW CURE w gIBEND: 0.4 VALUE FROM CORK
AA
CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
APPR DATE STD. DWG. NO. W19
I MAY 2003
THRUST BLOCK BEARJNG AREAS
t
,lb!' BEVEL
EXISTING
* i i
t I I
DOMESTIC WATER
NOTES:
1. ENTIRE MARKER POST SHALL BE PAINTED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
$18" IF VALVE SET AT FINISH ! GRADE.
CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
DON APPR IDATE STD. DWG. NO. EXTENSION STEM AND
MARKER POST t MAY W23 2003
@-
1 4” STEEL PIPE. GALVANIZED / PAINTED 2 470-C-2000 CONCRETE FOOTING. 3 FILL PIPE WtTH 470-C-2000 CONCRETE ( ROUND OFF TOP 1.
I
a-
APPR I DATE
I PROTECTION POST
c. c. 0
r)
I n
STD. DWG. NO. W 24
.!!!
I
FINISHED IGRADE.
NOTE:
PIPE SHAL BE PAINTED IN CONFORMANCE WITH DISTRICT SP ECI FI CATIONS.
I I I I I I MAY 2003
GREEN AREA WIRING AND INSTALLA llON
SEE DWG. NO. W28
N APPR OAF ' AT GRADE 2-WIRE TEST STATION
WITH ANODES I
FXOTHERMIC
ELD (W) SEE
2WG. NO. W27 -7
STD, DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 W26
LTO REMAININ ANODE (SEE NOTE 1
CML&TC STEEL REC WA ER
I-NO. 12 WITE
7HW ANODE LEAD
HMWE PIPE LEADS
2-NO. 8 BLACK
. MAGNESfUM ANODE SEE DWG. NO. W29-
SEE NOTE 1 (2 REQRD)
6' MIN (SEE NOTE 2)
I
' SIDEWALK
12" -\
t
WARNING TAPE
3
. nc h
NOTES:
1. 1 ANODE SHOW' 2 ARE REQUIRED. ANODES TO BE
INSTALLED PARALLEL TO WE PIPE, 15 FEET
APART IN AUGERED HOLES 12' 5EEP. ANODE LEADS TO
BE TRENCHED TO CTS AT A DEP7H OF 36".
INSTALL ANODES AT A 6' MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM PIPE. 2.
NO SCALE
GRAPHITE COVER
STAR TlNG POWER
METAL WELDING POWER
GRAPHITE MOLD
APPR DATF, EXOTHERMIC WELD PROCESS
&rT SEP 1, RLE STRUCNRE CONNECnON AREA (3 IN x 3 IN) TO BARE SHINY METAL AND CLEAN.
STD. DWG. NO. W27
ezadIlllg STFP 2 SlRlP INSULATION FFZW WRE ATTACH SLEEK5
1 h WHERE REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER. &g STEP 3, HOW MOLD RRMLY WITH OPENING AWAY FROM OPERATOR AND IGNITE WIlH FUNT GUN. b-7 STEP 4, REMOVE SLAG FROM CONNECnON AND PEN WD FOR SOUNDNESS
STEP 5, COW3 CONNECllON AND EXPOSED STRUCTURE
SURFACE WlTH A BITUMINOUS COATlNG COMPOUND.
PLACE PLASllC SHIED CAP FIRMLY OVER
CONNECllON.
NOTES:
1. ALL WlRE WELDS SHALL BE MINIMUM 3 INCHES APART: 2. STANDARD WELD CARTRIDGES SHALL BE USED FOR STEEL SURFACES,
NO SCALE
CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
I MAY 2003
CONCRETE CONCRETE ESTBOX, SEE PAVEMENT OR DWG. NO. W30.
18” SLACK MRE
TO CML&TC
WAER LINE
WIRE I. D. LEGEND
APPR DATE 2-WIRE TEST STATION WITH ANODES
WIRING DIAGRAM
WIRE SIZE LABEL IDENllRCA llUN
A&B 2 - NO8 HMWE SlL/CML&TC RW
-
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2 003 W28
NOTES:
1. NO MRE OR CABLE SPUCES ARE PERMITTED EXCEPT AS INDICA ED IN THE DRAWINGS OR AS SPECIflCAUY APPROVED BY THE ENGINER.
2. WRES SHALL BE TAGGED USING MINIMUM 10 P7: FONT AND CONTAIN: PIPEJNE MAERIAL & SIZE DATE INSTALLED PIPELINE STAnON NO.
3. PROMDE 18” SLACK WRE AT W TO PIPE AND COIED IN EST BOX.
NO SCALE
MAGNESIUM INGOT DIMENSIONS:
laslm
5" X 6" X 32" LONG INGOT WEIGHP 48 LBS.
PKGD WIGHE 105 LBS. (APPROX.)
APPR DATF STD. DWG. NO. W29 MAY 2003 MAGNESIUM ANODE
CHEMICAL COMPOSI77ON (HIGH PO EN VAL)
ELEMENT CONTENT %
Aluminum 0.01 0 Manganese 0.50 TO 1.30 Copper 0.02 MAX Nickle 0.001 MAX
Iron 0.03 MAX
Other . 0.05 MAX
Magnesium BALANCE
NO SCALE
CARLSBAD MUNl Cl PAL WATER Dl STRl CT
CAST IRON COER MARKED AS SHOW
APPR DATF CONCRETE TEST BOX
3-
STD. DWG. NO.
MAY 2003 W30
I
LBS. LBS.
7/8
NOFS:
I. ALL AT GRADE EST STA~ONS SHALL BE THE CIRCULAR,
CONCRETE. AT-GRADE TYPE WIM A METAL LID.
A. BOTTOM OF TEST BOX SHALL BE NA~E SOIL
B. A REINFORCED CONCRETE PAD (24" SQUARE X 4" THICK)
IS REQUIRED AROUND EST BOXES LOCATED IN UNPAVED
AREAS.
C. PLACE EST BOX BEHIND SIDEWALK WllH APPROVAL OF
CITY OF CARLSBAD. DO NOT PLACE IN STREET OR MEDIAN.
NO SCALE
I I CASKET - WE "E" era GLASS W/ RECI O-RING
SLEEVE -GlO GLASS WASHER -MO GLASS
STEEL WASHER & NUT
(BOTH SIDES)(2 PLS)
INSULA (BO 7H
EXTERNAL PETROLA lUM
WAX TAPE WAP SEE rlNSiJLA TING GASKET r EXOTHERMIC EL
INSULA TING SLEEVE
SPECIflCAlJONS -\ \ 1 (WE E) / PROCESS.
SEE NOE r
(W) W27
.D SEE
NOES:
1. FULL LENGTH INSULA TING SLEEKS REQUIRED A T ALL WRU-FLANGE
BOLTS OR SNDS. HALF LENGW SLEEVES REQUIRD AT THREADED
BOLT HOLES AT VALVE BONNET AND BASE
ON THIS SHEfl. 2. INSTALL. EST BOX BEHIND CURB SIMILAR TO DETAIL 1
NO SCALE
CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT
BURIED INSULATING FLANGE APPR DATE , STD. DWG. NO. W31
1 MAY 2003
..
I I Y Y
. ' FLEXIBLE COUPLING
2-BOND WIRES-A WG NU. 2 7-NO 6 AWG HMWPE STRD. COPPER WlRE (TYP) (TYP) SEE NOTE 4 Wl TH HM WPE INSUL.
SPOOL EX0 THERMIC WELD
(TYP) SEE DWG. NU. W27
TEE VAL VE
NOTES:
7. ALL WlRE WELDS SHALL BE 3" APART MIN.
2.
. 3.
4. BOND WIRE SIZE SHALL BE AWG NO 2. TWO ARE REQUIRED.
ALL BOND WIRES SHALL BE INSTALLED. AT MINIMUM LENGTHS.
BOND .WIRES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED ACCROSS INSULATING JOINTS.
ONE NO. 6 AWG HMWPE IS REQUIRED FROM PIPE TO VALVE BODY, SPOOL, COUPLING, AND TEE.
NO SCALE
.-
SAN DIEGO COUNTY REGIONAL
STANDARD DRAWINGS
This drawing is flQI in conformance with lotest UBC ond should be used with care ahd judgment.
evision
ilGlNAL
I
PLAN
Bend Down
381mm (153 (Typ.)
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Date
Kerchevol 72/75
Manhole Frame and Cover see Standord Drawing Id-3
For step details, see Standard Drowing 0- 1 1
4-#I3 (84) Around pipe
NOTES SECTION A-A
1. See Stondard Drawing D-11 far additional notes and detoils. 2. Concrete bose sholl be 332kg/M3-C-22Mpa (560-C-5250) 3. PJI precast components shall be reinforced with 6.35mm (l/4”)
4. All joints sholl be set in Class C mortar. 5. Maintain 3Bmm 1 l/Zm) clear spocing between reinforcing and
6. Exposed edges of concrete shall be rounded with a radius of 13mm (t/2’).
diameter steel, wound spirally on 102rnm (4”) centers.
surface unless a i herwise noted.
LEGEND ON PLANS
-ft--H STORM DRAIN CLEANOUT - TYPE A
It I I
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
DRAWlNG ~-9 NUMBER
.- RlGlW
This drawing is NX in conformance with lotest UBC and should be used with core and judgment.
Approved Date- SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Kerchewl 12/75
on u -no
457mm (18") max. for horizontol reinforcing, see table on page >
38mm 1(-1/23 Clearance, Typ
OP n TO
13mm (2") Typicoldk
NPICAL BOX SECTION
c I c
102mm (4 356rnrn 14 ad, \
19mm /3/4") dio. steel bars, hbt' dipped golvonized 36
%I
STEP DETAIL
NOTES
1. Concrete shall be 332kg/M3-C-22-Mpo (560-C-3250) unless otherwise noted. 2. Reinforcing steel sholl comply with this drowing unless otherwise specified. 3. Reinforcing steel sholl be interrnediote grode deformed bors conforming to latest ASTM specifications.
4. Bends sholl be in occordonce with latest ACI code. 5. Minimum splice length for reinforcing shall be 30 diameters.
6. Floor sholl have a wood trowel finish ond, except where used as junction boxes, sholl hove o minimum
7. Depth V is measured from the top of the structure to the flowline of the box. 8. Wall thickness ond reinforcing steel required moy be decreosed in occordonce with toble above. 9. Wall thickness sholl be stepped on the outside of the box.
slope of 1 inch per foot toward the outlet.
10. When the structure depth V exceeds 4 feet, steps shall be cast into the woll at 38lmm (15") intervals from
381mm (15") above floor to within 305MM (12) inches of top of structure. Where possible place steps in
woll without pipe opening, otherwise over opening of smallest diometer.
11. Alternote step moy be an opproved steel reinforced polypropylene step. 12. Upon opprwal of the Agency ond the Engineer, os defined by Section 6703 of the Business ond Professions Code, the use of precast storm structures is occeptoble os an alternote to cast-in-ploce. Precast units sholl conform to ASTM stondords and be manufactured in a permanent facility designed for thot purpose.
INLETS AND CLEANOUTS
NOTES AND DETAILS
RECOMMENDED BY mE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
This drawing is in conformonce with lotest UBC ond should be used with core and judgment.
Revision By Approved
ORIGINAL Kerchevol
Md Metric 1. Stonton
I BOX SECTION REINFORCEMENT I
RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE . SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Date
12/75
03/05 INLETS AND CLEANOUTS
NOTES AND DETAILS OR*WlNG D- 1 1 B NUMBER
HORIZONTAL REINFORCING
I - I zu
wision
:IGINAL
0 3/16’ I1
SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING ByJApproved Date 1 Ksrchevall2/75 I
I I
I -.I
I d. 3 -7- 1
3’ - 5 3/8*
AJ
i
PLAN
4” I 12-1
NOTE Hot dip galvanize all parts after fabrication.
Anchors
SECTION A-A
* WELDED STEEL GRATE FRAME
II II I I I
RECWENDED BY ‘ME SAN MECO REGIONAL STANDARDS WITTEE
Choirpalon RCL lQ248 Date
DRAING D-13 NUMBER
3/0'9 Bar /-
By
3IGINAL
3 1/2"x 1/4" bars
Approved Date
Kerchsval 12/75 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING
DRAINAGE STRUCTURE GRATE
PIAN
End Bars 2 i/2"~ 3/8"
SECTION A
End' Bars 'A
SECTION B
NOTES 1. Hot dip galvanize all parts after fabrication. 2. Dimensions to centerline of bars unless otherwise noted. 3. Weight: 141 pounds. 4. Not to be used in pedestrian areas.
RECOUMPlDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REClONAL STANDARDS CMIUITEE
I-
T -1
RECOULlPlDED BY THE SAN MEGQ REcloNAL STANDARDS co~irm roved Dote ?evisim By App
lRlClNAL Solomon 7/79 SAN DlEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWlNG
iL
I I
J CATCH'BASIN - TYPE I
a3 E e n s 5
8'
0
c 0
c
E UJ
Chokpmm R.C.E. 10246 Dote
DRAM" D-29
~ NUMBER
\C#4 around
pipe opening SECTION A-A
NOTES
Lt-B
PlAN
A 4
For frame and grate detail see Dmwing D-I3 de D-15
SECTlON B-B
LEGEND ON PLANS
1. See Standard Drawing D-11 for addiiinal notes and details.
2. When "V exceeds 4', steps shall be Malied lol
I-
u SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Date
2/95
-
REOCYMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO waoNu STANDARDS COUUI~
I
r 0
evision By
ZlClNAL
3/4” Crushed Rock
SECTION
Approved
Parkineon
NOTES 1. For trenching on improved streets see Standard Dmwing G-24
2. (*) indicates minimum relative compaction.
or G-25 for resurfacing details.
PIPE BEDDING AND TRENCH BACKFILL
FOR STORM DRAINS
- &-on RC.L 19248
WWlNG D-60 NUMBER
Elevation
Clearance (min.)
* with 6' Curb Face
RECOYMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMTEE Oved ':- SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING Revision By Appr
IRIGINAL Kercheval 12 5
Choirpuson RCE. 19246 Dote
DRAMNG c-2 NUMBER
CURB AND GUTTER - COMBINED
NOTES
1. Concrete sholl be^ 520-C-2500. ' 2. See Stondard Drawing G-10 for joint detoils. 3. Slope top of curb 1/4" per foot toward street. LEGEND ON PLANS
I; varies -- Width a8 ahown on plan c
1/2' R
-114. ft 8 __--- r- / f r--- ---J I I
Weakened plane Joint
evision
?IGINAL
L -'- - 1 --- -----.I
~ SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING By Approved Date
Kercheval 12/75
SIDEWALK - TYPICAL SECTIONS
- NON-CONTIGUOUS
r- I
I Wectkemed Pbne Joint l------J I
NOTES
2 See standard Dmwing E9 and G-10 for joint ddoits. 1. Con& ohdl k 5204-2500.
CONTIGUOUS
NUMBER
Mid Point of Curb Return-
- Revision
ORIGINAL
n / I I I
RECOUHENDED BY W SAN MECC SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE By Approved Date
Kerchsval 12/75
P.C.R. -
I
I
NOTES
1 . Expansion joints - - - at curb returns, adjacent to structures and at 45' intervals.
(See Standard Drawing G-10).
SIDEWALK JOINT LOCATIONS Chairparam RCE. 19246 Dab
~ NUMBER
2. Weakened Plane Joints ------ at mid point of curb return, when required, and at 15'
intervals from P.C.R's (See Standard Drawing G-10).
3. 1/4' ~~OOWS- with 1/4' radius edges at 5' intervals
=* 1- eanslan Joint Rller Material
- 'evision By Approved Date
RlGlNAL Porkinson 2/95
;
I
3/8' (Sidewalk)
EXPANSION JOINT
RECOUMNDED BY ME SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS CWMlllEE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING
- Chabpuaon RCL 10246 Date
DluwG G-10 CONCRETE JOINT DETAILS
NUMBER
e
-Preformed Joint filler
**. .................... ...'. ....
WEAKENED PLANE JOINT
GUllER AND PAVEMENT
1/8' R
I I Ll/Z" x 24' Smooth, Greased OT Oiled Bar, 30' C.C.
CONTACT JOINT
............... ...... .................... .. ..I. .......... = . .e . .... N .. .... ..
I
.e I ...... .......
.b.. ... b'. ... i. ... .L.. ... C .. .' - . : .. ........... ..
WEAKENED PlANE JOINT
CURB AND SIDEWALK
P
?
.-
Concrete to be removed NOTE
When diince from, %ea to be d, to Uilsting joint, edge or
score mark is less than minimum shown, 'Am0 to be renmdD shpn be extended to joint, edge or scon mok SECTION Showing Cut
REWMMENDED BY WE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS CO)rlMmEE Revision By Appro@d Date SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING RIGINAL Kercheval 12/75
- ChoilperBon R.C.Ll9248 Date
DRAWING G-11
CONCRETE CURB, GUlTER, SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT NUMBER
Existing Scon Mark .I Araa to be removed - 5' or from Joint to. joint in panel whrchever IS less
1 SIDEWALK PIAN I
Existing Score Mo Existing Joint I
I SIDEWALK SECTION I
5' or from joint to joint- - 30" Min. from existing joint or edge of curb
Existing Joint or Edge
%I panel whichever is less. Area to be removed 1
I CURB PLAN I
U Existing Joint or Edge U a z Area to be removed 15' Min. from existing jotnt I 1 , 0 I or edge of pavement -I{ -1- 5' (Min.)
1 PAVEMENT SECTION
Remaining edge to be smooth and true with no shatter.+
Imported Topsoil or amended
rock free Native Soil. .f
By Approved Date SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING RlGlNAL Parkinson 02/95
TRENCH DETAIL P.V.C. AND/OR
COPPER PIPE (3'' AND SMALLER)
/ Finlshed Grade
R-DJDD BY ME SAN DIECC REaONAL STANDARDS COlJMlN
- Chalrprnon RCE 19246 Doto
DRAWJG 1-25 NUMBER
F- In
2 4"+ dia. of i e
Native soil free of large (3" dia. or greder).rocks and debris.
Sand, Class A Topsoil, or approved equal.
Details not shown are same as above.
MULTIPLE PIPE INSTAUTION DETAIL
(non-pressure pipe only, see Note 6 for pressure pipe)
NOTES 1. Bockfill material shall be compacted to a relative compaction of 902 or more. 2. All P.V.C. pipe shall lay free in the trench with no induced strain and with sufficient allowance for exeansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Teflon tape, 3/4 wide shall be used on all threaded connections.
4. The letter W shall be stamped or chiseled on the improvement (curb-sidewalk) directly above the pressure pipeline. 5. All plastic pipe under pavement shall be installed in a P.V.C. sleeve. 6. Minimum clearance between pressure pipes shall be 2 inches.
K.RlEGER & STEWART
STANDARD DRAWINGS
WARNING TAPE (POLWINYLCHWRIDE PIPE ONLY)
PIPE ZONE BACKFILL, 1" MAXIMUM SEE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BAslC PIPELINE SPECIFICATIONS. COMPACTED TO 90% RWME COMPACTION, MINIMUM, -"
PIPE DWETER TRENCH - B(TTTOM WIDTH
12 OR LESS 2.0 25
14 THRU 18 2.5 3.5
20 THRU 27 3.0 4.0
30 THRU 36 4.0 5.0 -
MINIMUM (FEEf) MAXIMUM (FEIT) (INCHES)
TRENCH BAcKnL 8" WMUM SIZE IN LAYERS NOT EXCEEDING 1' IN DEMH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BASIC PIPELINE SPECIRCATIONS /
PPROVED: KRIEGER dr STEWART, ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
DATE
GROUND SURFACE, COMPACTED TO BOX REEATWE COMPACTION, MINIMUM, (IMPROVED OR UNIMPROVED)
KRIEGER 8c STEWART INCORPORATED
LOCASOR (POLNINYLCHLORIDE WIRE-,, \\
PIPE ONLY)
REVISION
WATERMAIN
DESIGN FLOWLINE
I
BY1 DATE STANDARD DRAWING W101
4. WHENEVER EXISTING CURBS ARE BUNG USED FOR GRADE CONTROL, PlPUlNES SW BE WD ON PROJECTED CONTINUOUS SLOPES THROUGH LOWED HIUS, HUMPS, AND MOUNDS AS AT INTERSECTIONS AND CHANNEL BERMS. WITH CONTINUOUS PIPELINE SLOPE. PIPELINE TRENCH DEPTHS SHALL BE INCREASED TO ACCOMPUSH SAME AND PIPELINE CWER SHW BE INCREASED ACCORDINGLY.
PIPELINE GRADES SHALL BE SELECTED TO MAlNTAIN MINIMUM COVER
5. WHENEVEJ? D(ISnNG UTILITY FACILITIES, EXCEPT SEWS, ARE PICOUNERED, PIPELINES SHALL CLUIR THEM BY 12" MINIMUM, BOTH HOREOMUY AND W-Y, CONSlsrpcT Wmc ABOVE PIPELINE REQUIREMENTS. PIPELINES SHALL CLEAR SEWERS IN ACCORDANCE WlTH STANDARD ORAWING WlO24 AND W1028. SPECIFIED
PIPELINES SHALL NOT BE IN CONTACT WlTH OR REST AGAINST OMER UnllTy FACIUTIES.
6. WHERE BOTTOM OF EXCAVATION IS IN ROCK WHICH CANNOT BE EXCAVATED TO PROVIDE UNIFORM BEARING FOR THE PIPE, TRENCH SHALL BE OVERMCAVATED 8" MlNtMUM AND REFILLED Wrm SELECT EXCAVATED MATERM OR lMPOFmD BACKFIU MATERW. COMPACTED TO 90% MINIMUM RUAM COMPACTION.
CLEARANCES OR sEpmnoNs SHAU NOT BE REDUCED UNLESS ORDERED OR PERM^ BY DI~ICT.
I PIPELINE TRENCH R.C.E.
II I 1
\
LAP Wa TYPE m CUT-TO-FIT SSL
-- - TYPE H CUT-TO-FIT TVPE N CVr-TO-FIT
TYPICAL JOINT REPAIR DETAIL I FIELD CONSfRUeTION)
*ISTALL MOLES llOR2 AS REWMED) RDNPDRCED PER STANDARD DRwl)trrUL
RWDVE BLhm WT G&.PKET WHERE &SrsLE INSTALL FILLER ROO AN0 W2.D W&hRTLGHT.
WATERUAIN
\
EXISTIN6 SPIGOT DID
KRIEGER & STEWART
WELDED STEEL PIPE
INCORPORATED
APPROVED : KRIEGER i STEWART, ENGINEERlNQ CDNSUUAm ---
I1 I ' CUT-TO-FIT & JOINT n.c.Ic.
11 I -- REPAIR DETAIL
11 I1 II
RM(n0N lBYl DATE 1 STANDARD DRAWING WIW
PIPE DWmR
(INCHES)
4 - 12
14 - 24
27 - 36
PROVIDED PIPE CYLINDER AND SHEAR RING ARE FULLY THICKNESS ENCASED BY SHEAR RING BLOCK.
1 CEMENT MORTAR LINING
DESCRIPTION
CEMENT MORTAR UNED OR CEMENT MORTAR COATED WELDED STEEL PIPE OR
AS SPECIFIED FOR PIPNNE.
ITEM
1
2 RANGE
3 FLANGED BY PUSH-ON ADAPTOR
APPROVED MATERM LlST NO.
A-Ol/D-O1
c-01
D-03
iPPROVED KRIEGER dc STEWART, ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS KRIEGER & STEWART INCORPORATED
R.C.E.
II
WELDED STEEL PIPE SHEAR RING DETAIL 11 II
I 1 REVISION !BY DATE STANDARD DRAWtNC W138
APPENDIX E
CMWD'S APPROVED MATERIALS LIST FOR USE ON
CONSTRUCTION OF POTABLE AND
RECYCLED WATER FACl LIT1 ES
e
fi! Q) r
U
7 U
p! .-
d
$ x n
a
Z W a P
n
3
3,
5
?
u) u) a, - E
cn rJ CJ) E Y
3
E I-
cu n
Y
E E 0 mu us sT
-.
2 C <
L L Y UJ FJ
0 kG 0 v) N
-
w
I x 9 Y a a a
-
0 u) 6
OJ c
a
.- *
z
Wi ?i s
Icu
- 9 s
s
E 1 0 0
L a
W > 1
1 4
Q! P
0 0
Q)